April 2016designworldonline.com motioncontroltips.com
Transmission
REFERENCE GUIDE
POWER
Cover.indd 1 5/2/16 11:24 AM
Our wide range of products
gives you maximum design freedom.
As the leader in linear motion, THK is dedicated to developing not just
the best choices, but also the most choices in linear motion solutions.
Our virtually limitless range of products includes linear motion guides,
ball screws, actuators, specialty products and more - many featuring our
patented Caged Technology.
To learn more, give us a call at 1-800-763-5459
or visit www.thk.com.
84014203 THKProdLineAd(DW)_840-06205 GN-N Ad(MSD) 12/23/14 2:35 PM Page 1
THK_PTGuide4-16.indd 1 4/29/16 9:53 AM
Whatever keeps you up at night, we’ve got a solution—the largest selection of motors,
pumps and air-moving devices available. Plus, one-of-a-kind solutions ready to be
custom-engineered for your precision industrial, commercial, combustion or transportation
application. If you can dream it, you’ll find it at Solution City.
FOR MOTION CONTROL INNOVATION,
SOLUTION CITY NEVER SLEEPS.
© 2015 by AMETEK Inc. All rights reserved.
100 East Erie Street
Kent, OH 44240
ametekdfs.com
AMETEKPMC 18611_City Never Sleeps Ad_9x10.875.indd 1 7/29/15 9:14 AMAMETEK PMC (Solutions City) 8-15 (NEW).indd 1 4/29/16 9:56 AM
promessinc.com
810-229-9334
Providing solutions to the industry since 1984
“Cloning the Perfect Part”
WHY?WHY?
Still putting
science projects
on your floor?
Still putting
science projects
on your floor?
Promess provides
you with a
COMPLETE system
to help make YOUR
life easier.
Don’t guess what you need, let Promess help you.
Call us today to set up a visit to our Process
Development Center
EMAP
REMAP
TorquePRO
Promess_PTGuide4-16.indd 2 4/29/16 9:58 AM
HaydonKerk LinearActuators...
1500 Meriden Road
Waterbury,CT 06705 U.S.A.
Telephone: 203 756 7441
SOLUTIONSINMOTION
®
Haydon Kerk Motion Solutions hybrid and can-stack linear actuators continue to offer equipment designers new motion control solutions
that provide unmatched performance-to-size ratios, patented technologies and thousands of configuration options, and a vast experience in
customized solutions.
HYBRID actuators are available in six sizes from Size 8: 21 mm2 (0.8 -in.) to Size 34: 87 mm2 (3.4-in.) – capable of delivering up to 500 pounds
(2224 N) of force. Travels per step range from .001524 mm (.00006-in) to .127 mm (.005-in), with micro stepping capability for even finer resolution.
An integrated, programmable IDEA™ Drive is also available for Size 17 hybrids.
The G4 Series represents the industry’s most robust and most powerful CAN-STACK linear actuators. The G4 Series offers diameters of
20 mm (.79-in), 26 mm (1-in), and 36 mm (1.4-in). The can-stack product line also includes motors with diameters of 15 mm (0.59-in), 20 mm (.79-in) ,
26 mm (1-in), 36 mm (1.4-in) and Ø 46 mm (1.8-in), available with captive, non-captive or external linear lead-screws.
Haydon Kerk Motion Solutions continues to be an innovative motion control technology company with a global network of
people, facilities and services dedicated to engineering and manufacturing the world’s most advanced linear motion solutions.
For more information: www.HaydonKerk.com > Linear Actuators
Size 17
- 43 mm2
(1.7-in)2
non-captive
hybrid linear
actuator with
programmable
IDEA™ stepper
motor drive
High performance, precision linear
motion technology
25000 Series G4, can-stack
captive, non-captive, external
linear actuator steppers
25 mm (1.0-in) diameter
Size 8 -
21 mm2
(0.8-in)2
captive hybrid linear
actuator stepper motor.
Also available in Single and
Double Stack, non-captive
and external linear.
Size 34 -
87 mm2
(3.4-in)2
captive hybrid
linear actuator
stepper motor.
Non-captive and
external linear
also available.
Size 17 -
43 mm2
(1.7-in)2
Double Stack -
external,
non-captive,
captive hybrid
linear actuator
stepper motors
Call 1 8OO 243 2715
www.HaydonKerk.com
Haydon Kerk 4-16.indd 3 4/29/16 9:59 AM
4	 DESIGN WORLD 	 4 • 2016 	 www.designworldonline.com
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
MOTION
designs continually
evolve, but will always
rely on mechanical devices, particularly
where the drive of an electric motor
engages a load to execute machine
tasks. In fact, as the technical reviews
in this 2016 Power Transmission
Reference Guide explain, applications
for mechanical motion components only
proliferate as technical innovations make
them increasingly effective.
Consider this Reference Guide’s
section on bearings by Associate Editor
Mike Santora. The most common bearing
applications are in heavy machinery and
industrial setups as always, but renewable-
energy use is spurring innovations to get
higher capacities as turbines push the
limits of bearing designs.
There’s also increased demand
for complete system solutions over
components, which is changing the
POWER-TRANSMISSION
COMPONENTS ARE MAINSTAYS
POWER-TRANSMISSION
COMPONENTS ARE MAINSTAYS
design of linear systems, actuators and gearmotors, as well as subsystems
such as conveyors and robotics. Consider the section on gearmotors in
this Reference Guide by Senior Editor Miles Budimir. Here, manufacturers
are predesigning and assembling more motors than ever with gearboxes
upfront, for an ever-expanding array of ac gearmotors and servo
gearmotors. Such gearmotors are increasingly accurate as well, particularly
those sporting planetary gearsets.
That’s thanks in part to how manufacturers are making gearing with
the latest approaches in design, machining and assembly. Check out
the sections in this Reference Guide covering gear-design consultation,
custom gear designs and analysis, as well as general speed reducers, worm
gearing, and shaft-mount sets. These articles detail common and custom
offerings that optimize inertia matching and speed output. In fact, today’s
software now lets designers get design-specific gearing—and other power-
transmission components—at lower cost than that of general-purpose
offerings from just a decade ago.
In fact, today’s moving designs rely on an increasingly diverse array
of mechanical components to protect expensive subsystems and change
motion-system dynamics to simplify programming. These actuators,
ballscrews, bearings, brakes, chains, collars, couplings, gearing, rails and
rack-and-pinion sets transmit power in ways that get higher performance
than ever.
LISA EITEL
SENIOR EDITOR
@DW_LISAEITEL
DW half p
Editorial_PTGuide_V3.LE.MD.indd 4 4/29/16 10:20 AM
WWW.MOTIONCONTROLTIPS.COM
WEBINAR ALERT
DOWNLOAD ON DEMAND:
TRENDS TO WATCH
IN MOTION CONTROL
bit.ly/1Lxaexl
So use this Reference Guide as a review of basic component
functions or as an update on what’s new in power-transmission
designs—and to get instructions on how to make the most of
proliferating features to meet evolving motion-system requirements.
As mechanical designs change, count on us Design World
editors to bring you technology updates to help you specify and
integrate the right components. We invite your feedback and
requests for technical information. There are innumerable ways
to reach us: Email me at leitel@wtwhmedia.com or tweet to
@DW_LisaEitel, @Linear_Motion and @Motion_Control.
Connect with our Design World Network Facebook page at
facebook.com/DesignWorldNetwork, and let us know what
designs you’re using or are looking to apply.
Also look out for the 2016 Motion Systems Handbook and
2016 Motion Casebook coming to you in August and November for
complete coverage of electronic and programming technologies
for motion designs, as well as real-world application examples
and illustrations to inform your next build. In the mean time, also
find all our motion-technology news announcements (as well as
technical archives) on our motion tips sites—motioncontroltips.
com, linearmotiontips.com, sensortips.com, bearingtips.com and
couplingtips.com.
Get a Free Power Basics Poster
teledynelecroy.com/motor-drive-analyzer | teledynelecroy.com/contactus
© 2015 Teledyne LeCroy, Inc. All rights reserved.
Line Voltage, Current, and Power – The Basics
THREE-PHASE
LINE VOLTAGE
Single-phase line voltage consists of one voltage
vector with:
• Magnitude (voltage)
• Angle (phase)
Typically, the single-phase is referred to as “Line” voltage, and
is referenced to neutral.
Neutral Line
The single-phase voltage vector rotates at a given frequency
• Typically, 50 or 60 Hz for utility-supplied voltage
At any given moment in time, the voltage magnitude is V * sin(α)
• V = magnitude of voltage vector
• α = angle of rotation, in radians
The resulting time-varying “rotating” voltage vector appears as
a sinusoidal waveform with a fixed frequency
• 50 Hz in Europe
• 60 Hz in US
• Either 50 or 60 Hz in Asia
• Other frequencies are sometimes used in non-utility
supplied power, e.g.
• 400 Hz
• 25 Hz
SINGLE-PHASE
Three-phase line voltage consists of three voltage vectors.
• By definition, the system is “balanced”
• Vectors are separated by 120°
• Vectors are of equal magnitude
• Sum of all three voltages = 0 V at Neutral
Typically, the three phases are referred to as A, B, and C,
but other conventions are also used:
• 1, 2, and 3
• L1, L2, and L3
• R, S, and T
The three voltage vectors rotate at a given frequency
• Typically, 50 or 60 Hz for utility-supplied voltage
The resulting time-varying “rotating” voltage vectors appear
as three sinusoidal waveforms
• Separated by 120°
• Of equal peak amplitude
Voltage value = VX*sin(α)
• VX = magnitude of phase voltage vector
• α = angle of rotation, in radians
VA-B
VA-N
120° VA
VB
VC
Neutral
A
B
C
ω (rad/s) or
freq (Hz)
120°
120°
120°
Neutral
Neutral Line
ω (rad/s) or
freq (Hz)
200
Time
AC Single-Phase “Utility” Voltage
120VAC
Volts(Peak),Line-Neutral
150
100
50
0
-50
-100
-150
-200
120 VAC Example
800
Time
AC Three-Phase “Utility” Voltage
480VAC
, Measured Line-Line
Volts(Peak),Line-Line
600
400
200
A-B Voltage
B-C Voltage
C-A Voltage
0
-200
-400
-600
-800
480 VAC Example
800
Time
AC Three-Phase “Utility” Voltage
480VAC
, Measured Line-Neutral
Volts(Peak),Line-Neutral
600
400
200
A-N Voltage
B-N Voltage
C-N Voltage
Three-phase Rectified DC
0
-200
-400
-600
-800
480 VAC Example
Line-Line Voltage Measurements
Line-Neutral Voltage Measurements
Important to Know
• Voltage is stated as “VAC”, but this is really VRMS
• Rated Voltage is Line-Neutral
• VPEAK = 2 * VAC (or 2 * VRMS )
• 169.7 V in the example below
• VPK-PK = 2 * VPEAK
• If rectified and filtered
• VDC = 2 * VAC = VPEAK
Voltages can be measured two ways:
• Line-Line (L-L)
• Also referred to as Phase-Phase
• e.g. from VA to VB, or VA-B
• Line-Neutral (L-N)
• Neutral must be present and accessible
• e.g. from VA to Neutral, or VA-N
• VL-L conversion to VL-N
• Magnitude: VL-N * 3 = VL-L
• Phase: VL-N - 30° = VL-L
Important to Know
• Voltage is stated as “VAC”, but this is really VRMS
• Rated Three-phase voltage is always Line-Line (VL-L)
• Line-Line is A-B (VA-B), B-C (VB-C), and C-A (VC-A)
• Line-Line is sometimes referred to as Phase-Phase
• VPEAK(L-L) = 2 * VL-L
• 679 V in the example to the right
• VPK-PK(L-L) = 2 * VPEAK(L-L)
If a neutral wire is present, three-phase voltages
may also be measured Line-Neutral
• VL-N = VL-L/ 3
• 277 VAC (VRMS) in this example
• VPEAK = 2 * VL-N
• 392 V in the example to the right
• VPK-PK = 2 * VPEAK
If all three phases are rectified and filtered
• VDC = 2 * VL-N * 3 = VPEAK * 3 = 679 V
in the example to the right
LINE CURRENT
Like voltage, the single-phase current vector rotates
at a given frequency
• Typically, 50 or 60 Hz
At any given moment in time, the current magnitude
is I*sin(α)
• I = magnitude of current vector
• α = angle of rotation, in radians
The resulting time-varying “rotating”
current vector appears as a sinusoidal
waveform
Like voltage, the resulting time-varying “rotating”
current vectors appear as three sinusoidal waveforms
• Separated by 120°
• Of equal peak amplitude for a balanced load
Current value = IX*sin(α)
• IX = magnitude of line current vector
• α = angle of rotation, in radians
Neutral Line
freq (Hz)
By definition, the system is “balanced”
• Vectors are separated by 120˚
• Vectors are of equal magnitude
• Sum of all three currents = O A at neutral (provided
there is no leakage of current to ground)
Like voltage, three-phase current has three different line
current vectors that rotate at a given frequency
• Typically, 50 or 60 Hz for utility-supplied voltage
SINGLE-PHASE
THREE-PHASE
A
B
C
ω (rad/s) or
freq (Hz)
120°
120°
120°
Neutral
Line Current Measurements
10 ARMS Example
Important to Know
• Current is stated as “lAC”, but this is really IRMS
• Line currents can represent either current
through a coil, or current into a terminal
(see image below) depending on the three-phase
winding connection
• IPEAK = 2 * IRMS
• 14.14A for a 10 ARMS current in the example
to the right
• IPK-PK = 2 * IPEAK
-15
-12
-9
-6
-3
0
3
6
9
12
15
LineCurrent(Peak)
Time
AC Three-Phase "Line" Currents
A Current
B Current
C Current
IC
IA
IB
A
B
C
N
A
B
C
IC IA
IB
LINE POWER
SINGLE-PHASE
Electric Power
• “The rate at which energy is transferred to a circuit”
• Units = Watts (one Joule/second)
For purely resistive loads
• P = I2R = V2/R = V * I
• The current vector and voltage vector are in perfect phase
I
Inductive load
V
P ≠ V * I
φ
N
I
Capacitive load
P ≠ V * I
V
φ
N
Real Power
ImaginaryPower
S
P
Q
φ
φ
φ
φ
QB
QC
QA
SB
SA
SC
PB
PA
PC
Phase Angle (φ)
• Indicates the angular difference between the
current and voltage vectors
• Degrees: - 90° to +90°
• Or radians: -π/2 to + π/2
For capacitive and inductive loads
• P ≠ V * I since voltage and current are
not in phase
• For inductive loads
• The current vector “lags” the voltage
vector angle φ
• Purely inductive load has angle φ = 90°
• Capacitive Loads
• The current vector “leads” the voltage
vector by angle φ
• Purely capacitive load has angle φ = 90°
THREE-PHASE
For purely resistive loads
• PA = VA-N * IA
• PB = VB-N * IB
• PC = VC-N * IC
• PTOTAL = PA + PB + PC
As with the single-phase case, Power is not the simple
multiplication of voltage and current magnitudes, and
subsequent summation for all three phases.
Apparent Power for each Phase
• |S|, in Volt-Amperes, or VA
• = VRMS * IRMS for a given power cycle
Real Power for each Phase
• P, in Watts
• = instantaneous V * I for a given
power cycle
Voltage is measured L-L
• Neutral point may not be accessible, or
• L-L voltage sensing may be preferred
Current is measured L-N
L-L voltages must be transformed to L-N reference:
Calculations are straightforward, as described above:
• PTOTAL= PA + PB + PC
• STOTAL = SA + SB + SC
• QTOTAL = QA + QB + QC
Voltage is measured L-L on two phases
• Note that the both voltages are measured with
reference to C phase
Current is measured on two phases
• The two that flow into the C phase
Mathematical assumptions:
• Σ(IA + IB + IC) = 0
• Σ(VA-B + VB-C + VC-A) = 0
This is a widely used and valid method
for a balanced three-phase system
VB-C
VA-C
IA
IB
A
B
C
N
A
B
C
VB-C
VA-C
IA
IB
Single-phase, Non-resistive Loads
Phase Angle
Single-phase Real, Apparent and Reactive Power
Three-phase, Resistive Loads Three-phase, Non-resistive Loads
Two Wattmeter Method – 2 Voltages, 2 Currents with Wye (Y or Star) or Delta (∆) Winding
VB-N
VA-N
VC-N
IC
IA
IB
A
B
C
N
VA-B
VB-C
VC-A
IC
IA
IB
A
B
C
N
Power Factor (PF, or λ)
• cos(φ) for purely sinusoidal waveforms
• Unitless, 0 to 1,
• 1 = V and I in phase, purely resistive load
• 0 = 90° out of phase, purely capacitive
or purely inductive load
• Not typically “signed” – current either
leads (capacitive load) or lags
(inductive load) the voltage
Voltage
Current
Note: Any distortion present on the Line voltage
and current waveforms will result in power
measurement errors if real power (P) is
calculated as |S|*cos(φ). To avoid measurement
errors, a digital sampling technique for power
calculations should be used, and this technique is
also valid for pure sinusoidal waveforms.
Resistive load
V
P=V * I
N
I
Power Factor
Line-Line Voltage Sensing Case
VB-N
VA-N
PTOTAL = VA-N * IA + VB-N * IB + VC-N * IC
VC-N
IB
IA
IC
N
φ
VB-N
VA-N
PTOTAL ≠ VA-N *IA + VB-N * IB + VC-N * IC
VC-N
IB
IAIC
N
Three-phase, Any Load
Apparent Power
• |S|, in Volt-Amperes, or VA
• = VRMS * IRMS for a given power cycle
Real Power
• P, in Watts
• = instantaneous V * I for a given power cycle
Reactive Power
• Q, in Volt-Amperes reactive, or VAr
• Q = S2 - P2
• Does not “transfer” to load during a power cycle,
just “moves around” in the circuit
Reactive Power for each Phase
• Q, in Volt-Amperes reactive, or VAr
• Q = S2 - P2
• PTOTAL = PA + PB + PC
• STOTAL = SA + SB + SC
• QTOTAL = QA + QB + QC
PTOTAL = VA-C * IA + VB-C * IB
STOTAL= VRMSA-C * IRMSA + VRMSB-C * IRMSB
QTOTAL = STOTAL
2 - PTOTAL
2
“Not True” RMS
Wye (Y) 3-phase Connection
• Neutral is present in the winding
• But often is not accessible
• Most common configuration
Delta (∆) 3-phase Connection
• Neutral is not present in the
winding (in most cases)A
B
C
N
A
B
C
For one power cycle
• The digital samples are grouped
into measurement cycles (periods)
• For a given cycle index i….
• The digitally sampled voltage
waveform is represented as having a
set of sample points j in cycle index i
• For a given cycle index i, there are
Mi sample points beginning at mi
and continuing through mi + Mi -1.
• Voltage, current, power, etc.
values are calculated on each
cycle index i from 1 to N cycles.
Digital Sampling Technique for Power Calculations�
Period 1
Mi = 18 points
Period 2
Mi = 18 points
mi = point 7 mi = point 25
VPK-PK
“True” RMS
For one power cycle
Three-Phase Winding Connections
VRMS
IRMS
Real Power
(P, in Watts)
Apparent Power
(S, in VA)
Reactive Power
(Q, in VAR)
Power Factor (λ)
Phase Angle (φ)
VRMSi = Vj
2
Mi
1
mi + Mi - 1
Σj=mi
IRMSi = Ij
2
Mi
1
mi + Mi - 1
Σj=mi
Pi = Vj * Ij
Mi
1
mi + Mi - 1
Σj=mi
Si = VRMSi * IRMSi
magnitude Qi = Si
2 - Pi
2
Sign of Qi is positive if the fundamental voltage
vector leads the fundamental current vector
λi =
Pi
Si
magnitude Φi = cos-1λi
Sign of Φi is positive if the fundamental voltage
vector leads the fundamental current vector
Formulas Used for Per-cycle Digitally Sampled Calculations
VRMS = VPK-PK
2 2
1 VRMS = VAC
2
MDA800 Series
Motor Drive Analyzers
8 channels, 12-bits, 1 GHz
tlec-2015_power-poster-final-cmyk-HIRES.pdf 1 11/9/15 2:54 PM
Learn more about the MDA800 and sign up to
receive a Power Basics Poster for free:
teledynelecroy.com/static-dynamic-complete
Identify 3-phase electrical and motor
mechanical static and dynamic power
behaviors. Built on an 8 channel, 12-bit, 1 GHz oscilloscope
platform for power section and embedded control debug –
complete test capability.
MDA800 Series
Motor Drive Analyzers
One Instrument, One Solution
Identify 3-phase
mechanical
behaviors. Built on an
platform for power section
complete test capability.
MDA800 Series
Motor Drive Analyzers
One Instrument, One Solution
tlec-mda-poster-designworld.indd 1 2/5/16 2:04 PM
Editorial_PTGuide_V3.LE.MD.indd 5 4/29/16 10:37 AM
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
6 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
VIDEO
Videographer
John Hansel
jhansel@wtwhmedia.com
@wtwh_Jhansel
Videographer
Kyle Johnston
kjohnston@wtwhmedia.com
@wtwh_Kyle
Videographer
Alex Barni
abarni@wtwhmedia.com
EDITORIAL
Editorial Director
Paul J. Heney
pheney@wtwhmedia.com
@dw_Editor
Managing Editor
Leslie Langnau
llangnau@wtwhmedia.com
@dw_3Dprinting
Executive Editor
Leland Teschler
lteschler@wtwhmedia.com
@dw_LeeTeschler
Senior Editor
Miles Budimir
mbudimir@wtwhmedia.com
@dw_Motion
Senior Editor
Mary Gannon
mgannon@wtwhmedia.com
@dw_MaryGannon
Senior Editor
Lisa Eitel
leitel@wtwhmedia.com
@dw_LisaEitel
Associate Editor
Mike Santora
msantora@wtwhmedia.com
@dw_MikeSantora
Assistant Editor
Michelle DiFrangia
mdifrangia@wtwhmedia.com
@wtwh_Michelle
NEW MEDIA/WEB/
BUSINESS DEVELOPMENT
Web Development Manager
B. David Miyares
dmiyares@wtwhmedia.com
@wtwh_WebDave
Web Development Specialist
Patrick Amigo
pamigo@wtwhmedia.com
@amigo_patrick
Digital Marketing Specialist
Andrew Zistler
azistler@wtwhmedia.com
GRAPHICS
Director, Creative Services
Mark Rook
mrook@wtwhmedia.com
@wtwh_graphics
Art Director
Matthew Claney
mclaney@wtwhmedia.com
@wtwh_designer
Graphic Designer
Allison Washko
awashko@wtwhmedia.com
@wtwh_allison
Traffic Manager
Mary Heideloff
mheideloff@wtwhmedia.com
Production Associate
Tracy Powers
tpowers@wtwhmedia.com
MARKETING
Marketing Manager
Stacy Combest
scombest@wtwhmedia.com
@wtwh_Stacy
Marketing & Event
Coordinator
Jen Kolasky
jkolasky@wtwhmedia.com
@wtwh_Jen
Marketing Coordinator
Lexi Korsok
lkorsok@wtwhmedia.com
@medtech_Lexi
Digital Marketing Specialist
Josh Breuler
jbreuler@wtwhmedia.com
@wtwh_Joshb
Digital Marketing Intern
Aly Ryan
aryan@wtwhmedia.com
@wtwh_Aly
Business Development
Manager
Patrick Curran
pcurran@wtwhmedia.com
@wtwhseopatrick
Online Coordinator
Jennifer Calhoon
jcalhoon@wtwhmedia.com
@wtwh_Jennifer
Director, Audience
Development
Bruce Sprague
bsprague@wtwhmedia.com
Controller
Brian Korsberg
bkorsberg@wtwhmedia.com
2011 - 2015
2014 Winner
Follow the whole team on twitter @DesignWorld
CONNECT
WITH US!
StaffPage_PTGuide_V1.indd 6 4/29/16 5:34 PM
The PITTMAN Difference
When evaluating DC motor choices, it’s what’s inside that matters.
What’s Inside
Matters®
On the outside, this looks like an ordinary DC motor. In fact, this particular motor
is not a standard off-the-shelf part, but designed exactly to a customer’s specific
technical requirements. PITTMAN has an experienced team of engineers focused
on providing the perfect motor assembly to our customers demanding motion
applications.
• Special brush formulation for use in a very low humidity environment
• Bearing system to handle higher than normal axial loads
• Very tight balancing spec to minimize audible noise and vibration at high speeds
• Unique magnet charge pattern to minimize cogging at low speeds
• Specially chosen surface-mount components inside the motor to meet
an aggressive EMC requirement
• Numerous integrated spur and planetary gearboxes, encoders, brakes and drives
www.Pittman–Motors.com
343 Godshall Drive, Harleysville, PA 19438
USA: +1 267 933 2105
Europe: +33 2 40 92 87 51
Asia: +86 21 5763 1258
Pittman (AMETEK) 3-16.indd 7 4/29/16 10:00 AM
8 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
PTDA Updates ..............................................10
Actuators
Electrical ..................................................14
Rigid Chain ..............................................18
Ballscrews .....................................................20
Bearings ......................................................24
Belts, Pulleys ...........................................28
Brakes, Clutches ...................................31
Cabling ................................................32
Chain, Roller, Sprocket .......................34
Compression Springs ........................38
Couplings ..........................................41
Drives ................................................50
Gearing .............................................54
Gearmotors ........................................66
Leadscrews...........................................68
Linear Motion ........................................70
Locking Devices, Shaft Collars .................75
Lubrication ..................................................78
Motors ..........................................................80
Positioning Stages ........................................84
Seals .............................................................86
Shock, Vibration Damping ............................88
MOTIONCONTROLTIPS.COM
INSIDE
P04Power-transmission
components are
mainstays
VOL2
NO2
18 Cover photography by
Miles Budimir
Contents_PTGuide_V1.indd 8 5/3/16 10:42 AM
the #1 value in automation
Order Today, Ships Today!
*SeeourWebsitefordetailsandrestrictions. ©Copyright2014AutomationDirect,Cumming,GA USA. Allrightsreserved. 1-800-633-0405
Research, price, buy at: www.automationdirect.com/power-transmission
Precision Gearboxes
If it is precision you need, our SureGear
family of precision gearboxes is an
excellent solution. They are available
in a wide range of ratios and styles, and
provide high-precision motion control
at an incredible price.
• Servomotor gearboxes
start at $398.00
• Small NEMA motor gearboxes
start at $209.00
Worm Gearboxes
IronHorse® worm gearboxes are built to
withstand the toughest applications while
delivering reliable speed reduction and
increased torque output.
• Aluminum gearboxes
start at $88.00
• Cast Iron gearboxes
start at $147.00
Affordable Power Transmission
high-quality components at low prices!
NEW!
• Jaw / Spider Couplings start at $10.50
• Double Loop Couplings start at $34.00
• Oldham Couplings start at $14.25
• Beam-Style Servo Couplings start at $42.00
• Bore Reducers start at $7.00
Synchronous Drives
Our SureMotion line of synchronous drive
components provide dependable speed
and torque changes without unwanted
slippage and speed variations.
• Drive pulleys start at $5.25
• Drive belts start at $2.00
SureMotion® Drive Couplings
Reduce the unwanted stress caused by shaft misalignment with our new
line of high-quality drive couplings. These drive couplings come in a
variety of styles, torque ranges and coupling capabilities each designed
to enhance system performance and prevent costly failures.
AutomationDirect_PTGuide4-16.indd 9 4/29/16 10:32 AM
Power Transmission
REFERENCE GUIDE
10 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
2016 LEADERSHIP DEVELOPMENT CONFERENCE
The Power Transmission Distributors Association (PTDA) held its 2016 Leadership Development Conference
in early March in the Historic District of Charleston, S.C.
PTDA members continuously seek ways to bring their future management team up-to-speed so they
can step into a supervisory role ready to excel. The 2016 Leadership Development Conference fulfilled
that need. Designed for emerging power transmission/motion control leaders who want to enhance their
management skills, network in small group settings, and learn best practices that support business results,
those that participated in this year’s conference benefited from two sessions:
•	 “Ready. Get Set. Lead”—a dinner program by Randy Disharoon, director global accounts, Rexnord
Industries, on how to quickly ramp up younger leaders for success to kick-off the conference
•	 “Businessopoly”—a full-day, interactive, team-oriented business simulation game, led by industry
veteran Michael Cinquemani, president and CEO, Master Power Transmission.
Cinquemani said, “We are going to really challenge people to give them a deeper understanding of their
decision-making: how it affects the profit and loss statement, the balance sheet, the statement of cash
flows, and then review their results compared to their initial plans.”
PTDAP O W E R T R A N S M I S S I O N
D I S T R I B U T O R S A S S O C I AT I O N
UPDATESMIKE SANTORA • ASSOCIATE EDITOR • @DW_MIKESANTORA
The PTDA Spring Governance Meetings attracted nearly 90 volunteer senior
leaders to Charleston, S.C., along with more than 45 Next-Gen members who
took part in the PTDA 2016 Leadership Development Conference. Attendees
played Businessopoly, the name PTDA gave to an interactive, hands-on board
game that teaches executive management skills.
PTDAUpdates_PTGuide_V3.indd 10 4/29/16 10:38 AM
11DESIGN WORLD — MOTIONmotioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com 4 • 2016
PTDA WELCOMES
SIX NEW MEMBERS
PTDA has recently welcomed six
new member companies.
DISTRIBUTOR MEMBER
MJ May Material Specialists
(South Holland, Ill.) distributes
mechanical PT components,
bearings, motors, motor/motion
control, electrical/electronic
drives, material handling,
hydraulics/pneumatics, and PT
accessories. President Walter
Lopez said, “As a small business
looking to grow in the power
transmission market, it was a no-
brainer for us to join. The access
to manufacturers and opportunity
to strengthen established
relationships will greatly benefit us
in our quest to become a premier
distributor of power transmission
products.”
MANUFACTURER MEMBERS
Auburn Bearing & Manufacturing
(Macedon, N.Y.) manufacturers
bearings. “We chose to join PTDA
because a vast majority of our
sales are through an established
network of distributors across
the marketplace. PTDA will assist
us in expanding that network
even further,” said Peter Schroth,
president.
Helical Products Company,
a location of MW Industries,
(Rosemont, Ill.) manufactures
spring couplings and retaining
rings. Robert Jack, VP marketing
and strategic planning, said, “The
opportunity to network with both
manufacturers and distributors in
our industry is very valuable to us,
and we look forward to being an
active member and forging many
new relationships in the years to
come."
iwis Drive Systems (Indianapolis,
Ind.) manufactures chains and
sprockets. “iwis joined PTDA to
increase our network within the
industrial distribution arena. The
fact is, we have made significant
investments into new products
and value added services and
PTDA represents a powerful
tool for us to capitalize on these
initiatives,” said Kody Fedorcha,
VP, sales and marketing.
	
Rosta USA Corporation (South
Haven, Mich.) is a manufacturer of
motor bases.
Wittenstein (Bartlett, Ill.)
manufactures couplings, gearing,
motors, motor/motion control
products and linear motion
components. Tom Coyle,
director of sales NA, said, “We
are pleased to be a part of this
association. My goals as a member of PTDA are to leverage the wide
network of distributor organizations and contacts, gain access and new
perspectives to industry economics and trends, and finally to increase
exposure of Wittenstein,”
PTDA 2016 CANADIAN CONFERENCE
Registration is still open for the PTDA 2016 Canadian Conference, to
be held June 9-10, 2016, at The Westin Ottawa in Ottawa, Ontario. For
the 15th year, members of the Canadian power transmission/motion
control (PT/MC) industry gather for business networking, market-driven
education, a manufacturer industry showcase and more.
Networking opportunities abound at the PTDA 2016 Canadian
Conference. Participants have many opportunities to meet channel
partners—both new and established—in comfortable settings such as
the Industry Showcase Welcome Reception, featuring tabletop exhibits
from every registered PTDA manufacturer member company.
Along with networking, business market-driven education takes
center stage. Participants will hear information targeted to solve the
most vexing needs of the industry including information on corporate
culture, hiring, knowledge transfer and an update on the Canadian
mining industry. For more information about the Canadian Conference,
please visit www.ptda.org/CanadianConference.
Jim LaHaie, president, W.C. DuComb Co. and John Masek, SVP, Bearing Service Inc., took advantage
of PTDA’s complimentary Regional Networking Events and an optional Detroit Tigers game last year.
In 2016, complimentary PTDA Regional Networking Events are coming to Minneapolis, Chicago
and Cincinnati and are open to any employee of a PTDA member company or a prospective member
company.
PTDAUpdates_PTGuide_V3.indd 11 4/29/16 10:39 AM
Advanced Products for Robotics and Automation.
Customer Driven Innovation Design EngineeringPrototype to Product Launch
From customer driven innovation to contract manufacturing, we help
differentiate your product and applications. Connect with us today to
explore what CGI Motion can do for you.
Download our full capabilities brochure at cgimotion.com
copyright©2016 cgi inc. all rights reserved. 0425CCBS
CGI’s World Class Vertically Integrated Flow Processes
• Design for Manufacturability - DFM
• Fixturing Design and Fabrication
• Prototyping Support 3-D Model Printing on-site
• Process controls designed and implemented
• Process development for Assembly and Testing of Motion
Control Assemblies for Advanced Devices and Systems
• Complete Test Device, Design & Development
• Minitab Statistical Analysis Tools
• Computer Aided Machining (CAM)
• Six Sigma black belt expertise
Precision Gears Precision Gearboxes Precision Mechanical Components Precision Bearings
CGI-PTGuide4.16-Spread.indd 12 5/2/16 11:48 AM
www.cgimotion.com
800.568.GEAR (4327)
Manufacturing Engineering Support Worldwide SupportTesting & Validation
CGI’s Quality Equipment: Highly Qualified Inspection Department
• Zeiss Contura Coordinate Measuring Machine (CMM)
• Brown and Sharpe Coordinate Measuring Machine (CMM)
• PECo Next Dimension 300 Gear Analyzer
• Micro-Vu Vertex Vision System
• Starrett Optical Comparators with Digital Readout
• TESA Scanner
• PECo Dual Flank Test Roll Checker
• Micro Check Dual Flank Test Roll Checkers
• Vari-Roll Dual Flank Test Roll Checkers
• Inspection Xpert software for First Article Reports
CGI Enables Design Excellence.
Precision Mechanical Assemblies Electro-mechanical AssembliesCustomized Components
CGI-PTGuide4.16-Spread.indd 13 5/2/16 11:48 AM
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
14 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
MANY
applications call for converting rotary motion into motion that
moves in a straight line. For these applications, linear electric or
electromechanical actuators handle the task efficiently. In fact, today’s actuators are
so efficient that the variety available for different design needs has proliferated. That
means that actuators today are easier than ever to integrate into machinery; they’re
also less costly.
Electric actuators turn an electric motor’s power into linear motion in one of
three ways: through a linear motor, belt or screw drive. Linear motors are the most
technologically advanced and efficient method of directly transmitting the power of
the motor into the motion of the actuator. Instead of the rotor rotating in the stator,
the rotor travels in a linear, flat-array fashion along the stator.
Belt drive actuators are less costly, but can still move loads at fairly high linear
speeds. Because the motor is separate from the drive, the mechanical advantage
can increase thrust speed. The disadvantage of belt drives is that they wear over
time and require maintenance.
ELECTRIC ACTUATORS:
SMART DESIGNS EXCEL
LISA EITEL
SENIOR EDITOR
@DW_LISAEITEL
ElectricActuators_PT2016_V3.indd 14 4/29/16 10:40 AM
ELECTRIC ACTUATORS
15DESIGN WORLD — MOTIONmotioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com 4 • 2016
Most screw drives take the form
of either rod-style actuators or rodless
cylinders. A motor transmits power
through a coupler or pulley arrangement
to rotate the screw and translate a nut
along the screw axis. Attached to this
nut is either the rod or saddle of the
actuator. Screw drives can use roller, ball
or leadscrews.
Electric actuators have several
benefits over hydraulic or pneumatic
actuators. For one, the operation
is cleaner because they operate
without the need for fluids or ancillary
equipment. They have the ability to
integrate power, control and actuation
mechanisms into one device. And they
combine force, velocity and positioning
in a single, compact motion control
device.
Another advantage is the ability
to constantly monitor feedback directly
from the motor and adjust performance
accordingly. Though not necessary for
every application, closed-loop operation
has the ability to adjust and correct
variances in the operation, resulting in
repeatable and accurate motion with
every move.
Today, the prices for drives for
electric actuators have come down,
which has opened new application
uses for the linear actuator. So, electric
actuators are more viable for applications
where hydraulic, pneumatic and manual
operations once ruled.
In many applications, servomotors
are replacing induction motors because
of their performance and energy efficiency. Direct drives are replacing
traditional motor-gearbox combinations because of their high dynamic
performance, high precision and long life. And electric actuators are replacing
pneumatic cylinders in many applications for similar reasons.
But the biggest improvements in the last five to ten years can be found
in the control systems integrated with electric actuators. Faster bus systems,
like industrial Ethernet and real-time communication, make the use of electric
actuators simpler.
Servo systems require fast communication and exchange of real-time
data between the drive and the overlaid machine control. The bus was always
the bottleneck in these systems. Now, with the much higher data rates and
real-time capacity of industrial Ethernet, the integration and the use of electric
actuators is easier. Stepper and servo drive options with Ethernet protocols
(Ethernet IP, Modbus, TCP) turn single-axis actuators into simple, low-cost
motion devices with infinite positioning, precise control and longer life.
Electric linear actuators are an alternative to pneumatic cylinders in several
applications because of the flexibility they deliver in the design of production
processes and production monitoring systems. In conveying applications,
for example, diverting and sorting functions are more
frequently controlled using electric actuators. Typically,
pneumatic actuators have been used, but the required
manual adjustments were often subject to human error.
Plus, the pneumatic actuators could only handle a small
amount of variability in product sizes. Electric actuators
are flexible by design.
For example, material handling
applications have experienced an
increase in the variety and variability
of package sizes. In packaging
machines, consumer
products manufacturers are
Linear positioning actuators of extremely long stroke
lengths — such as this LoPro linear actuator from Bishop-
Wisecarver — typically use belt drives. Polyurethane
belting is quiet and delivers long mechanical actuation
with good accuracy and high speeds. LoPro actuators are
three to 8 m long, but units to 15 m are possible.
Tolomatic ERD hygienic
all-stainless-steel
electric cylinders have
a roller-screw option that
boosts maximum thrust to
7,868 lbf (35.6 kN) for better life and
performance under high duty cycles than
ballscrew models.
ElectricActuators_PT2016_V3.indd 15 4/29/16 10:40 AM
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
16 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
NSK’s MCM Series Monocarrier includes a ballscrew, linear
guide and supports in one compact structure. It boosts
accuracy and reduces installation time, and some versions are
available through a Quick Ship Program.
producing more package sizes with the
same manufacturing lines, which require
equipment to be adaptable enough to
handle different product sizes and types.
Electric actuators easily handle these
variability requirements and, over the life of
the motion system, can be less expensive.
SELECTING AN ELECTRIC ACTUATOR
The process for selecting an electric
actuator is similar to one for hydraulic
or pneumatic actuators, with a few
differences. Here are the essentials.
Start with the motion profile. This
establishes the demands for velocity and
time as well as force (or torque) and the
required travel distance. This is also the
place to determine the maximum stroke
needed as well as maximum and minimum
speed requirements.
Then calculate the load. This can have
many different components including
inertial load, friction load, the external
applied load, as well as the gravitational
load. Load calculations also depend on the
orientation of the actuator itself, whether
it’s horizontal or vertical.
Duty cycle is another important factor.
This is defined as the ratio of operating
time to resting time and is usually
expressed as a percentage. The cycling
rate may be in seconds, minutes, hours
or even days, and knowing the operating
hours per day may also be necessary.
Knowing the duty cycle helps the engineer
estimate the system life requirements
and can also eliminate problems such as
overheating, faster wear and premature
component failure due to an incorrectly
sized actuator.
Know the positional accuracy and
precision demanded by the application.
The actuator’s precision should meet or
exceed the application’s requirements
for accuracy, backlash, and straightness
and flatness of linear motion. This directly
impacts the cost of the system; if the
application doesn’t demand high
accuracy or precision, then there is no
need to buy a more expensive actuator
when a less expensive one will satisfy
the demands of the application.
Aside from the technical
specifications mentioned above, there
is also the need to select the proper
configuration for the actuator in the
final design. This includes mounting
considerations and the need for any
other external components, such as
holding brakes and communication and
power cables.
Lastly, consider the operating
environment for the actuator. What are
the temperature requirements? Are
there any contaminants such as water,
oil or abrasive chemicals? Contaminants
can affect seals and impact the working
life of the actuator. In such cases,
selecting the appropriate IP rating for
an application can guard against the
effects of contaminants.
ElectricActuators_PT2016_V3.indd 16 4/29/16 10:41 AM
1.800.255.4773 www.nskamericas.com
BALL BEARINGS | ROLLER BEARINGS | LINEAR MOTION PRODUCTS | TECHNICAL SERVICES
nsk k1TM
lubricaTion uniT
Experience long-term, maintenance-free operation with NSK K1™
Lubrication Units. These patented
units provide fresh, continuous oil flow onto the rail or shaft during operation, making them ideal for
environments where grease replenishment is undesirable or where grease is easily washed away.
Available on NSK linear guides, ball screws, Monocarrier™
actuators and Robot Modules, K1™
Lubrication
Units prolong life for up to 5 years or 10,000 km operational distance.
MAINTENANCE-
fREE OPERATION.
WORRy-fREE
DESIGN.
NPA-SL-020 Design World ad_K1 Unit[250314]v1.indd 1 2014-03-25 3:14 PM
NSK 8-15.indd 17 4/29/16 10:04 AM
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
18 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
This is a custom loading-station scissor lift that
uses a SERAPID 40 chain actuator. Retractable
to table-top level, the platform can smoothly
lift a heavy load more than 10 ft. A space-
saving chain storage magazine fits compactly
at the bottom.
MECHANICAL COMPONENTS
AT THE HEART OF MOTION DESIGN
LISA EITEL • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_LISAEITEL
RIGID-CHAIN
actuators work by pairing a drive
(usually an electric motor) with
a length of chain sporting shoulders on each link. The motor
output shaft—fitted with a specialty sprocket or pinion—applies
tangential force to the chain. Then the chain comes out and
straightens, and its links’ shoulders lock to form a rigid series.
When the motor runs in the opposite direction, the chain
shoulders disengage and allow for coiling.
Inside the actuator body, reaction plates and guides counter
thrust resistance and keep the chain on track. Links travel around
the pinion to exit the actuator body along the stroke path. Here,
the motor’s torque comes to act as forward thrust via the link
shoulder to the rest of the links’ shoulders. The last link in the
chain before the load has geometry that puts the thrust higher
than the articulation axis. This makes a moment that effectively
locks the link shoulders. In reverse, pulling force acts along the
links’ cross axes.
Rigid-chain actuators have the mechanical benefits of
conventional chain but can act in horizontal push setups or
vertically as jacks. Plus they’re compact. In contrast, traditional
chain drives can only pull, so need two drives for bidirectional
motion. Traditional screw jacks for vertical power transmission
need space for retraction that’s as long as the working stroke
itself.
Before specifying a rigid-chain actuator, determine
the application’s total load, including the transported load,
acceleration forces, external environmental forces, and that
due to friction—with a coefficient between 0.05 and 0.5 for
typical rigid-chain actuator setups. Next, determine what type
of actuator body and chain-storage magazine the application
can accommodate. Determine whether the chain will need to
change direction on its way from the magazine to actuator body.
Actuators usually feed chain around 90° or 180° turns.
Note that rigid-chain actuators can work alone or in tandem.
Twin-chain setups deliver high positioning accuracy and stability
where loads are large or bulky.
Common rigid
chain has two rows
of link plates and
shoulders; duplex
chain has three;
other options
abound.
Image courtesy
iwis Drive Systems
DW half page rv
RigidChainActuators_PTGuide_V3.LE.MD.indd 18 4/29/16 10:43 AM
Choose a rigid-chain actuator to satisfy the design geometry.
... but guided chain is most stable.
Unguided chain with shoulders up coils downwards ...
Common rigid-chain arrangements
Pinion
Actuator body
Input drive shaft
Chain link shoulders
RIGID CHAIN ACTUATORS
Unguided chain with shoulders up coils downward, which is useful but
not always stable enough for long strokes. That with shoulders down
(here, bottom) is slightly more stable. Use guided chain wherever space
permits.
Here, a pushing bar acts
as a yoke to keep loads steady,
with optional hooks for pulling
as well. Optimized geometry has
the force vector act on the load’s
center for balance. If twin-chain
setups are impossible, consider
adding framework to guide
awkward loads.
Guides on the chain also
help maintain stability—even
over very long strokes—because
they address side and buckling
forces. Such guides come in
different shapes with different
crampons and subcomponents
to engage the chain. Where use
of chain guides is impossible,
most designs run the chain
with link shoulders down for
moderate stability.
Some last design notes:
Standard chain is carbon steel
to withstand heat to 200° C,
but stainless, high-temperature,
and coated chain for long life
are other options. The required
length of chain is total design
stroke plus a few links to engage
the actuator pinions.
As with any power-
transmission setup, consult
the manufacturer for tips and
guidance on determining
necessary drive power and
other details.
SERAPID Inc. | 34100 Mound Rd. | Sterling Heights, MI | Tel +1 586-274-0774 | info-us@serapid.com | www.serapid.com
SOLUTIONS FOR PRECISION MOVEMENT OF VERY HEAVY LOADS
Press-mounted dual
push-pulls
QUICK DIE CHANGE STAGE AND ORCHESTRA LIFTS CUSTOM ENGINEERED SYSTEMS INDUSTRIAL LIFTS
LinearBeam
guided push-pull
LinkLi
li columns
RollBeam
Telescopic push-pull
DW half page rv.indd 1 4/12/2016 2:17:33 PM
RigidChainActuators_PTGuide_V3.LE.MD.indd 19 4/29/16 2:58 PM
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
20 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
This cutaway, courtesy of Nook
Industries, shows the inner workings
of a ballscrew, most notably the
recirculating balls and the deflector,
in relation to the screw assembly.
BALLSCREWS
B A S I C S O F
MILES BUDIMIR • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_MOTION
BALLSCREWS
are a mainstay of motion actuation. Compared to
similar actuation methods such as leadscrews, they
typically cost a bit more but are generally more accurate. They also boast higher
efficiencies, even though they demand more lubrication because of the use of
recirculating balls.
The basic components of a ballscrew are a nut, a screw with helical grooves, and
balls (often made from steel, ceramic, or hard plastic material) that roll between the
nut, the screw and the grooves when either the screw or nut rotates. Balls are routed
into a ball return system of the nut and travel in a continuous path to the ball nut’s
opposite end. Seals are often used on either side of the nut to prevent debris from
compromising smooth motion.
Recent advances in manufacturing and materials have improved ballscrew
performance so machine designers today can get better linear motion with them
at lower cost. Some improvements include the fact that the latest generation of
ballscrews has more load density than ever, giving designers higher capacity from a
smaller package. There is also a trend toward more miniaturization, but also faster
ballscrews with rolled and ground screw manufacturing methods.
Ballscrews suit applications needing light, smooth motion, applications requiring
precise positioning, and when heavy loads must be moved. Examples include
machine tools, assembly devices, X-Y motion, Z motion, and robots.
Ballscrews are usually classified according to factors such as lead
accuracy, axial play and preload, and life/load relationship.
Lead accuracy refers to the degree to which the shaft’s
rotational movements are translated into linear
movement. With lead accuracy and axial
play determined by the manufacturing
method of the ballscrew shaft
and the assembly of the nut, high
lead accuracy and zero
axial play is generally
Ballscrews_PTGuide_V2-mb.indd 20 4/29/16 2:26 PM
© 2015 by AMETEK Inc. All rights reserved.
Nothing moves air with more rock-solid reliability than AMETEK®
Rotron regenerative blowers.
Fifteen years’ service life is not unusual. These low-pressure, high-volume blowers feature rugged,
compact construction and quiet operation. Their proven design makes them ideal in applications from
chemicals, wastewater and furnaces to vapor recovery and more. Plus, they’re backed by the industry’s
most knowledgeable engineering experts. AMETEK can customize your blower for harsh environments,
high voltage and specialized applications, too. So make your next air-moving challenge a breeze.
Call us at +1 330-673-3452 or visit our website to get started.
What’s 15 years
to one of our blowers?
A warm-up.
100 East Erie Street
Kent, OH 44240
ametekdfs.com
AMETEKDFS Regen Blower Ad_9x10.875.indd 1 6/1/15 5:03 PM
AMETEK 6-15 (NEW AD).indd 21 4/29/16 10:04 AM
22	 DESIGN WORLD 	 4 • 2016 www.designworldonline.com
REFERENCE GUIDE
POWER TRANSMISSION
www.cjmco.com
Phone: 860-643-1531
291 Boston Tpke, Bolton, CT 06043
Engineering Solutions for Clutches & Brakes
Clutches,Brakes & Power
Transmission Products
•electrical, mechanical, pneumatic
& hydraulic models
•system design and integration
•expert engineers working on
every order
Highest Torque in
the Smallest Space
... or the largest.
Maxitorq®
clutches and brakes deliver
power, reliability and are customized
to meet your exact needs. Land, sea
and air – CJM is everywhere.
AS9100C:2009/Certified
associated with relatively higher-cost
precision ground ballscrews, while
lower lead accuracy and some axial
play is associated with lower cost rolled
ballscrews. Fabricated by rolling or
other means, ballscrew shafts yield a
less precise but mechanically efficient
and less expensive ballscrew.
Axial play is the degree to which
a ball nut can be moved in the screw
axis direction without any rotation of
either nut or screw. Preload is applied
to eliminate axial play. The process
of preloading removes backlash and
increases stiffness.
Ball recirculation inside the ball nut
can affect precision and repeatability.
Thus, ball nuts are available with a range
of preload options to reduce or remove
the axial play as they rotate around the
screw. Minimal axial play allows better
accuracy, for example, because no
motion is lost from the clearance in the
balls as they reengage.
There are several techniques for
preloading. Some common methods
include oversizing the balls inside
the nut housing; using the so-called
“double-nut” or “tension nut” method;
or by using a manufactured offset in
the raceway spiral to change the angle
of ball engagement (the “lead shift”
method) and deliberately force the balls
into a preload condition. Each method
has its advantages and disadvantages,
but all serve to minimize or eliminate
backlash between the nut and screw.
Perhaps the biggest overall
benefit of a ballscrew is that it has high
efficiencies that can be well over 90%.
By contrast, Acme lead screws average
about 50% efficiency or less. There are
also minimum thermal effects. Backlash
can be eliminated through preloading.
Ballscrews also offer smooth movement
over the full travel range. The higher
cost of ballscrews can be offset by
decreased power requirements for
similar net performance.
One drawback to ballscrews is that
they require high levels of lubrication.
Ballscrews should always be properly
lubricated, with the correct type of
lubricant, to prevent corrosion, reduce
friction, extend operating life, and
ensure efficient operation.
Because ballscrews are a bearing
system, they’ll need some type of
lubrication to avoid metal-to-metal
contact of the balls in the raceway.
While the lubrication choice can be
either oil or grease, it’s advisable to
avoid solid additives (such as graphite)
as they will clog the recirculation
system. An NLGI no. 2 type grease
is recommended but it should also
depend on the application, whether
food-grade or another special type
of lubrication is required. Ballscrews,
especially those used in machine tools,
generally require lubricants with EP
additives to prevent excessive wear.
The lube amount will be fixed,
but the frequency of lubrication will
vary depending on factors such as
the move cycle characteristics, or
contamination in the environment.
Contaminated lubrication can increase
friction. In addition, ballscrews can fail
if the balls travel over metal chips or
dirt in the ball thread raceway. Using
lubricants recommended by machine
tool manufacturers can help prevent
this effect. Using telescopic covers or
bellows can help keep ballscrews clean
when used in environments with many
contaminants.
A sample ballscrew assembly, such as the Precision Metric Ball Screws (PMBS) series
from Nook Industries, features a single nut with flange, uses precision thread-rolling
technology and is available in a wide range of leads and diameters.
Ballscrews_PTGuide_V2-mb.indd 22 4/29/16 10:47 AM
Together a winning combination for today’s
servomotor applications.
Our ServoClass® couplings have been recently redesigned
to enable your actuator to go even faster and achieve
the positional accuracy that will take your designs
to the next level. Our couplings will do all this
with low bearing loads.
3 New sizes now available.
Now, size, select and see the right
ServoClass® coupling solution for your
application with Zero-Max 3D CAD files.
Check our FAST deliveries.
www.zero-max.com 800.533.1731
© 2010 ZERO-MAX
Your ball screw
Your servomotor
Our coupling
# Zero-Max_full_pgs_r10_Design World 2/12/10 4:02 PM Page 1
Zero Max ad 8-15.indd 23 4/29/16 10:05 AM
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 201624
BEARINGS
REVIEW OF
IT’S EASY
for bearings to go unnoticed—an out of sight,
out of mind mentality. This attitude is common
among so many because bearings are simple, internal machine
elements. However, that doesn’t make them any less crucial for motion
applications. The purpose of a bearing is to reduce frictional forces
between two moving parts by giving a surface something to roll on,
rather than slide over. There are basic features that all bearings share,
but specific application needs demand many different variations of this
universal motion system component.
A bearing usually consists of smooth rollers or metal balls and
the smooth inner and outer surfaces, known as races, that the rollers
or balls roll against. These rollers or balls act as the load carrier for
the device, allowing it to spin freely. Bearings typically encounter two
kinds of load: radial and axial. Radial loads occur perpendicular to the
shaft, while axial loads occur parallel to the shaft. Depending on the
application the bearing is being used in, some bearings experience
both loads simultaneously. There are many different types of bearings,
each suitable for different purposes in varying applications.
BALL BEARINGS
One of the most common forms of bearings is the ball bearing. As
the name implies, ball bearings use balls to provide a low friction
means of motion between two bearing races. Since the contact area
between the balls and races is so small, ball bearings cannot support
as large a load as other bearing types and are best suited for light to
moderate loads. However, their small surface contact also limits the
heat generated by friction, meaning that ball bearings can be used in
high-speed applications.
ROLLER BEARINGS
Possibly the oldest form of bearing, roller bearings can be spherically
or cylindrically shaped and are commonly used in applications like
conveyor belt rollers. Because of their shape, roller bearings have
greater surface contact than ball bearings, and are thus able to handle
larger loads without deforming. Their shape also allows for a moderate
amount of thrust load since the weight is distributed across cylinders
instead of spheres.
MIKE SANTORA • ASSOCIATE EDITOR • @DW_MIKESANTORA
Plastics for longer life®
3 times
lighter
than
stainless
DryLin®
aluminum lead
screws with optimized
geometry for high-
efficiency and long
service life. Variety of
nut types available in 5
materials, including FDA
and high-temperature
compliant.
Learn more at:
www.igus.com/DryLin®
Bearings_PTGuide_V3.indd 24 4/29/16 10:53 AM
 BEARINGS
25DESIGN WORLD — MOTIONmotioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
NEEDLE
ROLLER BEARINGS
When you need to reduce friction
between two moving parts but have
very limited space to do so, a needle
roller bearing may be just what you’re
looking for. A needle roller bearing is a
roller bearing with rollers whose length
is at least four times their diameter.
Despite their low cross section, the
large surface area of the needle
roller bearing allows them to support
extremely high radial loads.
They usually consist of a cage,
which orients and contains the needle
rollers and an outer race, which is
sometimes the housing itself. The
bearings can often be found in two
different arrangements. The first is a
radial arrangement, in which the rollers
run parallel to the shaft. The second
is a thrust arrangement, in which
the rollers are placed flat in a radial
pattern and run perpendicular to the
shaft.
These bearings are often
used in automotive applications,
such as rocker arm pivots, pumps,
compressors and transmissions. The
drive shaft of a rear-wheel drive vehicle
typically has at least eight needle
bearings (four in each U joint) and
often more if it is particularly long, or
operates on steep slopes.
Spherical roller bearings like
Koyo’s RZ Spherical Roller
Bearing have a greater surface
contact than ball bearings, and
are thus able to handle larger
loads without deforming.
THRUST BALL BEARINGS
Thrust ball bearings are designed for
use in applications with primarily axial
loads and are capable of handling shaft
misalignment. These bearings are also
useful in high-speed applications, such
as in the aerospace and automotive
industries.
THRUST ROLLER BEARINGS
Thrust roller bearings are designed so
that the load is transmitted from one
raceway to the other, meaning that
these bearings can accommodate radial
loads. Bearings like these also have a
self-aligning capability that makes them
immune to shaft deflection and alignment
errors.
TAPERED ROLLER BEARINGS
Tapered roller bearings feature tapered
inner and outer ring raceways with
tapered rollers arranged between them,
angled so the surface of the rollers
converge at the axis of the bearing. These
bearings are unique in that, unlike most
bearings that can handle either axial
or radial loads, they can handle large
amounts of load in both directions.
A single row taper bearing is limited
in that it can only take high axial loads
from one direction, but if adjusted against
a second tapered roller bearing, that
axial load is counteracted. This allows the
bearings to accept high radial and axial
loads from multiple directions.
Test 3621: Chainflex®
control cable CF98.05.04
Has withstood more than
138 million strokes at a
radius of 3.2 x d
Test information and
details available online:
chainflex.com/test3621
Tested and
Proven
138 million
cycles
Test3621
Bearings_PTGuide_V3.indd 25 4/29/16 2:33 PM
26 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
Depending on application requirements, some ball bearing are
made with magnetic, lubricant-free motion plastics like this igus
xiros M180 which uses a lightweight polymer ball bearing.
The ability of a tapered roller bearing to accommodate angular misalignment of the
inner ring in relation to the outer ring is limited to a few minutes of arc. As with other roller
bearings, tapered roller bearings must be given a minimum load, especially in high speed
applications where the inertial forces and friction can have a damaging effect between the
rollers and raceway.
LINEAR MOTION BEARINGS
Linear motion bearings are specifically designed to allow motion in one direction and are
typically used to carry a load on a slide or rail. They can be powered by a motor or by
hand and experience over turning moments of force instead of radial and axial loads.
PLAIN BEARINGS
Plain bearings are the simplest form of bearing available, as they have no moving parts.
They are often cylindrical, though the design of the bearing differs depending on the
intended motion. Plain bearings are available in three designs: journal, linear and thrust.
Journal style bearings are designed to support radial motion where a shaft rotates
within the bearing. Linear bearings are often used in applications requiring slide plates,
as these bearings are designed to permit motion in a linear motion. Finally, a plain thrust
bearing is designed to do the same job as its roller bearing counterpart, but instead of
using cone shaped rolling elements, the bearing uses pads arranged in a circle around
the cylinder. These pads create wedge-shaped regions of oil inside the bearing between
the pads and a rotating disk, which supports applied thrust and eliminates metal-on-metal
contact.
Out of all the bearing types available, plain bearings tend to be the least expensive.
They can be made from a variety of materials including bronze, graphite and plastics, such
Bearings_PTGuide_V3.indd 26 4/29/16 10:55 AM
 BEARINGS
27DESIGN WORLD — MOTIONmotioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com 4 • 2016
The greater surface contact of roller bearings enables them to
handle larger loads without deforming. Demonstrating just a few of
the many types of roller bearings, here we see a needle, spherical,
tapered and cylindrical roller bearing. Image courtesy of AST.
as Nylon, PTFE and polyacetal.
Improvements in material
characteristics have made plastic
plain bearings increasingly popular
in recent years. Plain bearings of
all types, however, are lightweight,
compact and can carry a substantial
load.
As far as lubrication is
concerned, some plain bearings
require outside lubrication while
others are self-lubricating. Plain
bearings made of bronze or
polyacetal, for example, contain
lubricant within the walls of
the bearing, but require some
outside lubrication to maximize
performance. For other plain
bearings, the material itself acts
as the lubricant. Such is the case
with bearings made from PTFE or
metalized graphite.
The growing popularity of plain
plastic bearings and increasingly
stringent industry standards
has resulted in more consumers
requiring the bearings to meet FDA
and RoHS standards. There has
even been a call for the bearings to
meet the standards of EU directive
10/2011/EC, which also takes the
material manufacturing process
into account.
Common applications for drawn cup needle
roller bearings like this from Koyo include:
precision gear boxes, machine tool, medical
equipment, precision assembly equipment,
robotics, after-market racing equipment and
aerospace.
APPLICATIONS
Bearings are all around us in everyday life and most of the time they go unnoticed. But
without them, many of the tasks we undertake would move along much less smoothly.
The ball bearings’ simple design, ability to operate at high speeds and relatively low-
maintenance requirements, makes them one of the most common roller bearings found
in a variety of industrial applications.
For example, deep groove ball bearings are often used in small- to medium-sized
electric motors because of their ability to accommodate both high speeds and radial
and axial loads. Self-aligning ball bearings, on the other hand, are ideal for use in fans.
These bearings have two rows of balls with a common raceway in the outer ring. This
design allows for angular misalignment while maintaining running accuracy. They are,
however, one of the most difficult bearings to install correctly.
Tapered roller bearings are another form of
bearing that just about every industry depends
on one way or another. They are usually found in
applications where support for axial and radial loads
is required, such as in a tire hub where the bearing
must deal with the radial load from the weight of
the vehicle and the axial load experienced while
cornering. These bearings are also commonly found
in gearboxes where they are generally mounted with
a second bearing of the same type in a face-to-face
or back-to-back orientation. They provide rigid shaft
support, keeping deflection to a minimum. This
reduced shaft deflection minimizes gear backlash.
Tapered bearings also have the advantage of
having less mass but high efficiency, however this
does limit their overall speed.
In applications where bearings are mounted
vertically, they are typically oriented in a face-to-
face setup, while horizontal applications use a
back-to-back setup. Some pumps use this design
because of shaft deflection concerns.
Bearings_PTGuide_V3.indd 27 4/29/16 2:36 PM
28 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
BELTS & PULLEYS
THE BASICS OF
Belts and pulleys lift loads, use mechanical advantage to apply forces, and transmit
power.They also form the basis of industrial conveyors big and small. Here are the
fundamentals of their operation and how to apply them.
LISA EITEL • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_LISAEITEL
Shown here is a Gates Carbon Drive CDN system—designed
to be lower in cost for new bike applications. It leverages
new materials and geometries, with nine carbon cords
embedded within engineered polymer belt and a patented
11-millimeter tooth pitch profile for lower tension. Like
many new belt applications, it replaces chain drives.
INDUSTRIAL
belt drives consist of rubber belts that wrap around drive
pulleys, in turn driven by electric motors. In a typical setup, the
belt also wraps around one or more idler pulleys that keep the belt taut and on track. The
main reasons that engineers pick belt drives over other options is that modern varieties
require little if no maintenance; they’re less expensive than chain drives; and they’re quiet
and efficient, even up to 95% or more. In addition, the tensile members of today’s belts—
cords embedded into the belt rubber that carry the majority of the belt load—are stronger
than ever. Made of polyester, aramid, fiberglass or carbon fiber, these tensile cords make
today’s belt drives thoroughly modern power-transmission devices.
Manufacturers generally describe belts and pulleys with five main geometries. Pitch
diameter is the drive pulley’s diameter. Center distance is the distance between the two
pulleys’ centers. Minimum wrap angle is a measure of how much the belt wraps around
the smallest pulley. Belt length is how long the belt would be if cut and laid flat. Finally, in
the case of toothed belts (also called synchronous belts) the pitch is the number of teeth
per some length—so a 3-mm pitch means that the belt has one tooth every 3 mm, for
example.
APPLYING SYNCHRONOUS BELTS
Some general guidelines are applicable to all timing belts, including miniature and
double-sided belts. First of all, engineers should always design these belt drives
with a sufficient safety factor—in other words, with ample reserve horsepower
capacity. Tip: Take note of overload service factors. Belt ratings are
generally only 1/15 of the belt’s ultimate strength. These ratings are set
so the belt will deliver at least 3,000 hours of useful life if the end user
properly installs and maintains it. The pulley diameter should never
be smaller than the width of the belt.
BeltsPulleys_PTGuide_V1.LE.indd 28 4/29/16 4:10 PM
29DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016
BELTS & PULLEYS
Custom Synchronous Drives
Precise. Reliable. Cost Effective.
Timing Pulley Stock
Guaranteed When You Need It.
Manufacturers of Power Transmission and
Motion Control Components
Concentric Maxi Torque
Stock and Custom Keyless Hub-to-Shaft
Connection System
Email or call to get your
CMT Stock Products Catalog
Order today. Ships today!
Custom Machine & Tool Co., Inc.
(800)355-5949 • sales@cmtco.com
www.cmtco.com
Precise. Reliable. Trusted.
American Engineering • American Made
© 2016 Custom Machine & Tool Co., Inc.
As mentioned, belts are
quieter than other power-
transmission drive options
… but they’re not silent.
Noise frequency increases
proportionally with belt speed,
and noise amplitude increases
with belt tension. Most belt
noise arises from the way
in which belt teeth entering
the pulleys at high speed
repeatedly compresses the
trapped pockets of air. Other
noise arises from belt rubbing
against the flange; in some
cases, this happens when the
shafts aren’t parallel.
Pulleys are metal or
plastic, and the most suitable
depends on required
precision, price, inertia, color,
magnetic properties and the
engineer’s preference based
on experience. Plastic pulleys
with metal inserts or metal
hubs are a good compromise.
Tip: Make at least one pulley
in the belt drive adjustable to
allow for belt installation and
tensioning. Also note that in a
properly designed belt drive,
there should be a minimum of
six teeth in mesh and at least
60° of belt wrap around the
drive pulley.
Other tips:
•	 Pretension belts with the proper
recommended tension. This extends life
and prevents belt ratcheting or tooth
jumping.
•	 Align shafts and pulleys to prevent
belt-tracking forces and belt edge wear.
Don’t crimp belts beyond the smallest
recommended pulley radius for that
belt section.
•	 Select the appropriate belt for the
design torque.
•	 Select the appropriate belt material
for the environment (temperature,
chemical, cleaning agents, oils and
weather). Belt-and-pulley systems
are suitable for myriad environments,
but some applications need special
consideration. Topping this list are
environmental factors.
Dusty environments do not generally
present serious problems as long as the
particles are fine and dry. In contrast,
particulate matter can act as an abrasive
and accelerates belt and pulley wear. Debris
should be prevented from falling into belt
drives. Debris caught in the drive is generally
either forced through the belt or makes
the system stall. In either case, serious
damage occurs to the belt and related drive
hardware.
Light and occasional contact with
water—during occasional washdowns, for
example—has little serious effect. However,
These PowerGrip TruMotion timing belts from Stock
Drive Products have nylon tooth facing for longer and
quieter running and less dust. Fiberglass tensile cords
resist elongation and have a high flex life.
BeltsPulleys_PTGuide_V1.LE.indd 29 5/3/16 9:22 AM
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
30 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
prolonged contact with constant spray or
submersion can significantly reduce tensile
strength in fiberglass belts and make aramid
belts break down and stretch out. In the same
way, occasional contact with oils doesn’t
damage synchronous belts. But prolonged
contact with oil or lubricants, either directly
or airborne, significantly reduces belt service
life. Lubricants cause the rubber compound to
swell, break down internal adhesion systems
and reduce felt tensile strength. While alternate
rubber compounds may provide some marginal
improvement in durability, it’s best to prevent oil
from contacting synchronous belts.
The presence of ozone can be detrimental
to the compounds used in rubber synchronous
belts. Ozone degrades belt materials in much
the same way as excessive temperatures.
Although the bumper materials used in belts
are compounded to resist the effects of ozone,
eventually chemical breakdown occurs and
they become hard and brittle and begin
cracking. The amount of degradation depends
on the ozone concentration and generation of
exposure.
Rubber belts aren’t suitable for cleanrooms,
as they risk shedding particles. Instead, use
urethane timing belts here … keeping in mind
that while urethane belts make significantly less
debris, most can carry only light loads. Also,
none have static conductive construction to
dissipate electrical charges.
Shown here are Baldor-Maska
sheaves for V-belt drives,also
called friction drives for the way
they operate. Minimum allowable
sheave diameter depends on the
belt shape and material, whether
that’s synthetic, neoprene,
urethane, or rubber.
This setup has an electronic warning system from ContiTech
to alert operators when a conveyor is elongating or at risk of
ripping. Called CONTI PROTECT and most useful on industrial
and mining conveyors, the system uses magnetic markings
on the belts to track irregularities in the splice length and
detects longitudinal rips before they grow. Such monitoring
systems are just one example of how belt-drive technologies
have kept pace with 21st-centrury design concepts.
BeltsPulleys_PTGuide_V1.LE.indd 30 4/29/16 2:59 PM
www.designworldonline.com	 4 • 2016	 DESIGN WORLD	 31
BRAKES & CLUTCHES
BRAKES
and clutches are a mainstay in motion designs
that need to stop, hold or index loads.
Especially over the last five years, a technology trend toward
application-specific designs has quickened as several industries
are pushing the performance envelope of stock components.
Brakes are used to stop a load, typically a rotating load,
while clutches are used to transfer torque. There are many
different types of brakes and clutches.
A brake would be used in applications where accurate
stopping of the load is needed and the motor will stop as well.
A clutch would be used in applications where it’s desirable
to engage or disengage a load and motor while leaving the
motor to run all the time. When a clutch is used, the load will be
allowed to coast to a stop.
A clutch and brake combination would be used where the
load will be started and stopped while the motor continues to
rotate. Both clutches and clutch brakes can mount to a motor
shaft or be base-mounted and have input through a belt drive,
chain drive or coupling.
The motor horsepower and motor frame size play a key
role in determining which specific brake or clutch to select. In
the case of base-mounted units, it may be necessary to define
the RPM at that location. Manufacturers provide quick selection
charts where unit size is determined by finding the intersection
of motor horsepower and speed at the clutch shaft. The charts
are commonly created using the dynamic torque capacity for the
product and the torque capacity for the motor plus an overload
factor of some value. Using this method presumes that you’ve
selected a motor that’s sized appropriately to the application. In
applications where cycle rates are considered aggressive for the
inertia of the load, it’s a good idea to consult with the application
support staff of the manufacturer regarding the heat dissipation
capacity.
Coil voltage is another consideration. The most common
options are 6, 24 and 90 Vdc with 90 V being widely preferred in
North American markets, while 24 V is more common in Europe.
In both cases, brake and clutch manufacturers can offer power
supplies to convert ac to dc if required.
BRAKES & CLUTCHES
MORE INDISPENSABLE THAN EVER
Shaft-mounted electric clutches
from New Torque have a static
torque rating from 15 to 202 Nm,
voltage of 24 to95 Vdc, and power
of 16 to 50 W.
Some clutches and brakes — as
the ones from Carlyle Johnson
Machine Company shown here
— can last 15 years on average,
with some products lasting 50
years or more.
Shown here is an ac solenoid
shoe Brake from Ametek. Gemco
industrial brakes stop industrial
machines in steel mills, gantries,
cranes, and commercial laundry
equipment. They are tough and
long-lasting.
This is a Force Control
Industries coupler brake. In
fact, the company’s Posistop and
MagnaShear coupler brakes mount
between motors and reducers, so
engineers can eliminate separate
brake motors.
LISA EITEL • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_LISAEITEL
BrakesClutches_PTGuide_V3.indd 31 4/29/16 11:14 AM
32 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
ENGINEERS
can use a multitude of
cables (including data,
coaxial, and instrumentation cables) in industrial
settings for control networking, low and medium-
voltage power transmission and distribution,
and more. Most cables that distribute power to
motors are low-voltage designs rated for 2,000
V and below. That said, some facilities with
partial responsibility over the utility power they
consume use medium-voltage cables rated for
2,000 to 35,000 V.
Available as both single and multi-conductor
designs, these power cables must be able to
withstand high mechanical loads, speeds and
accelerations. Common applications include
machine tools, cranes, conveyors, portable
designs and stationary heavy-duty equipment.
Such cables can supply temporary ac or dc
power to motors and generators, and can
operate indoors and outdoors, depending on
their temperature rating.
The proper cable for an application depends
on its function and environment. For instance,
only use an unshielded cable when it will
operate in an enclosed space only accessible by
trained professionals. Such enclosures prevent
electromagnetic interference and keep plant
personnel safely away from potentially live
electrical charges.
Manufacturers usually construct low-voltage
cables with aluminum or copper conductors,
insulation and jacketing. Conductors can range
anywhere from finely stranded bare copper wires
to bunched strands of tinned annealed copper.
They come in both shielded and unshielded
versions and usually must be flame retardant and
oil resistant.
Power cables feature conductors that are
either stranded in layers inside or bundled
or braided. The stranded design is easier to
manufacture so costs less. It features long,
layered cores and firm strands wrapped with
an extruded jacket. In the bundled or braided
design, the conductors are braided around a
tension-proof center. By eliminating the layers, a
uniform bend radius is ensured.
To accommodate the complex and
sometimes cramped spaces where they operate,
industrial power cables must also have tight
bending radii, ranging anywhere from 5 to 15
times the overall cable diameter. Jacketing is also
crucial to meet these bending radii requirements.
Therefore, the use of flexible materials such as
PVC, TPE and CPE not only helps these cables
bend and flex but also protects them from
environmental damage.
Because their materials, shielding and
jacketing all vary, so do industrial power cables’
installation techniques. Installers can put cables
into fixed duct, shafts, and conduit; direct-bury or
even immerse the cables in water in water; or lay
cables into open-air applications.
Depending on where a cable is
manufactured and used, it must meet a variety of
approvals, including UL, CSA, TC, AWM, RoHS,
CE and more. In the U.S., the National Electrical
Code (NEC) sets the standards that designers
must usually follow. These codes ensure that the
cables have key performance features to satisfy
machine requirements—for example, to stop the
propagation of flames, satisfy the application’s
maximum voltage draw, withstand extreme
temperatures, and maintain integrity even when
exposed to oil.
THE BASICS OF
MARY GANNON • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_MARYGANNON
INDUSTRIAL POWER
TRANSMISSION CABLES
REFERENCE GUIDE
POWER TRANSMISSION
Control cables, like this Chainflex continuous flex control design from igus, must be able to withstand high mechanical
loads, speeds and accelerations. These Chainflex cables are intended for use in Energy Chain cable carriers and conform to
key standards; are capable of torsion—depending on the cable; and can be used in high speeds and accelerations. They are
UV resistant, flame retardant, halogen free, and can withstand very high or extremely low temperatures. They are available
shielded or unshielded, with a choice of PVC, PUR and TPE outer jackets.
Cabling_PTGuide_V2 MG.indd 32 4/29/16 11:15 AM
• Flexible
Control Cables
• Continous Flex
Cables
• Torsion Cables
• Halogen-Free Cables
• European Cables
• Servo Motor Cables
Bus Cables •
Data Cables •
Tray Cables •
Silicone Cables •
Cable Accessories •
Specialty Cables •
Stock Available
for Immediate Delivery
SAB NORTH AMERICA344 Kaplan Drive, Fairfield NJ 07004
Phone: 866-722-2974 • Fax: 973-276-1515
info@sabcable.com • www.sabcable.com
C
M
Y
CM
MY
CY
CMY
K
SAB_PTGuide4-16.indd 33 4/29/16 10:06 AM
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
34 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
THE BASICS OF
LISA EITEL • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_LISAEITEL
SPROCKETS &
CHAIN DRIVES
Shown here is an MPC sprocket from
Martin Sprocket and Gear Inc. for use
with a curvilinear timing belt. As a side
note, synchronous belt drives work as a
replacement for roller-chain drive systems
where lubrication is unacceptable.
ENGINEERS
have used chains in motion systems for
more than a century. They are versatile
and reliable components to drive machinery and convey products.
Now, advances in precision and technology let designers use
chains in more applications than ever. Remote installations benefit
from long-life chain that requires no lubrication, for example.
Chain-based machinery abounds, but the most common
industrial designs use roller chain. This type of chain consists of
five basic components: pin, bushing, roller, pin link plate and
roller link plate. Manufacturers make and assemble each of these
subcomponents to precise tolerances and heat treat them to
optimize performance. More specifically, modern roller chains
exhibit high wear resistance, fatigue strength and tensile strength.
Roller-chain applications generally fall into two categories: drives
and conveyors.
CHAIN-DRIVE APPLICATIONS
Most typical drive applications use an ASME/ANSI roller chain
wrapped around a driver sprocket (connected directly to the
motor or reducer) and the driven sprocket (often connected to a
machine’s conveyor head-shaft). This portion of the drive lets the
designer build a system that’s either faster or slower by simply
changing the ratio of teeth between the drive and driven sprocket.
The ratio of the teeth determines the reduction in rpm … so to
reduce rpm, the driven sprocket must be larger than the driver
sprocket. For example, if the driver sprocket has 15 teeth and the
driven sprocket has 30 teeth, the ratio is 2:1, so the rpm is halved
at the driven sprocket.
This Morse leaf chain from Power Transmission Solutions of
Regal-Beloit America is made of roller-chain-type links and riveted
pins for maximum strength for a given width. It works as tension
linkage or a lifting device at slow speeds.
ChainRollerSprockets_PTGuide_V3.indd 34 4/29/16 11:18 AM
CHAIN, ROLLER & SPROCKET
35DESIGN WORLD — MOTIONmotioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com 4 • 2016
500
400
300
200
100
80
60
40
30
20
10
8
6
4
3
2
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.3
0.2
900
700
500
400
300
200
100
80
60
40
30
20
10
8
6
4
3
2
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.3
0.2
1,000
800
600
400
300
200
100
80
60
40
30
20
10
8
6
4
3
2
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.3
1,000
800
600
400
300
200
100
80
60
40
30
20
10
8
6
5
4
3
2
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
10
20
30
40
50
60
80
100
200
300
500
700
1,000
2,000
3,000
5,000
7,000
10,000
Roller-chaindrivecapacity(horsepower)
Chain strands
4 3 2 1
25T
22T
19T
25T25T
25T
25T
25T
25T
25T
25T22T
21T
21T
21T
21T
21T
21T
19T
19T17T
17T
17T
17T
17T
19T
19T
19T
15T
15T
23T
23T
23T
23T
240200
180160140120100
80
60
50
40
35
Speed of roller chain’s small sprocket (rpm)
Roller-chain selection chart
This is a Zone Touch case conveyor from Container Handling Systems
Corp. (CHSC), which uses chain drives that function as accumulating
sections. It has longer life than conventional machines with rollers
and fabric belts. It’s also quieter than roller
conveyors because its tabletop chain rides low-
friction UHMW wear strips and return ways.
The easiest way to select a roller chain is using
horsepower charts. First, obtain the motor horsepower and
rpm of the small driver sprocket. From this, determine the
chain size and number of teeth for the driver sprocket. Where
roller chain must drive applications that need long life without
contamination, pick chain with self-lubricating subcomponents.
Where roller chain must drive applications that need high
precision, pick chain with precision roller bearings at each link
connection.
CONVEYOR APPLICATIONS
Conveyor chains come in myriad versions to move product
horizontally, vertically or even around curved radii. The
most common conveyor chains are ASME-style (ANSI-style)
attachment chains. These chains include extended pins or
plates with tabs onto which parts or product-holding shoes
can bolt. Common versions are single-pitch attachment chain,
double-pitch attachment chain, hollow-pin chain, curved-
attachment chain and plastic-sleeve chain. The attachments let
engineers put special fixtures or blocks onto the chain to serve
specific conveyor functions.
One subtype of conveyor chain is the accumulating
conveyor. These stop discrete products even while the chain
is still moving, and they do so with minimal friction and wear.
Accumulating conveyors are suitable for
applications (such as assembly lines) that have products ride
through several stations. Tip: Select chain with top rollers or
side rollers to let discrete products idle while the conveyor
continues to run. Also pick custom attachments or work with
manufacturers that make custom fixtures to handle specific
parts. Many industries (including the automotive, food and
beverage, and consumer-products industries) use custom
attachments on their chain-based accumulator conveyors to
economically and consistently move.
CHAINS ENDURE SUBOPTIMAL
ENVIRONMENTS
The environments of many chain applications
are less than ideal. Some require clean
operation without the lubrication that can
contaminate products. Others expose
chain-driven machinery to weather, water
or chemicals. So, chain manufacturers offer
several products to meet these challenges.
Consider roller chain: One critical area
where roller chains need lubrication is the
pin-bushing contact zone. Self-lubricating
chains stay cleaner because the exterior of
the chain is free of excess lube. These chains
Morse inverted-tooth
chain drives from Power
Transmission Solutions
of Regal-Beloit America
come in HV versions for
high capacity at high
speed. Silent chain is
another option to make
smooth, silent drives at
slower speeds.
ChainRollerSprockets_PTGuide_V3.indd 35 4/29/16 11:19 AM
• Available from stock from over 30
Martin locations throughout North
America
• MTOs in days not weeks:
» QD bushed
» MST®
bushed
» Finished bore
» Stainless steel
» Aluminum
» And more...
• Over 350 MPC®
SKUs on the shelf
• Stocked in TB and Minimum Plain Bore
• Compatible with all leading
Curvilinear Belts
Martin's MPC®
Sprockets are manufactured in various sizes, dimensions and capacities to
meet a variety of industrial requirements.These include a wide range of loads, speeds, and
demanding applications such as blowers, conveyors, pumps and mixers.
MPC
®
SYNCHRONOUS
SPROCKETS
Direct drop-in for the most popular tooth profile
martinsprocket.com • 817 258 3000
MartinSprockett_PTGuide4-16.indd 36 4/29/16 10:11 AM
CHAIN, ROLLER & SPROCKET
37DESIGN WORLD — MOTIONmotioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com 4 • 2016
A1 chain (sometimes called B1 one-hole chain) has links
with one hole and a bent attachment. A2 is similar
but always double pitch with two attachment holes per link.
K1 (B2 one-hole) and K2 (B2 two-hole) chains
both have bent attachments on both sides.
D1 (E1) and D3 (E2) chains have extended pins.
Single-pitch WA1 (WCB1 one hole) chain and wide-contour
WA2 (WCB1 two holes) chain both have bent attachments
on one side and one or two holes per link.
WSK1 (WCS2 one-hole or WM1) and WSK2
(WCS2 two holes or WM2) is wide-contour chain
with straight attachments on both sides.
WK1 (WCB2 one-hole) and WK2
(WCB2 two holes) is wide-contour
chain with bent attachments.
SK1 chain (sometimes called S2 one-hole or M1 chain) has straight attachments
on both sides. SK2 (S2 two holes or M2) is the same but with two holes per link.
SA1 (S1 one-hole or M35) chain and SA2 (S1 two holes or M35-2) chain
both have straight attachments on one side, but the latter has two holes per link.
Power-transmission and conveyor chain attachment options
Roller-chain sprockets come in myriad versions,
but most are shaft-ready designs. The sprocket
here is from the Power Transmission Solutions
division of Regal-Beloit America.
also attract less dust and particulates than regular chains. Such
roller chains are useful where oil contamination is a concern,
including paper-product or wood-processing industries.
SPECIALTY COATINGS AND STAINLESS STEEL CAN DELAY
OR PREVENT CORROSION
Nickel-plated chains offer another alternative for chain coatings,
providing some protection for mildly corrosive environments.
Stainless-steel chains offer superior corrosion resistance; however,
designers must be aware that regular stainless steels cannot be
hardened in the same manner as carbon steel. Therefore, the load
carrying capacity of stainless steel is lower than carbon steel.
Proper chain maintenance requires periodic inspection. All
chains must be checked for damage, wear and chemical attack
on a regular basis.
Another issue is wear elongation. Eventually
roller chains wear so much that they necessitate
replacement—typically at 1.5 to 2% (12.180
in./ft to 12.240 in./ft) elongation.
Chains may work until they reach
3% elongation, but are at
increased risk for suboptimal
performance.
ChainRollerSprockets_PTGuide_V3.indd 37 4/29/16 11:19 AM
38	 DESIGN WORLD 	 4 • 2016 	 www.designworldonline.com
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
COMPRESSION SPRINGS
THE BASICS OF
LISA EITEL • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_LISAEITEL
When hit by an object, oil inside this Zimmer shock
absorber floods a spiraling channel from its fat opening
to its narrow end. Sold by Intercon Automation Parts, the
shock absorber relies on compression springs to return to
its extended position after each cycle.
ENGINEERS incorporate compression
springs in designs that need
linear compressive forces and mechanical energy storage—
designs such as pneumatic cylinders and push-button
controls, for example. The most conventional compression
spring is a round metallic wire coiled into a helical form.
The most common compression spring, the straight
metal coil spring, bends at the same diameter for its entire
length, so has a cylindrical shape. Cone-shaped metal
springs are distinct in that diameter changes gradually from
a large end to a small end; in other words, they bend at a
tighter radius at one end. Cone-shaped springs generally
go into applications that need low solid height (the total
height when compressed) and higher resistance to surging.
Whether cylindrical or cone shaped, helical compression
springs often go over a rod or fit inside a hole that controls
the spring’s movement. Other configuration types include
hourglass (concave), barrel (convex), and magazine (in
which the wire coils into a rectangular helix).
Most compression springs have squared and ground
ends. Ground ends provide flat planes and stability under
load travel. Squareness is a characteristic that influences
how the axis force produced by the spring can be
transferred to adjacent parts.
Although open ends may be suitable in some
applications, closed ends afford a greater degree of
squareness. Squared and ground end compression springs
are useful for applications that specify high-duty springs;
unusually close tolerances on load or rate; minimized solid
height; accurate seating and uniform bearing pressures;
and minimized buckling.
The key physical dimensions and operating
characteristics of these springs include their outside
diameter (OD), inside diameter, wire diameter, free length,
solid height, and spring rate or stiffness.
•	 Free length is the overall length of a spring in the
unloaded position.
•	 Solid height is the length of a compression spring
under sufficient load to bring all coils into contact with
adjacent coils.

•	 Spring rate is the change in load per unit deflection in
pounds per inch (lb/in.) or Newtons per millimeter (N/
mm).
The dimensions, along with the load and deflection
requirements, determine the mechanical stresses in the
spring.
When the design loads a compression spring, the
coiled wire is stressed in torsion and the stress is greatest at
the wire surface. As the spring is deflected, the load varies,
causing a range of operating stress. Stress and stress range
affect the life of the spring. The higher the stress range, the
lower the maximum stress must be to obtain comparable
CompressionSprings_PTGuide_V2.indd 38 4/29/16 11:21 AM
RotorClip_PTGuide4-16.indd 39 4/29/16 10:12 AM
40	 DESIGN WORLD 	 4 • 2016 	 www.designworldonline.com
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
life. Relatively high stresses may be used when the stress range
is low or if the spring is subjected to static loads only. The stress
at solid height must be low enough to avoid permanent damage
because springs are often compressed solid during installation.
HOW TO SELECT COMPRESSION SPRINGS
Here are the most important factors to consider when selecting
helical compression springs.
The OD of a spring expands under compression. Be sure
to consider this if the spring goes into a tube or a bore during
assembly. Also remember that the OD of a spring is subject to
manufacturing tolerances, just as any mechanical part. If the
tolerance range is positive, the spring’s dimensions may be slighter
larger and can add to the overall assembly’s envelope size. Most
spring suppliers specify work-in-hole diameters for their springs
to factor in manufacturing tolerances and the OD’s expected
expansion. Look for this information to quickly select from stock
spring catalogs, or use this information to better communicate
product needs when ordering custom-made springs.
Consider loading or travel requirements on the compression
spring. The spring rate (also called the spring constant) is the
relationship of the force to compress a spring by a unit of length,
typically pounds per inch. So with a given load, the product designer
can calculate expected spring travel. The further the spring travels,
the more stress it endures. So at a critical point, stress can yield
the wire material … causing a phenomenon called spring set. After
spring set, the spring can’t expand back to its original unloaded
length. Even so, in some assemblies, such springs can still function.
Stress formulas and online calculators predict spring set.
Otherwise, a starting rule of thumb is to avoid solid height by at
least 20% (so that there’s always 20% of the spring’s total travel left
during the normal range of operation).
Compression spring-end types are standard or special. Standard
ends are either plain open or closed. Either can be ground or not
ground. The ends actually affect the spring rate. So, springs with
dissimilar ends that are otherwise identical (with the same total coils,
wire size, and OD) have different spring rates. Ground ends require
more manufacturing effort. However, combined with closed ends,
round ends improve the squareness of the loading force and reduce
spring-buckling tendencies.
Some manufacturers include closed and ground ends in
standard catalog stock design, while some don’t. Be sure to know
the difference. Special end examples include reduced coil for screw
mounting, offset legs to work as alignment pins, and enlarged coils
to snap into ring grooves.
Spring materials abound and include everything from carbon
steel to exotic alloys. Music wire is a high-carbon spring steel and is
the most widely used material. Stainless steel 302 has less strength
than music wire, but adds general corrosion resistance. Nickel alloys
make a lot of springs branded under various trademarks and are
chosen for extreme high or low operating temperatures, specific
corrosive environments, and non-magnetic qualities. Springs made
of phosphor bronze and beryllium copper are copper alloys for
good corrosion resistance and electrical conductivity.
This concave (hourglass-shaped)
compression spring can stay centered,
even in large-diameter bores.
Surging is when a spring builds compression-wave
motion when subject to vibrations close to its
natural frequency. This cone-shaped compression
spring resists surging. The larger outer coils
collapse before the smaller inner coils, so forces
on the spring also increase the spring rate for a
natural damping effect. Photo courtesy Lee Spring.
This compression spring has reduced ends.
This compression spring has
a barrel shape for lateral
stability.
CompressionSprings_PTGuide_V2.indd 40 4/29/16 11:21 AM
COUPLINGS
41DESIGN WORLD — MOTIONmotioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com 4 • 2016
COUPLINGS:TACKLING TORQUE, MISALIGNMENT AND MORE
FOUND
in countless applications, couplings are simple devices that
connect two shafts together. Couplings are usually found
on rotating equipment such as motors to transmit a number of motion
parameters. These parameters include the precise transmission of velocity,
angular positioning and torque. However, the simplicity of these devices often
serves to obscure their importance.
Couplings should be designed to allow for some end movement. Two
types are available: rigid and flexible. Flexible couplings compensate for
misalignment, while rigid designs are used when shafts are already
in alignment.
Within these two types exists a variety of coupling styles. Rigid couplings
include sleeve-style and clamped, or compression style, and require precise
alignment. Flexible couplings include bellows, jaw, Oldham, disc and beam
styles.
RIGID COUPLINGS
Rigid couplings are torsionally stiff and best used when shafts are already in
proper alignment; parallel shaft misalignment ideally should be well below one
thousandth of an inch. One drawback is that they are susceptible
to vibration and cannot be run at high speeds.
Sleeve-style rigid couplings are suitable for light- to
medium-duty applications. The one-piece sleeve—
essentially a tube with an inner diameter that is the same
as the shafts it is joining together—has two set-screws to
fasten it to the shaft. They are easy to use and offer high
torque capacity, stiffness and zero backlash.
Clamped, or compression style, couplings come in
two parts that completely wrap around the shaft. Like most
coupling designs, this protects the shaft from
damage while providing high torsional holding
power. Their advantage comes from their two-
piece design, which allows them to be removed
for easy maintenance.
FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS
Flexible couplings can be used where there
is a slight amount of misalignment between
shafts. They accommodate misalignment while
still transmitting torque. Misalignments can be
one of several fundamental types, including
lateral, axial, angular or skewed. The greater
the misalignment, the less efficient the motor is
in generating speed and torque. Misalignment
also contributes to premature wear including
broken shafts, failed bearings and excessive
vibration.
Flexible couplings are typically the most
compliant of components in mechanical
motion systems, making torsional stiffness a
critical factor in terms of maintaining positional
control over a load. Many users of servomotors
require the shaft to start and stop multiple
times per second, which requires a torsionally
stiff coupling to help diminish the settling time
between cycles. However, torsionally flexible
couplings frequently win out in terms of their
MIKE SANTORA • ASSOCIATE EDITOR • @DW_MIKE SANTORA
In these images we see an exploded and fully
assembled view of GAM’s KHS metal bellows coupling.
The conical hubs, and rotationally symmetric
construction allow for speeds up to 30,000RPM and
are commonly used for test stands, spindle drives and
other high speed applications.
Couplings_PTGuide_V3.indd 41 4/29/16 11:23 AM
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
42 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
Key benefits of bellows couplings include
misalignment compensation and precise transmission
of velocity, positioning and torque. Bellows couplings
are known for their exceptional torsional rigidity, and
flexibility in dealing with axial, angular and parallel shaft
misalignment.
Bellows couplings are typically made from a
stainless-steel tube hydroformed to create deep
corrugations that make them flexible across axial,
angular and parallel shaft misalignments. When
coupling shafts, bellows couplings absorb slight
misalignments from perpendicularity and concentricity
tolerances between the mounting surfaces of the two
connected components.
Jaw couplings feature two metal hubs and a spider
insert, usually made of elastomer, which are fitted
together to absorb vibration and shock. The elastomer
is available in a variety of hardness and temperature
ratings, so the spiders can be chosen for specific
applications. Because they are not as torsionally stiff
as other couplings, they are better suited to constant
motion applications.
Jaw couplings are available in two types: straight
jaw and curved jaw with zero backlash. Because
accuracy of torque transmission can be an issue,
straight jaw couplings are not used in most servo
applications. Curved jaw couplings, on the other hand,
reduce deformation on the spider and the effects of
centrifugal forces during high-speed (up to 40,000+
torque capacity in a given body size. Torsionally flexible
couplings are naturally better for vibration damping,
which is needed just as frequently in continuous motion
applications as in cyclic duty applications.
Types of motion differ in applications as well. For
instance, in manufacturing lines, motion may be either
continuous or start and stop. With the latter type, couplings
can help dampen all-too-common vibration, diminish
the settling time of the system and improve throughput.
In contrast, continuous motion applications give greater
weight to torsional strength over damping capabilities.
Motion applications that require precise motion control,
such as in packaging and scanning and inspection, call for
zero-backlash couplings.
Bellows couplings are commonly used in motion
control applications that require precision control and
where shaft misalignment is present. If your application
requires precision, then it is important to understand
the performance factors that are critical for selecting the
optimum bellows coupling for the task.
There is a difference between backlash—which is a
true mechanical clearance, such as that which is found
between gear teeth—and torsional deflection, or wind-
up, which everything on earth will exhibit to some degree.
Most couplings are preloaded to eliminate backlash or
are inherently backlash free, like the bellows coupling. But
they all have different levels of torsional stiffness, which is
often traded off for lateral flexibility during the coupling
selection process. Bellows couplings tend to have the
highest torsional stiffness of any servomotor coupling, do
not handle quite as much misalignment as others, but also
do not impose heavy reaction loads onto the shafts and
bearings as they flex.
In this image we see R+W’s new SP6 series
backlash free precision elastomer couplings.
Elastomer couplings like this are often used for
high speed spindle applications.
Internal leaf springs, like those on this R+W BK-LK
serve the purpose of making the coupling axially rigid
for rotary / linear applications.
Couplings_PTGuide_V3.indd 42 4/29/16 11:24 AM
Making the Impossible… Possible!
Electrodeposited
Bellows
Features:
•	 Highest stroke length(90%)
•	 Highest cycle life
•	 Customization
•	 Repeatability
•	 Media compatibility
•	 High temperature
•	 SS, Titanium, alloys, etc.
buy.bellowstech.com
Transfer Pressure or Temperature
into Linear Movement
Transfer Pressure or Temperature
into Linear Movement
Features:
•	 Zero backlash
•	 Thinnest high strength walls
•	 Seamless construction
•	 Minimal side loading
•	 Diameters as small as 0.020 in (5mm)
•	 Highest cycle life
•	 Design assistance for Customization
buy.servometer.com
Edge Welded
Bellows
Metal Bellows
ServometerBellows_PTGuide4-16.indd 43 4/29/16 1:21 PM
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
44 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
rpm) operation. Both types can easily
handle axial motion. If a spider breaks,
the driving jaws can still contact the
driven jaws directly, maintaining
operation, making jaw couplings fail-
safe designs.
Oldham couplings can be
preloaded to eliminate backlash and
can handle misalignment of all types
depending on the disc material. They
are being used more often as an
alternative to straight jaw couplings
on general industrial equipment
such as pumps, valves, gearboxes
and conveyor systems. They are
versatile and offer long lives when
misalignment is an issue. Their three-
piece design—two hubs and a torque-
transmitting center—makes them easy
to install and disassemble.
Oldham couplings can be
specified in a variety of materials
to meet the needs of different
applications, for example, if zero
backlash is required versus vibration
reduction. They are best suited when
parallel misalignment may be high.
And because of their three-piece
design, axial motion is limited.
Disc couplings are a logical choice
for servomotor and other demanding
applications because of their ability
to transmit high torque, operate at
high or changing speeds, and handle
misalignment and system loads.
While a coupling’s torque,
misalignment and speed capacities
need to be evaluated against a system’s requirements, the disc-pack
usually is the most important aspect of the coupling’s construction
because it will affect all critical performance aspects of the coupling and
the system in which it is used.
The most common type of disc-pack is made of metal and can be
found in different shapes (straight-sided, scalloped edges, square, and
so on). In the case of metal disc couplings, double-flex designs need to
be used if there is to be any parallel shaft misalignment. The single-flex
variety of metal disc coupling is good for angular misalignment but not
parallel. This can be quite advantageous in case a user needs to suspend
a load between two single-flex couplings, because their lateral stiffness
can support the weight of the intermediate component.
Beam, or helical couplings are almost always manufactured of
aluminum, but stainless-steel versions are also available for use in
corrosive environments and increased torque and stiffness. Their one-
piece design makes them easy to maintain. Offering zero backlash,
they feature spiral cuts that transmit torque and can handle all types of
misalignment and angular, parallel or axial motion. Parallel motion is
more of a challenge for the single beam design because it must bend in
two directions, which causes stress and possible failure.
Two designs exist under this style—single and multiple beams.
Single beams are best suited to low-torque applications where no
parallel misalignment is present, while multiple-beam designs are stiffer,
for higher maximum torque capabilities.
SPECIAL COUPLINGS
Most disc couplings feature a metal disc-pack. However, some have
composite disc-packs that are constructed of a special composite
material rather than metal. This composite material provides an
alternative to metal disc couplings. The advantages include its ability to
absorb shock and vibration, its misalignment capacity, electrical isolation
and elimination of fatigue and fretting. Whereas metal disc couplings
Ringfeder Power Transmission’s Gerwah brand AKN series metal bellows
coupling has zero backlash and compensates for angular, axial and radial
misalignments. It uses clamping hubs on both sides for shaft connection.
Couplings_PTGuide_V3.indd 44 4/29/16 11:24 AM
Innovative Sensor Technology
WIND ELEVATOR MOBILE MOTOR SOLAR STEEL PACKAGING CRANE
www.kuebler.com/usa
ROTARY ENCODERS
SOLUTIONS FOR INDUSTRIES
FUNCTIONAL
SAFETY
INCLINOMETERSCOUNTERS AND
PROCESS
SLIP RINGS
BEARINGLESS
ENCODERS
Kübler Group Kuebler Inc.
10430-J Harris Oaks Boulevard
Charlotte, NC 28269
Tel +1 704 705 4710
Toll free +1 855 KUEBLER
usa@kuebler.com
Innovative Sensor Technology
MOTOR CRANE
LINEAR
MEASUREMENT
Pulses for Automation
Made possible by Kübler
Keubler_PTGuide4-16---2.indd 45 5/2/16 11:39 AM
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
46 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com		
may be less expensive initially, overall cost of composite
disc couplings usually will be lower because they are
maintenance free and are rated for long life.
The ability to accommodate misalignment is a critical
aspect of a flexible disc coupling. Misalignment between
coupled shafts often exists due to manufacturing tolerances,
improper installation or from loads on the system.
Parallel, angular and axial misalignment
between coupled shafts should all be
examined to see if the coupling selected
is up to the task. It is important to know
a coupling’s misalignment rating as
well as the stiffness rating. The stiffer
a coupling, the higher the reaction
load misalignment will transmit to the
coupled items. These reaction loads
will have a negative effect on the life
of the system. To limit these reaction
loads, composite disc couplings are less
radially stiff than metal disc couplings.
Therefore, they transmit lower reaction
loads on the coupled equipment, thereby
increasing the life of connected (and often
expensive) components.
The amount of misalignment that a system
can experience will typically determine the selection
between a single-flex (one flexible disc-pack) and a double-
flex (two flexible disc-pack) coupling. While more compact
in size than the double-flex variety, a single-flex coupling will
have lower misalignment capacity and higher reaction loads.
A common misconception is that single-flex disc couplings
cannot accommodate parallel misalignment. Although this is
true for metal disc couplings, the design of some disc-pack
couplings allow single-flex CD couplings to accommodate
limited parallel misalignment. This permits designers to
implement a single-flex disc coupling into designs that may
not have space for a double-flex coupling.
Gear couplings are a type of mechanical device
designed to transmit torque between two shafts that are not
collinear. The coupling typically consists of two flexible joints,
one fixed to each shaft. These joints are often connected by
a third shaft called the spindle.
Each joint generally consists of a 1:1 gear ratio internal/
external gear pair. The tooth flanks and outer diameter of the
external gear are crowned to allow for angular displacement
between the two gears. Mechanically, the gears are
equivalent to rotating splines with modified profiles. They
are called gears because of the relatively large size of the
teeth. Gear couplings are generally limited to angular
misalignments of 4 to 5°.
Gear couplings ordinarily come in two variations:
flanged sleeve and continuous sleeve. Flanged gear
couplings consist of short sleeves surrounded by a
Jaw couplings like the GWE 5104 from Ringfeder have
two metal hubs and a spider insert, usually made of
elastomer. This particular coupling is available with
elastomeric spiders of different degrees of shore
hardness for varying damping levels.
Couplings_PTGuide_V3.indd 46 4/29/16 11:25 AM
© 2015 GAM. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED901 E. Business Center Drive, Mount Prospect, IL 60056
Linear Mount Products
WDS
Bellows style
distance coupling
DL-DC
Right angle Dyna Lite gearbox with
hollow output design for easy
mounting to linear actuators. Includes
output adapter tailored to the actuator
PMK
Parallel
mounting
kit
EPL-H
Inline gearbox, with
hollow output design
for easy mounting to
linear actuators
For Everything Between the Motor and Actuator
Linear Mount Products include gear reducers, couplings, and mounting kits
designed to interface specifically with actuators. We don’t make the actuators...
We make them better.
Toll Free 888.GAM.7117 | www.gamweb.com/linear | info@gamweb.com
15M_GAM_025_LinearMountAd_I.indd 1 3/24/15 9:53 AMGAM_PTGuide4-16.indd 47 4/29/16 10:14 AM
48 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016
perpendicular flange. One sleeve is placed on
each shaft so the two flanges line up face to face.
A series of screws or bolts in the flanges hold
them together. Continuous-sleeve gear couplings
feature shaft ends coupled together and abutted
against each other, which are then enveloped by
a sleeve. Generally, these sleeves are made of
metal, but they can also be made of Nylon.
Single-joint gear couplings are used
to connect two nominally coaxial shafts. In
this application, the device is called a gear-
type flexible, or flexible coupling. The single
joint allows for minor misalignments, such as
installation errors and changes in shaft alignment
due to operating conditions. These types of
gear couplings are generally limited to angular
misalignments of 1
⁄4 to 1
⁄2°.
Magnetic couplings are designed to transfer
torque from one shaft to another, but they do
so without a physical mechanical connection.
This makes them suitable for fluid pumping
applications since the connection can be made
through thin barriers, which help maintain a
hermetically sealed rotary feed through.
Since there are no contacting parts in the
coupling, wear is virtually nonexistent and the use
of permanent magnets means no external power
source is needed. Magnetic couplings also have
a built-in safety feature where, in the event of an
overload on the coupling, it will shift to the next
position and keep going.
Magnetic couplings can typically only handle
light torque loads and applications with either
gradual starts, or low rotational inertia of the
driven side of the system. They are also rather
large in diameter, considering their relatively light
torque load. The couplings also have moderate
radial loads on support bearings.
REFERENCE GUIDE
POWER TRANSMISSION
THE COUPLING.RW-AMERICA.COM
THE PROTECTOR
FOR THE SAFETY OF YOUR DRIVE LINE:
OUR PRELOADED BALL-DETENT SAFETY COUPLINGS.
RW_DesignWorld_HalfIsland_round2.indd 1 4/18/13 8:09 PM
"GEAR COUPLINGS ARE A TYPE OF
MECHANICAL DEVICE DESIGNED
TO TRANSMIT TORQUE BETWEEN
SHAFTS THAT ARE NOT COLINEAR."
Couplings_PTGuide_V3.indd 48 4/29/16 4:22 PM
• Thoroughly vetted by industry
experts
• Over 350 pages covering 17
chapters on power transmission/
motion control products
• New chapter on technical and
engineering data for easy
reference
• Individual chapters available for
purchase
Get the industry “bible”
“
“
Order by scanning this QR code,
visiting www.ptda.org/Handbook or
call +1.312.516.2100 or e-mail ptda@ptda.org
Channeling the
Power of Industry
The definitive hands-on resource and textbook forthe power transmission/motion control industry
CYANMAGENTAYELLOWBLACK
Kenneth A. Miko
Director Category Management
& Strategic Accounts
BDI Worldwide
the FIFTH EDITION of the
highly regarded
resource I
want in
every
person’s
hands.
Power Transmission
Handbook
There’s
only one
Also available as an eBook
PTDA_PTGuide4-16.indd 49 4/29/16 1:25 PM
50 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
ELECTRIC
motors that drive industrial machines
need some way to control motor speed.
And at its most basic level, a motor
drive controls the speed of the motor.
Some manufacturers refer to a controller and motor
together as a drive system. However, from the electrical
side of things, the drive is often specifically the electrical
components that make up the variable frequency inverter
itself. So drives are the interface between the control signals
and the motor and include power electronic devices such as
SCRs (silicon controlled rectifiers), transistors and thyristors.
Matching the correct drive to the type of motor in an
application is critical for getting the best fit. A wide range
MOTOR DRIVES
BASICS OF
MILES BUDIMIR • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_MOTION
Drives continue to offer more performance in smaller packages. For instance, a new
line of drives from Yaskawa, the Sigma-7 family, features a smaller footprint, increased
bandwidth, and 24-bit encoding that boosts precision. A package of algorithms corrects
machine imperfections, including ripple compensation, anti-resonance and friction model
compensation.
of drives is available depending on the needs of the
specific application and motor type. In general though,
drive types typically fall into two categories: dc and ac.
DC DRIVES
Dc drives control dc motors. A basic dc drive is similar
in operation to an ac drive in that the drive controls the
speed of the motor. For dc motor control, a common
method is a thyristor-based control circuit. These circuits
consist of a thyristor bridge circuit that rectifies ac into dc
for the motor armature. And varying the voltage to the
armature controls the motor’s speed.
AC DRIVES
Ac drives control ac motors, such as induction motors
and synchronous motors. These drives are sometimes
known as variable frequency drives (VFDs) or inverters.
Ac drives convert ac to dc, then, using a range of
different switching techniques, generate variable voltage
and frequency outputs to drive the motor.
An adjustable speed drive is a general term used
sometimes interchangeably with variable speed drive or
variable frequency drive. It controls the motor by varying
the frequency of the output power. Again, from an
electrical perspective, all of these ultimately refer to the
frequency converter circuitry.
An ac motor’s speed is determined by the number
of poles and the frequency. Thus, as frequency is
adjusted, the motor’s speed can be controlled as well. A
common way to control frequency is by the use of pulse
width modulation (PWM). A PWM drive outputs a train of
dc pulses to a motor and by modulating the pulse width,
makes it either narrower or wider, which delivers an ac
current waveform to the motor.
Another drive feature, the ability to slow down
or stop a motor, is known as regenerative braking or
regen braking. It provides a way of stopping a motor’s
rotation by using the same solid-state components that
control the motor’s voltage. The energy generated from
braking can be channeled back into the ac mains or into
a braking resistor. One advantage of regenerative drives
include their ability to stop a motor faster than it would
normally coast to a stop.
Drives_PTGuide_V2-mb.indd 50 4/29/16 4:27 PM
ptpilot.com | 864-439-7537
Size matters.
Especially with gearmotors...
Too small = premature failure
Too large = high cost & low efficiency
Unsure of your drive size? Then go
online to PT Pilot®
. Simply enter the
parameters of your hoist, conveyor, or
travel car. PT Pilot®
will automatically
calculate the optimal horsepower, speed,
and gear unit – with or without a VFD.
PT Pilot®
also provides documentation,
pricing, and a 3D CAD drawing for every
selection. Visit ptpilot.com.
SEW_MCTrends_3-16.indd 51 4/29/16 1:26 PM
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
52 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
VFDs
VFDs operate by switching their output devices­­—which can be transistors,
IGBTs (insulated gate bipolar transistors), or thyristors—on and off. VFDs can
be either constant voltage or constant current. Constant voltage types are the
most common type of VFD. They use PWM to control both the frequency and
the voltage applied to the motor.
Why use VFDs? They are a powerful way to control the speed of ac
induction motors and are fairly simple and easy to use. Among the benefits of
using a VFD for motor speed control is the actual energy savings. Controlling
the amount of current drawn by the motor can save a lot on energy costs
because the motor will not run at full load all of the time.
Especially since Congress passed the Energy Independence and Security
Act of 2007 (EISA), motor efficiency has become a top design priority. For
instance, single-phase induction machines (specifically, permanent split-
capacitor motors) and universal motors, widely used in industrial washers, are
managed with simple voltage-control techniques. Contrast this with high-end,
high-performance machines where three-phase motors are more common and
which use VFDs.
Switch reluctance motors (SRMs) are not yet an appropriate alternative
because their control schemes are still evolving, but three-phase motors
are readily available and may be a smart choice because their VFD control
techniques have improved significantly. More importantly, VFD electronics
costs have been dropping as well, making them more cost-effective.
In the same way, an OEM using a universal motor with simple triac control
may now find that a three-phase VFD control will provide better energy
efficiency, while OEMs using three-phase/VFD configurations may make the
move to technologies like brushless dc motors.
Another advantage of VFDs is seen on motor start-up. Without a VFD, an
induction motor on start-up has to handle a high initial in-rush current. As the
motor speeds up and approaches a constant speed, the current levels off from
the peak in-rush values. So with a VFD, the motor’s input starts off with low
voltage and a low frequency, avoiding the problem of high in-rush currents.
Of course, the main reason any kind of speed control is used on motors
is to gain greater and more precise control over motor speed and therefore
adjust the motor speed to meet the requirements of the load and reduce
energy costs.
Another benefit of using a VFD for motor speed control is the reduction
of mechanical wear on the motor components. Eliminating the in-rush
currents upon start-up gets rid of the excessive torque on the components,
and thus increases the life of the motor and reduces maintenance costs and
the need for repair. In addition, mechanical stresses on the entire system are
greatly reduced. In many cases, mechanical controls such as throttles, valves,
dampers and louvers can be removed, thereby reducing mechanical wear and
maintenance costs. Further, with reduced mechanical wear, the system output
quality may be improved and production times reduced.
There are some drawbacks to using VFDs, however. The main one is
the possibility of harmonic distortion which can effect the power quality as
well as the operation of other machinery. However, VFD manufacturers have
developed solutions that mostly eliminate this problem.
The Altivar 320 series of drives from
Schneider Electric boast connectivity options
including Ethernet (Modbus TCP, Ethernet/
IP, Profinet, EtherCAT) or serial (Modbus RTU,
CANopen, Profibus DP, DeviceNet) based
networks. They also feature embedded safety
solutions for simple application requirements
to comply with Machinery Directive 2006/42/
EC and simplify certification.
Drives_PTGuide_V2-mb.indd 52 4/29/16 11:31 AM
Power Transmission and Motion Control Solutions
for Industrial Applications
The Power Brands in Power Transmission
Ameridrives Couplings
Ameridrives
Power Tranmission
Bauer Gear Motor
Bibby Turboflex
Boston Gear
Delroyd Worm Gear
Formsprag Clutch
Guardian Couplings
Huco Dynatork
Industrial Clutch
Inertia Dynamics
Kilian Manufacturing
Lamiflex Couplings
Marland Clutch
Matrix International
Nuttall Gear
Stieber Clutch
Svendborg Brakes
TB Wood’s
Twiflex Limited
Warner Electric
Warner Linear
Wichita Clutch
www.AltraMotion.com
Altra_PTGuide4-16.indd 53 4/29/16 1:29 PM
Worm gear
Spiral bevel gear
Hypoid gear
Spiroid®
or Helicon®
gear
Spiroid®
gear
Helicon®
gear
54 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
LISA EITEL • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_LISAEITEL
THE PRIMARY
function of a gear is to mesh
with other gears to transmit
altered torque and rotation. In fact, gearing can change
the speed, torque and direction of motion from a drive
source.
When two gears with an une qual number of teeth
engage, the mechanical advantage makes their rotational
speeds and torques different.
In the simplest setups, gears are flat with spur teeth
(with edges parallel to the shaft) and the input gear’s shaft
is parallel to that of the output. Spur gears mostly roll
through meshing, so can be 98% or more efficient per
reduction stage. However, there is some sliding between
tooth surfaces, and initial tooth-to-tooth contact occurs
along the whole tooth width at once, causing small shock
loads that induce noise and wear. Sometimes lubrication
helps mitigate these issues.
In slightly more complex setups, parallel-axis
gearsets have helical gears that engage at an angle
between 90° and 180° for more tooth contact and higher
torque capacity. Helical reducers are suitable for higher-
horsepower applications where long-term operational
efficiency is more important than initial cost. Helical gear
teeth engage gradually over the tooth faces for quieter
and smoother operation than spur gearsets. They also tend
to have higher load capacities. One caveat: Angled tooth
contact generates thrust that the machine frame must
resolve.
No matter the subtype, most parallel-axis gearsets
have gear teeth with tailored involute profiles—customized
versions of the rolled trace off a circle with an imaginary
string. Here, mating gears have tangent pitch circles for
smooth rolling engagement that minimizes slipping. A
related value, the pitch point, is where one gear initially
contacts its mate’s pitch point. Involute gearsets also have
an action path that passes through the pitch point tangent
to a base circle.
Besides parallel-axis gearsets, there are non-parallel
and right-angle gearsets. These have input and output
shafts that protrude in different directions to give
engineers more mounting and design options. The gear
teeth of such gearsets are either bevel (straight, spiral or
zerol), worm, hypoid, skew or crossed-axis helical gears.
The most common are bevel gearsets with teeth cut on
an angular or conical shape. Hypoid gears are much like
spiral-bevel gearsets, but the input and output shaft axes
don’t intersect, so it’s easier to integrate supports. In
contrast, zerol gearsets have curved teeth that align with
the shaft to minimize thrust loads.
GEARING &
GENERAL GEAR DESIGN
THE BASICS
Shown here are Spiroid and Helicon brand
gearing. Suitable for right-angle power
transmission in applications with high power
density requirements, these skew-axis gear
forms operate on non-intersecting and
non-parallel axes. Compared to traditional
right-angel bevel and worm gearing, the
gear-centerline offset of Spiroid and Helicon
branded gearing allows for more tooth-surface
contact and results in higher contact ratios.
This boosts torque capacity and smooths
motion transmission. Spiroid brand gears use
advanced software and tooling to make the
proprietary gearing fit specific application
requirements. The gearsets are quiet, stiff, and
compact, delivering ratios from 3:1 to 300:1
and beyond.
Gearing_PTGuide_V4.LE.indd 54 4/29/16 11:34 AM
259 Elm Place, Mineola, NY 11501
Phone: 516.248.3850 | Fax: 516.248.4385
Email: info@khkgears.us
Now available factory direct
GEARS
KHK-USA_9x10.875.indd 1 2/25/16 11:48 PMKHK_3-16_MCTrends.indd 55 4/29/16 1:30 PM
Zerol bevel gearsets are
a special veriation of
straight right-angle
bevel sets.
Worm gearsets are rugged
and don’t let designs backdrive ...
which can eliminate the need for brakes.
... but helical gearsets are
more efficient. Cross-axis
sets are another option.
Spur gearsets are simple ...
Planetary gearsets
are compact and
run to 10,000 rpm.
Here, a lightweight
Schaeffler differential
for a hybrid vehicle has an
axial spline to boost efficiency.
Note there’s some overlap between bevel
and worm applications. Case in point: The
MS-Graessner DynaGear below is a
single-stage bevel gear with a 30:1 ratio.
Common gear options
Pitch circle
Reaction force
56 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
GENERAL SPEED
REDUCERS, SHAFT-MOUNT
SETS, WORM DRIVES
THE BASICS OF GEARING:
GEAR
reducers, also known as speed
reducers, are a component of
many mechanical, electrical, and hydraulic
motors. Essentially it is a gear or series of
gears combined in such a manner as to
alter the torque of a motor. Typically, the
torque increases in direct proportion to the
reduction of rotations per unit of time.
Speed reducers come in two varieties;
base mounted and shaft mounted. Shaft-
mounted types come in two versions. One is
truly shaft mounted in that the input shaft of
the drive motor supports it … with a special
coupling to address torque reactions. The
other mounts to the machine housing so
the input shaft doesn’t support the reducer’s
weight or address torque reactions.
By the American Gear Manufacturers
Association (AGMA) definition, engineers
apply the term “speed reducer” to units
operating at pinion speeds below 3,600 rpm
or pitch-line velocities below 5,000 fpm.
(The AGMA is an international group of gear
manufacturers, gear consultants, academics,
and gear users and suppliers.) Reducers
operating at speeds higher than these are
called high-speed units. Manufacturers
base catalog ratings and engineering
specifications for speed reducers on these
AGMA standards.
There are as many types of speed
reducers as there are gear types. Consider
reducers in which the input and output shafts
are at different angles. The most common of
these are worm-gear reducers.
Worm gear reducers are used in low to
moderate-horsepower applications. They
offer low initial cost, high ratios, and high
output torque in a small package, along
with a higher tolerance for shock loading
then helical gear reducers. In a traditional
setup, a cylindrical toothed worm engages
a disk-shaped wheel gear with teeth on its
circumference or face.
Most worm gears are cylindrical with
teeth of consistent size (for one pitch
diameter for the length). Some worm-gear
reducers use a double-enveloping tooth
geometry, though—with a pitch diameter
that goes from deep into short and back to
deep—so more teeth engage. No matter the
version, most wheel gears in worm-based
reducers sport cupped teeth edges that wrap
around the worm shaft during engagement.
In many cases, the sliding engagement
lowers efficiency but extends life, as worm-
gear mating holds a film of lubricant during
operation. The ratio of a worm-gear ratio is
the number of wheel teeth to the number of
threads (starts or leads) on the worm.
A FEW WORDS ON GEARHEADS
A gearhead is similar to a gear reducer;
however, a gearhead doesn’t just reduce
speed. Engineers use them wherever an
application calls for high torque at low
speed. It reduces a load’s reflected mass
inertia, which makes accelerating heavy
loads easier, enabling designs to run off
smaller motors. Gearheads come in a
variety of styles from basic spur gearheads
to more complex planetary gearheads and
harmonic type gearheads, each with their
own characteristics and suitable applications.
One caveat: In some applications, gearhead
backlash may become an issue. In this case,
consider using a gearhead with low or zero
backlash.
LISA EITEL • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_LISAEITEL
The ratio of a helical or bevel gearset is simply the number of teeth in the larger gear divided by the number of teeth
in the smaller gear. Other gear types such as planetary gears have more complex ratio relationships.
REFERENCE GUIDE
POWER TRANSMISSION
Gearing_PTGuide_V4.LE.indd 56 4/29/16 11:34 AM
Neugart 8-15.indd 57 4/29/16 1:32 PM
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
58 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
SERVO SYSTEMS
are precision-motion setups with
feedback and (in most cases) fairly
stringent accuracy demands. So for
these designs, engineers should pick
servogear reducers with good torsional
stiffness, reliable output torque and
minimal backlash. OEMs tasked with
integrating servo systems should look for
quiet reducers that easily mount to the
motor and require little or (if possible) no
maintenance.
In fact, a lot of advanced machinery
integrates servogears into application-
specific electromechanical arrangements,
and several of these arrangements are
common enough to have specific labels.
Here is a look at some of the most
widespread.
Gearmotor: This complete motion
component is a gear reducer integrated
with an ac or dc electric motor. Usually
the motor includes the gears on its
output (typically in the form of an
assembled gearbox) to reduce speed and
boost available output torque. Engineers
use gearmotors in machines that must
GEARBOXES, SPECIALTY
GEARHEADS & SERVOGEARSETS
THE BASICS OF GEARING:
LISA EITEL • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_LISAEITEL
Interoll conveyors for material
handling use power rollers that
incorporate precision gearing.
move heavy objects. Speed specifications for gearmotors are
normal speed and stall-speed torque.
Gearbox: This is a contained gear train … a mechanical
unit or component consisting of a series of integrated gears.
Planetary gears are common in integrated gearboxes.
Planetary gears: Particularly common in servo systems,
these gearsets consist of one or more outer planet gears that
revolve about a central, or sun, gear. Typically, the planet
gears mount on a movable arm or carrier that rotates relative
to the sun gear. The sets often use an outer ring gear, or
annulus, that meshes with the planet gears.
The gear ratio of a planetary set requires calculation,
because there are several ways they can convert an input
rotation to an output rotation. Typically, one of these three
gear wheels stays stationary; another is an input that provides
power to the system, and the last acts as an output that
receives power from the driving motor. The ratio of input
rotation to output rotation depends on the number of teeth in
each gear and on which component is held stationary.
Planetary gearsets offer several advantages over other
gearsets. These include high power density, the ability to
get large reductions from a small volume, multiple kinematic
combinations, pure torsional reactions and coaxial shafting.
Another advantage to planetary gearbox arrangements is
power-transmission efficiency. Losses are typically less than
3% per stage, so rather than waste energy on mechanical
losses inside the gearbox, these gearboxes transmit a high
proportion of the energy for productive motion output.
Gearing_PTGuide_V4.LE.indd 58 4/29/16 11:35 AM
GEARING
59DESIGN WORLD — MOTIONmotioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com 4 • 2016
Planetary gearbox arrangements distribute load
efficiently, too. Multiple planets share transmitted
load between them, which greatly increases torque
density.
The more planets in the system, the greater
load ability and the higher the torque density.
This arrangement is also very stable due to the
even distribution of mass and increased rotational
stiffness. Disadvantages include high bearing loads,
inaccessibility and design complexity.
In servo systems, besides boosting output
torque, gearboxes impart another benefit—reducing
settling time. Settling time is a problem when motor
inertia is low compared to load inertia … an issue
that’s the source of constant debate (and regular
improvement) in the industry. Gearboxes reduce the
reflected inertia at the controls by a factor equal to
the gear reduction squared.
These are self-lubricating metal-core gears from Intech for
applications with frequent start-and-stop stop cycles and
high torque that need power-transmission components to
resist shock.
DieQua offers more gearboxes
Are You Selecting
The Right Technology?
Whether your application is for precise motion control or
for general power transmission, there are several gear
technologies that can do the job. But which one does it best?
Only DieQua offers the widest range of gearmotors, speed
reducers and servo gearheads along with the experience and
expertise to help you select the optimal solution to satisfy
your needs.
www.diequa.com 630-980-1133
Helical GearmotorsWorm Reducers
Planetary Gearheads ServoWorm Gearheads
Spiral Bevel Gearboxes
Precision Cycloidals
If you are using gearboxes,
you should be talking to DieQua!
For Power Transmission
For Motion Control
half page horizontal ad.indd 1 1/19/16 3:00 PM
Gearing_PTGuide_V4.LE.indd 59 4/29/16 11:35 AM
Flexspline
Circular spline
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
60 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
This is a progression of flex-spline tooth engagement with circular-spline teeth. The profile of Harmonic Drive gear
teeth lets up to 30% of the teeth engage ... for higher stiffness and torque than gearsets with involute teeth.
flexspline so the bearing is at the same axial location as the flexspline teeth.
The flexspline wall near the brim of the cup conforms to the same elliptical
shape of the bearing. This conforms the teeth on the outer surface of the
flexspline to the elliptical shape. That way, the flexspline effectively has an
elliptical gear-pitch diameter on its outer surface.
The circular spline is a rigid circular steel ring with teeth on the inside
diameter. It is usually attached to the housing and does not rotate. Its teeth
mesh with those of the flexspline. The tooth pattern of the flexspline engages
the tooth profile of the circular spline along the major axis of the ellipse.
This engagement is like an ellipse inscribed concentrically within a circle.
Mathematically, an inscribed ellipse contacts a circle at two points. However,
gear teeth have a finite height, so two regions (instead of two points) engage.
The pressure angle of the gear teeth transforms the output torque’s
tangential force into a radial force acting on the wave-generator bearing. The
teeth of the flexspline and circular spline engage near the ellipse’s major axis
and disengage at the ellipse’s minor axis. The flexspline has two less teeth than
the circular spline, so every time the wave generator rotates one revolution,
the flexspline and circular spline shift by two teeth. The gear ratio is:
number of flexspline teeth
÷ (number of flexspline teeth - number of circular spline teeth)
The tooth engagement motion (kinematics) of the strain wave gear is different
than that of planetary or spur gearing. The teeth engage in a manner that lets
up to 30% of the teeth (60 for a 100:1 gear ratio) engage at all times. This
contrasts with maybe six teeth for a planetary gear, and one or two teeth for a
spur gear. In addition, the kinematics enable the gear teeth to engage on both
sides of the tooth flank. Backlash is the difference between the tooth space
and tooth width, and this difference is zero in strain-wave gearing.
As part of the design, the manufacturer preloads the gear teeth of the
flexspline against those of the circular spline at the ellipse’s major axis. The
preload is such that the stresses are well below the material’s endurance limit.
As the gear teeth wear, this elastic radial deformation acts like a stiff spring
to compensate for space between teeth that would otherwise increase in
backlash. This lets the performance remain constant over the life of the gear.
Strain-wave gearing offers high torque-to-weight and torque-to-volume
ratios. Lightweight construction and single-stage gear ratios (to 160:1) let
engineers use the gears in applications requiring minimum weight or volume ...
especially useful for designs with small motors.
Another tooth profile for strain-wave gearing is the S tooth design. This
design lets more gear teeth engage for a doubling of torsional stiffness and
peak torque rating, as well as longer life. The S tooth form doesn’t use the
involute tooth curve of a tooth. Instead, it uses a series of pure convex and
concave circular arcs that match the loci of engagement points dictated by
theoretical and CAD analysis. The increased root filet radius makes the S tooth
much stronger than an involute curve gear tooth. It resists higher bending
(tension) loads while maintaining a safe stress margin.
STRAIN-WAVE
gearing is a special gear design
for speed reduction. It uses the
metal elasticity (deflection) of a
gear to reduce speed. (Strain-
wave gearing sets are also known
as Harmonic Drives, a registered
trademark term of Harmonic Drive
Systems Inc.) Benefits of using
strain-wave gearing include zero
backlash, high torque, compact
size and positional accuracy.
A strain-wave gearset consists
of three components: wave
generator, flexspline and circular
spline. The wave generator is an
assembly of a bearing and steel
disk called a wave generator plug.
The outer surface of the wave
generator plug has an elliptical
shape machined to a precise
specification. A specialty ball
bearing goes around this plug
to conform to the same elliptical
shape of the wave generator plug.
Designers typically use the wave
generator as the input (attached
to a servomotor).
The flexspline— usually
acting as the output—is a thin-
walled steel cup. Its geometry
makes the cup walls radially
compliant but torsionally stiff
(because the cup has a large
diameter). Manufacturers machine
the gear teeth into the outer
surface near the open end of the
cup (near the brim).
The cup has a rigid boss
at one end for mounting. The
wave generator goes inside the
STRAIN-WAVE GEARING
THE BASICS OF GEARING:
LISA EITEL • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_LISAEITEL
Gearing_PTGuide_V4.LE.indd 60 4/29/16 11:36 AM
247 Lynnfield Street, Peabody, MA 01960 • 800.921.3332 • www.HarmonicDrive.net
Harmonic Drive is a registered trademark of Harmonic Drive LLC. Robonaut image courtesy of NASA/JPL-Caltech.
DW Robotics Ad.indd 1 9/15/15 2:04 PM
Harmonic Drives 10-15_Robotic Supp.indd 61 4/29/16 1:33 PM
62 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
Most of the time, design engineers pair gearsets with electric motors. These setups get a roman-nu-
meral service class number (I, II, or III, for example) that equates to the standalone gear-set service
factor (in this case, 1.0, 1.41, or 2.0).
This chart provides values for C-face motor input (flanged) or directly coupled (non-flanged)
motors. It lets the design engineer verify that with 15:1 reduction, a 726 flanged gearbox outputs
116.7 rpm … and when used with a 2 hp motor, outputs 994 in.-lb of torque.
Gearing_PTGuide_V4.LE.indd 62 4/29/16 11:36 AM
CONSULTATION, CUSTOM
GEAR DESIGN & GEAR ANALYSIS
THE BASICS OF GEARING:
CUSTOM
gearboxes are increasingly common, mainly because they’re
easier than ever to manufacture to specification. That’s not to
say that the design work isn’t challenging. However, modern manufacturing lets
some suppliers make gearboxes and components to meet specific application
requirements. New supplier approaches to giving engineering support as well as
new machine tools, automation and design software now let OEMs and end users
get reasonably priced gearing even in modest volumes.
When enlisting help from a consultant or manufacturer, an engineer is more
likely to get gearing that mounts properly and performs to specification after
reviewing the following and answering as many of these questions as possible:
•	 What’s the input speed and horsepower?
•	 What’s the gearbox target output speed or output torque? This partially
defines the required gear ratio.
•	 What are the characteristics of use? How many hours per day will the gearbox
run? Will it need to withstand shock and vibration?
•	 How overhung is the load? Is there internal overhung load? Remember that
bevel gears usually can’t accommodate multiple supports, as their shafts
intersect … so one or more gears often overhang. This load can deflect the
shaft which misaligns the gears, in turn degrading tooth contact and life. One
potential fix here is straddle bearings on each side of the gear.
•	 Does the machine need a shaft or hollow-bore input ... or a shaft or hollow-
bore output?
•	 How will the gearing be oriented? For instance, if specifying a right-angle
worm gearbox, does the machine need the worm over or under the wheel?
Will the shafts protrude from the machine horizontally or vertically?
•	 Does the environment necessitate corrosion-resistant paints or stainless-steel
housing and shafts?
Service factor: The starting point for most gearbox manufacturers is to
define a service factor. This adjusts for such concerns as type of input, hours
of use per day, and any shock or vibration associated with the application. An
application with an irregular shock (a grinding application, for example) needs a
higher service factor than one that’s uniformly loaded. Likewise, a gearbox that
runs intermittently needs a lower factor than one used 24
hours a day.
Class of service: Once the engineer
determines the service factor, the next step is to
define a class of service. A gearbox paired to
LISA EITEL • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_LISAEITEL
Shown here is a MS-Graessner
PowerGearHS, a high-speed bevel
gearbox for dynamic servo drivetrains.
Efficiency reaches 98% and torque
reaches 45 to 360 Nm (with emergency-
stop torques of 90 to 720 Nm)
depending on the version.
GEARING
63DESIGN WORLD — MOTION4 • 2016
Gearing_PTGuide_V4.LE.indd 63 4/29/16 11:37 AM
Trained machinists run this machine shop to let gear
manufacturer NORD Gear Corp. accommodate customer-
specific requirements. The Waunakee, Wis. shop processes 20
to 30 specially designed and machined components each day.
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
64 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
a plain ac motor driving an evenly loaded, constant-speed
conveyor 20 hours per day may have a service class 2, for
example. This information comes from charts from gearbox
manufacturers that list classes of service. To use these
charts, the design engineer must know input horsepower,
application type and target ratio. For instance, suppose that
an application needs a 2-hp motor with a 15:1 ratio. To use
the chart, find the point where 2 hp and 15:1 ratio intersect.
In this case, that indicates a size 726 gearbox. According
to one manufacturer’s product-number system, size 726
defines a gearbox that has a 2.62 center distance. Such
charts also work in reverse, to let engineers confirm the
torque or speed of a given gearbox size.
Overhung load: After the designer picks a size, the
gearbox manufacturer’s catalog or website lists values for
the maximum overhung load
that is permissible for that
sized unit. Tip: If the load in
an application exceeds the
allowed value, increase the
gearbox size to withstand the
overhung load.
Mounting: At this point,
the designer or manufacturer
has defined the gearbox
size and capability. So, the
next step is to pick the
mounting. Common mounting
configurations abound, and
gearbox manufacturers offer
myriad options for each unit
size. A flanged input with
hollow bore for a C-frame
motor combined with an
output shaft projecting to the
left may be the most common
mounting, but there are many
other choices. Options such
as mounting feet for either above or below the body
of the gearbox, hollow outputs, and input and output
configuration are all possible. All gearbox manufacturers
list their mounting options as well as dimensional
information in catalogs and websites.
Lubricant, seals and motor integration: Most
manufacturers can ship gearboxes filled with lubrication.
However, most default to shipping units empty to let users
fill them on site. For applications where there is a vertical
shaft down, some manufacturers recommend a second set
of seals. Because many gearboxes eventually mount to a
C-frame motor, many manufacturers also offer to integrate
motors onto gearboxes and ship assemblies as single units.
Work with consultants and even use custom gear
designs if the application needs a unique motor-gearbox
combination. Some combinations are more efficient.
Getting a pre-engineered geamotor ensures that the
motor-gearbox combination will perform to specification.
Also remember that today’s custom and standard
gearing aren’t mutually exclusive. Where fully custom
gearboxes aren’t feasible (if quantities aren’t high enough,
for example) consider working with manufacturers that sell
gearboxes built to order from modular subcomponents.
Otherwise, look for manufacturers that leverage the latest
CAD and CAM software and machine tools to streamline
post-processing work and reduce the cost of one-offs.
One final tip: Once the gearmotor has been chosen
and installed in the application, perform several test runs
in sample environments that replicate typical operating
scenarios. If the design exhibits unusually high heat, noise
or stress, repeat the gear-selection process or contact the
manufacturer.
KHK USA Inc. manufactures gearing to operate in ratchets and pawls, which is mechanical
gearing that transmits intermittent rotary motion. They only let shafts rotate in one direction.
Gearing_PTGuide_V4.LE.indd 64 4/29/16 11:39 AM
®
visit us at bodine-electric.com | info@bodine-electric.com | 800.726.3463 (USA)visit us at bodine-electric.com | info@bodine-electric.com | 800.726.3463 (USA)
When second-best is just not good enough.
From design to delivery, you can count on us to give you the best gearmotor solution for your
application. When your product demands perfect performance every time, call Bodine.
®
BOD designWorld-swoosh-full page.indd 1 3/21/16 9:58 AM
Bodine_PTGuide4-16.indd 65 4/29/16 1:33 PM
66 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
GEARMOTORS
TECHNICAL REVIEW OF
GEARMOTORS
are a fairly well-established
technology. And recently,
there is renewed interest in gearmotors, following a trend
in integrated systems in general. More specifically, rising
energy costs are driving demand for improved process
efficiencies. This presents an opening for gearmotors that
can be used in a variety of applications and represents a
tremendous opportunity for global
energy savings.
Essentially, a gearmotor is a type of gear reducer
based around an ac or dc electric motor. In fact, in a
gearmotor, the gear and the motors are combined into
one unit. It delivers high torque at low horsepower or
low speed. The speed specifications for these motors are
normal speed and stall-speed torque. These motors use
gears, typically assembled as a gearbox, to reduce speed,
which makes more torque available. Gearmotors are most
often used in applications that need a lot of force to move
heavy objects.
By and large, most industrial gearmotors use ac
motors, typically fixed-speed motors. However, dc motors
can also be used as gearmotors, a lot of which are used in
automotive applications.
Gearmotors have a number of advantages over
other types of motor/gear combinations. Perhaps
most importantly, gearmotors can simplify design and
implementation by eliminating the step of separately
designing and integrating the motors with the gears, thus
reducing engineering costs.
Another benefit of gearmotors, if sized properly, is that
having the right combination
of motor and gearing can
prolong gearmotor life and
allow for optimum power
management and use.
Also, because
gearmotors are integrated
units, they eliminate the
need for couplings and
also eliminate any potential
alignment problems. Such
problems are common
when a separate motor and
gear reducer are connected
together and result in more
MILES BUDIMIR • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_MOTION
engineering time and cost as well as the potential for
misalignment causing bearing failure and ultimately
reduced useful life.
Gear reducers, also known as speed reducers, are a
component of many mechanical, electrical and hydraulic
motors. Essentially, it is a gear or series of gears combined
in such a manner as to alter the torque of a motor. Typically,
the torque increases in direct proportion to the reduction of
rotations per unit of time.
A gearbox, or gear train, is a mechanical unit or
component consisting of a series of integrated gears.
Planetary gears are a common type of integrated gearing
in a gearbox.
Advances in gearmotor technology include the use of
new specialty materials, coatings and bearings, and also
improved gear tooth designs that are optimized for noise
reduction, increase in strength and improved life, all of
which allows for improved performance in smaller packages.
Conceptually, motors and gearboxes can be mixed
and matched as needed to best fit the application, but
in the end, the complete gearmotor is the driving factor.
There are a number of motors and gearbox types that
can be combined; for example, a right angle wormgear,
planetary and parallel shaft gearbox can be combined with
permanent magnet dc, ac induction, or brushless dc motors.
Though there are a number of different motor and
gearbox combinations available, not just any one will work
for a specific application. There will be certain combinations
that will be more efficient and cost-effective than others.
Knowing the application and having accurate ratings for
the motor and gearbox is the foundation for successfully
integrating a gearmotor into a system.
Gearmotors can be simply a motor with a
simple gear attached or as complex as this
unit from Nord Gear incorporating bevel
gears with a 90-degree hollow-shaft output.
An in-line gearmotor design
featuring a helical gearset
from Nord Gear is one common
type of gearmotor.
Gearmotors_PTGuide_V3.indd 66 4/29/16 11:40 AM
YOUR NEEDS.
OUR EXPERTISE.
Groschopp Inc.
420 15th St. NE
Sioux Center, IA 51250
www.groschopp.com
Phone: 712.722.4135
Toll-free: 800.829.4135
Fax: 712.722.1445
Email: sales@groschopp.com © 2016 Groschopp Inc.
Groschopp_PTGuide4-16.indd 67 4/29/16 1:34 PM
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
68 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
LEADSCREWS
BASICS OF
MILES BUDIMIR
SENIOR EDITOR
@DW_MOTION
Anti-backlash leadscrew assemblies,
such as the CMP Series from Haydon
Kerk, use a general purpose self-
compensating nut in a small compact
package. The standard CMP Series
assembly uses a self-lubricating
acetal nut, axially preloaded, on
a 303 stainless steel screw.
LEADSCREWS are one of many linear actuator components that also
include ballscrews as well as belt and pulley systems, linear
motors and belt-drive systems. A leadscrew, also known as a power screw, is a threaded
rod or bar that translates rotational motion into linear motion. Leadscrews generate sliding
rather than rolling friction between a nut and the screw. Consequently, higher friction
means a lower overall efficiency. And efficiency, when talking about leadscrews, is simply
the ability to convert torque to thrust while minimizing mechanical losses.
Leadscrews are a staple of motion designs, driving axes on machines big and small
alike. They usually sport higher ratings than comparable ballscrews thanks to more contact
between the nut and screw load surfaces. Now, innovations in materials and helix geometry
address old issues associated with leadscrew friction, bringing it down to better than 0.10
in some cases—good for fast and dynamic applications. In fact, there’s also been an uptick
in leadscrew use because of proliferating machines for 3D printing, manufacturing and
medical applications.
Leadscrews_PTGuide_V3.indd 68 4/29/16 2:51 PM
LEADSCREWS
69DESIGN WORLD — MOTIONmotioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com 4 • 2016
Smaller leadscrews have been
finding their way into many
applications, from vending
machines to medical equipment.
Miniature leadscrews such as
the MINI Series from Haydon
Kerk, are designed to minimize
backlash with drag torque of
less than 1 oz.-in. and in some
sizes as low as 0.1 oz.-in.
Industries across the board are
adopting new leadscrew components
and linear systems. Designers of kiosks
and automated retail applications, for
instance, are looking for ways to simplify
machines, reduce design weight and
simplify assembly and maintenance. In a
similar way, both additive manufacturing
(3D printing) and traditional subtractive
processes—plasma cutter, laser and
waterjet manufacturing—are driving new
leadscrew uses. The same holds true for
factory automation.
Leadscrew manufacturing processes
can determine the performance and cost of
the leadscrew. For instance, there are three
ways leadscrews can be manufactured; by
machining, rolling, or grinding. Ground
leadscrews are the most expensive and
are generally considered to be the highest
performing as well.
Another determinant of efficiency
is the thread type. Acme threads are the
simplest to produce, the most inexpensive,
but also among the least efficient. Other
types include buttress threads and square
threads, which generally have the least
amount of friction and higher efficiencies.
Leadscrews have a number of advantages including a relatively high
load carrying capacity. They are also compact and simple to design into a
system with a minimal number of parts. The motion is also generally smooth
and quiet and requires little maintenance. Leadscrews also work well in
wash-down environments because the materials used and the lubricant-free
operation allows total immersion in water or other fluids.
On the other hand, leadscrews do not have high efficiencies. Because of
lower efficiency ratings they’re not used in applications requiring continuous
power transmission. There’s also a high degree of friction on the threads
meaning that the threads can wear quickly. Because a leadscrew nut and
screw mate with rubbing surfaces they have relatively higher friction and
stiction compared to mechanical parts that mate with rolling surfaces and
bearings.
There are several parameters that help determine leadscrew
performance. These include thrust, speed, accuracy and repeatability.
The two most important factors in determining the performance of
a leadscrew are the screw pitch and lead. The pitch is the linear distance
between the threads while the lead is the linear distance the nut travels.
Speed is another critical parameter. Leadscrews have a critical velocity,
which is the rotational velocity limit of the screw. Reaching this limit induces
vibrations in the leadscrew.
Accuracy and repeatability are also important factors. The accuracy of a
leadscrew is a measure of how close to a desired end point the assembly can
move a load to within a given tolerance. The accuracy of the leadscrew will
mostly determine the system’s accuracy. On the other hand, repeatability is a
measure of how well a leadscrew assembly can repeatedly move a load to the
same position.
Leadscrews_PTGuide_V3.indd 69 4/29/16 11:44 AM
70 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
70 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
LINEAR-MOTION GUIDES,
RAILS & SYSTEMS
TECHNICAL SUMMARY OF
LINEAR-MOTION
systems are
essential in
all sorts of applications, including everything
from manually operated industrial drawers to
advanced Cartesian robots. Mechanisms that
include the former operate without power,
using inertia or manual power to move loads.
Components to complete the latter include
ready-to-install drive and guidance designs
… in the form of self-contained actuators or
linear-motion machinery subsections. Some
designs simply rely on the rotary-to-linear
mechanism or actuator structure for total load
support. However, most industrial linear designs
have pneumatics, linear motors or motor-
driven, rotary-to-linear mechanisms to advance
attached loads, as well as rails that guide and
support the loads.
Here, linear rails, rotary rails, guide rails,
linear slides and linear ways are just a few
options to facilitate single-axis motion. Their
main function is to support and guide load with
minimal friction along the way. Typical linear-
motion arrangements consist of rails or shafts,
carriages and runner blocks, and some type
of moving element. Engineers differentiate
these systems by the type of surface interaction
(sliding or rolling), the type of contact points,
and (if applicable) how the design’s rolling-
element recirculation works. In fact, slides
and rails are more advanced than ever, with
advances in materials and lubrication setups (to
help designs last longer in harsh applications),
innovative rail geometries (to help designs
withstand more misalignment and load than
ever), and modular guide mounts (to boost
load capacity and minimize deflection).
No matter the ultimate installation, linear-
motion rails, guides, and ways enable motion
along an axis or rail either through sliding or
rolling contact. Myriad moving elements can
produce either sliding or rolling support: ball
bearings, cam roller sliders, dovetail bearings,
linear roller bearings, magnetic bearings, fluid
bearings, X-Y tables, linear stages and machine
slides.
LISA EITEL • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_LISAEITEL
This Schaeffler INA assembly has a linear
recirculating-ball bearing and guideway. Called
the KUVE-B-HS, it has conventional steel rolling
elements for speeds to 10 m/sec. Plastic in the
recirculation mechanism prevents rolling-
element tilting and pulse loads. The guides run
on standard guideways.
Heavy Duty Slides from HepcoMotion work
for long-length transport applications such
as pick-and-place or robot-translation stages.
V slide rails are made from bearing-grade
steel in sections to four meters long. The V
slides typically bolt to aluminum extrusions or
supporting back plates. A guide wheel bearing
with matching V geometry rolls on the V slide
raceway. Image courtesy Bishop-Wisecarver
LinearMotion_PTGuide_V3.indd 70 4/29/16 11:48 AM
Dunkermotoren_PTGuide4-26_LOWRES.indd 71 4/29/16 1:35 PM
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
72 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
One classic rail with sliding contact is
a dovetail slide, and one classic rail with
rolling contact is a ball rail with a recirculating
system. Sliding-contact bearings are the more
straightforward type of linear-motion component.
These consist of a carriage or slide that rides over
a surface known as a rail, way or guide. Sliding
contact occurs when the moving part directly
contacts the rail section. Older versions of these
sliding-contact rails generated considerable friction
during movement, so were only suitable for basic
applications. However, newer versions have self-
lubricating sleeves and other features to boost
positioning accuracy and repeatability.
In contrast, rolling-element linear-motion
systems are either recirculating or non-recirculating.
Non-recirculating types use rolling elements such
as bearing balls, rollers and cam followers for
movement. Recirculating types use some type
of moving platform that houses a bearing block.
This bearing block contains raceways with rolling
elements that let the platform move along the rail
with little friction. Recirculating types include linear
guides and ball-bushing bearings.
More specifically, rolling-element linear guides
come in two basic versions—those with circular arc
grooves and those with Gothic arc grooves. These
groove choices are a result of industry evolution
that’s enabled new geometries for better load
handling. Circular arc grooves contact bearing balls
at two points. The Gothic arch contacts the balls at
four points for bidirectional load capacity.
Another option for rolling-element linear
motion is ball bushings that have a bushing nut
lined with recirculating bearing balls. This nut rides along a
round shaft to allow axial movement. History lesson: In 1946,
the manufacturer Thomson introduced ball bushings, and
the technology established the basic mechanism of rolling-
element linear-motion bearings. In today’s designs, the
bushings may also have integral flanges to support axial loads.
SLIDING-CONTACT RAIL GEOMETRIES
A distinguishing feature of sliding carriage-and-rail setups is
that manufacturers typically incorporate a ground groove in a
rectangular track’s geometry (to serve as a working surface).
Manufacturers typically build these rails in one of three shapes:
•	 Rails with a boxway shape or square shape are simplest.
Square rails excel at carrying large loads without a lot of
deflection. Manufacturers often preload square rails, and
most linear systems based on square rails do not self-
align. Square rails often have a smaller envelope size; the
boxway rails handle the highest loads in all directions.
•	 Rails with a dovetail shape (or twin rail) have male
geometry that securely engages female saddle geometry.
That boosts stability and load capacity, even in unusual
orientations or applications with unsteady loads.
•	 Round rails deflect less under load. In addition, systems
based on round rails are inherently self-aligning, so are
easier to install than the other options.
No matter the type, rails are available in a wide range of sizes
and lengths.
ROLLING-CONTACT FUNCTIONS AND OPTIONS
Rolling-element linear systems need little force to initiate
motion. In addition, friction-force variations due to speed
are minimal, so these systems can position loads with small
and precise steps. The low friction also lets these systems
move at high speeds without generating too much heat. That
minimizes wear to help machinery maintain a level accuracy for
much of the linear system’s operating life.
Manufacturers produce rolling-contact guides in several
variations. The differences are in rolling element shape (ball or
roller); rolling element size; whether the rolling contact is two
or four-point; conformity of ball contact; whether the design
has two, four, six or some other number of rolling-element
rows; contact angle; and how the rolling-element rows are
arranged—in an X or O configuration. All these design factors
determine load capacity, rigidity and friction. For example,
O-shaped arrangements can withstand higher torque than X
arrangements. In general, the number of load-bearing rolling-
element rows influences the load capacity … so more rail rows
means more load capacity and rigidity. However, more rows
makes systems more complex and costly.
This linear plain bearing is PBC Linear Uni-Guide with a Frelon
self-lubricating liner to lower the coefficient of friction, reduce
wear, and boost load capacity.
LinearMotion_PTGuide_V3.indd 72 4/29/16 11:49 AM
IoT Enabled Linear Motion
Smart | Integrated | Networkable
Key Advantages
1. Simplified wiring and panel size reduction
2. Recipe-driven machine configurations
3. Simplified commissions, troubleshooting, and maintenance
Lead Screw
Ball Screw
Belt Drive
PBC LINEAR, A PACIFIC BEARING CO.
1-800-962-8979 | www.pbclinear.com | 6402 Rockton Road, Roscoe, IL 61073 | USA
Full Range
of Transmission
and Bearing
Options
Single- and Multi-Axis
Cartesian Robot Configurations
Watch the IoT Video
at www.pbclinear.com
PBC Linear 3-16.indd 73 4/29/16 1:36 PM
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
74 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
Here are more details on these rolling-contact options:
•	 Rolling elements are either linear rollers or balls.
Because the rolling elements recirculate in recirculating
rolling-element guides, they have a nearly infinite stroke
length. They are available on flat guide ways and guide
way rails. Flat guide ways are available in single or
double row rolling elements. Guide way rails are often
square rails.
•	 Non-recirculating roller type units have limited stroke
length. Flat guide ways are dominant here and have
either a grooved race compatible with crossed rollers,
or non-grooved race, which uses cage and roller-type
rolling elements.
•	 Recirculating elements (ball or roller bearings) between
the rail and the bearing block enable precise linear
motion. The coefficient of friction with roller-element-
based systems is much less than with slide based linear
motion guides … about 1/50th that of non-recirculating
systems.
Ball-type rolling element units are also subdivided into
recirculating and non-recirculating types. The flat guide
ways here typically use double row recirculating rolling
elements. The guide way rail can be either round or square.
If the raceway is not grooved, the rolling element is typically
a linear ball bushing. If the raceway is grooved, the unit
usually uses a ball spline. For square rails, the raceway is
usually grooved. For ball-type rolling element units that are
non-recirculating, the flat guide ways are grooved and use
linear ball guides. The guide ways are round rail, without a
grooved raceway, and use stroke bearings.
QUICK NOTE ON FLUID-FLOATED BEARINGS
Less common types of linear systems include hydrostatic
or aerostatic linear-motion bearings. Because these
systems have no mechanical contact, they are suitable
for applications that need extremely accurate or quiet
operation. Here’s how they work: A pressure regulator
sends pressurized fluid between the rail and carriage.
That lifts the carriage off the guideway by about
0.01 mm or so. Aerostatic versions use air as the
fluid; hydrostatic linear bearings use specially
formulated hydraulic oil. This type of guide
is difficult to manufacture and expensive, but
damps vibrations and allows for moves to
120 m/min and 10 g—useful for
ultra-precision machines.
This Rexroth CKL Compact Module incorporates a linear
motor to deliver high force density with a compact
package … for travel velocities up to 5 m/sec. A ball
rail with central relubrication helps the module deliver
precise positioning and zero backlash.
LINEAR-RAIL LUBRICATION
Some linear-motion systems need periodic
application of lubricant, but many are available
pre-lubricated. In addition, a number of systems use
self-lubricated moving elements, eliminating the
need for lubrication during the useful life. Note that
the rails, ways and guides of linear motion systems
tend to pick up dirt and debris from their application
environment. For this reason, use carriages and slides
with some kind of wiper system to keep the systems
clean.
When selecting linear systems, engineers should
consider space limitations, accuracy needs, stiffness,
travel length, magnitude and direction of loads,
moving speed and acceleration, duty cycle, and the
application’s environment. Note that an excessively
large load or an impact load can permanently deform
the raceway surface whether the linear guideway is
at rest or in motion. Most manufacturers offer tables
on the basic dynamic load rating, which can help
engineers determine the proper load ratings for a
system.
Another caveat about friction: Friction
measurements are carried out on all profiled rail
systems. The friction values are given in tables in the
manufacturers’ respective product catalogs. The level
of friction depends on load, preload and sealing,
taking into account travel speed, lubricant and runner
block temperature. The total friction of a runner block
includes the associated rolling or sliding friction,
lubricant friction, and the friction of any seals.
LinearMotion_PTGuide_V3.indd 74 4/29/16 11:49 AM
LOCKING DEVICES
75DESIGN WORLD — MOTIONmotioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com 4 • 2016
ESSENTIAL INFORMATION FOR
SHAFT COLLARS
& LOCKING DEVICES
LISA EITEL • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_LISAEITEL
IN THE
context of motion and machine design, locking
devices are mechanical connections that attach power-
transmission parts, such as gears, timing-belt pulleys and sprockets, to
drive shafts. Locking devices keep rotary drive components secure and
machines running.
To put locking devices in context, here are common approaches to
mount and lock drive components on shafts.
•	 Keyways are notched geometry in a rotary component’s inner
diameter to mate with notched geometry in the shaft. In many cases,
a key or metal slug plugs into the notches to set the component’s
radial orientation. Though prone to backlash and eventual failure,
this locking method is still common in industrial applications and
some drivetrains in consumer products.
•	 Setscrews mount through the face of a rotary component to tension
via threads through the component and shaft surface. These can
mount rotary components that output unidirectional rotation in
lightweight designs that aren’t subject to any shock.
•	 Shaft collars clamp or screw-set onto shafts to act as mechanical
stops and axially locate components and bearings on shafts. Solid
versions that use setscrews can gouge shafts unless the engineer
specifies flat-machined shaft sections. In contrast, collars with screw-
tightened tapers that clamp onto shafts are more reliable. One
caveat: In applications subject to shock, taper-based collars need an
undercut on the shaft to have a positive stop so they don’t turn free.
Two-piece designs simplify installation.
•	 Taper-locking devices are any components that use a wedge action
from tightening a screw or screws to induce radial locking pressure
at a hub and shaft bore. For example, QD bushings (short for quick
detachable) are split rings with a screw that bridges the flange and
taper opening. Typically (though not always) a few inches in diameter
or smaller, screw tensioning clamps the bushing to the shaft and
replicates a shrink fit.
As a side note, traditional shrink fits are when a mounted component’s
inner diameter comes to an interference fit with the shaft on which it
mounts. The installer heats the component so it expands; when it cools to
room temperature, the ID contracts and locks to the shaft.
This BLC Bearlok Shrink Disc from Whittet-Higgins Co. locks power-transmission components
such as gears, conveyor rolls, sheaves, cam shafts, pulleys and sprockets to keyless shafts more
securely than conventional collars. It’s balanced for high-speed applications and comes in alloy
steel and black-oxide coated versions.
This flange coupling from Ringfeder Power
Transmission is for heavy-duty applications. It has
shrink discs to integrate into machines without
making the installer cool or heat the connections.
LockingDevices_PTGuide_V1.indd 75 4/29/16 4:40 PM
76 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016
LOCKING DEVICE OPERATION AND CAVEATS
For applications of medium torque and above, double-taper
locking devices—more commonly called keyless locking
devices or power locks, friction locks or shaft locks—connect
radial power-transmission components to shafts by interference
fit. These have inner and outer rings held together by bolts
or capscrews. Internal inclined planes make the rings come
together and expand inward (into the shaft) and outward (to
the radial component’s hub-bore inner diameter). That makes a
two-way gripping force to hold components to shafts in a way
that’s rigid and free of backlash.
There are some caveats. Locking devices expand to
accommodate a range of shaft ODs and component-bore IDs,
but design engineers should respect published ranges and
pick a locking device that’s sized to the machine application
(or change the latter to match a standard locking device). In
addition, locking devices only deliver top performance when
they’re installed correctly, with a torque wrench in a diametrical
pattern … just as one lugs a tire to a vehicle. When selecting a
mounting approach in conjunction with a coupling, match it to
the application while remembering that locking devices work
well with couplings in high-speed or reversing applications—
engineered disc couplings, for example. (In contrast, locking
devices are over-engineered for applications of below-average
precision and basic couplings.) In addition, design engineers
should specify a shaft finish that’s not overly smooth—say,
between 40 and 120 Ra—so the locking device can hold fast,
even under maximum load.
These clamp-style shaft collars
are designed and manufactured
by Ruland Manufacturing to have
high holding power. Suitable
for medical equipment, they are
often used to guide, space, stop,
and align. Precise face to bore
perpendicularity is maintained by
having TIR of less than or equal to
0.002”, which is critical when the
collar is used as a load-bearing face
or for aligning gears or bearings.
Shown here are just some of
3,600 standard shaft collars,
couplings, and mounts from Stafford
Manufacturing Corp. for packaging
machinery. Options include Staff-
Lok hinged collars that simplify
opening, closing, and clamping
connections by hand, as well as Grip
& Go handles that convert standard
shaft collars into adjustable locators.
The components come in aluminum,
steel, stainless steel, and plastic in
ODs from 1/4 to 6 in. Options and
finishes abound.
WHITTET-HIGGINS manufactures quality oriented, stocks
abundantly and delivers quickly the best quality and largest array of
adjustable, heavy thrust bearing, and torque load carrying retaining
devices for bearing, power transmission and other industrial assemblies;
and specialized tools for their careful assembly.
Visit our website–whittet-higgins.com–to peruse the many possibilities
to improve your assemblies. Much technical detail delineated as well as
2D and 3D CAD models for engineering assistance. Call your local
or a good distributor.
33 Higginson Avenue, Central Falls, Rhode Island 02863
Telephone: (401) 728-0700 • FAX: (401) 728-0703
E-mail: info@whittet-higgins.com Web: www.whittet-higgins.com
POWER TRANSMISSION
RETAINING DEVICES &
maintenance & assembly tools
W
HITTET-HIGGINS
USA
BEARLOK SHOELOK BEARLOK Shrink Disc
BEARHUG CLAMPNUT TANGENTLOK
PRECISION NUTS & WASHERS ADAPTER SLEEVE ASSEMBLIES
NUTS & WASHERS HARDENED TONGUE WASHERS SPLIT COLLAR
RETHREADING DIES ADJUSTABLE SPANNER WRENCH BEARING ASSEMBLY SOCKET
INCH and METRIC THREADS
LEFT HANDED as well as
RIGHT -HANDED
Materials of:
CARBON, ALLOY and
HARDENED ALLOY
STEELS
Materials of:
ALLUMINUM and
CORROSION RESISTANT
STEEL
LockingDevices_PTGuide_V1.indd 76 4/29/16 11:53 AM
Single Source
Widest range of shaft
collars including over 2,500
standard parts to simplify
the design process and
ensure the collar you need
is available from stock.
carefully Made
Shaft collars are manu-
factured from select
north american bar stock
in our Marlborough, Ma
factory using proprietary
processes developed over
75 years.
SHafT collar Hub
ruland.com is your source
for product specifications,
cad models, technical
articles, installation
videos, live inventory,
and application support.
Find CAD models
for your next design
at www.ruland.com
Over2,500
shaft collarsfor your
DESIGN.
3.21.16_R1_RU_Design World Ad_9x10.875.indd 2 3/21/16 12:16 PMRuland_PTGuide4-16.indd 77 4/29/16 1:43 PM
78 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
LUBRICATION BASICS
REVIEW OF
IN ANY
system with moving parts, no
matter how small or large,
lubrication is essential. It performs a number of
important functions including reducing friction,
dissipating heat, and protecting components from
corrosion and wear.
Lubricants can be classified in a number
of different ways, but usually are identified as
either one of two kinds; oils or greases. Oil-based
lubricants can be made from petroleum sources or
newer synthetic oils. Greases have an oil base to
which various thickening agents are added.
MILES BUDIMIR • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_MOTION
The most important parameters for evaluating lubricants include
operating temperature, load, speed, viscosity, and application rate.
Lubricants are available to accommodate a wide range of application
needs. For instance, there are general-purpose greases that handle lubrication
needs for general industrial uses as well as greases for special requirements
and special applications. For example, there are greases for high temperatures
and for low temperatures, as well as greases for high-load applications. There
are also greases designed to be biodegradable as well as food-grade greases
for use in food and beverage production facilities.
Potential problems with lubrication can include two extremes of either
using too little lubrication or using too much. Using too little lubrication can
increase friction and heat, leading to premature component damage. On the
The MINIRAIL carriage for this SCHNEEBERGER
miniature guideway has a lubricant reservoir
carrying LUBE S lubricant. It uses a capillary effect
to apply tangential lubrication of the circulating
bearings, no matter the installation orientation. So
under normal conditions and appropriate
loads, the reservoir works to 20,000
km of carriage travel.
Lubrication_PTGuide_V2-mb.indd 78 4/29/16 11:58 AM
LUBRICATION
79DESIGN WORLD — MOTIONmotioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com 4 • 2016
other hand, using too much lubrication can
also generate additional heat, which can
cause lubrication to break down thermally,
ultimately leading to more component
damage. Sticking to a maintenance
schedule can help avoid damage due to
improper or inadequate lubrication and
ensure against premature equipment failure.
LUBRICATION FOR MOTION CONTROL
In motion control applications, lubrication
plays a critical role, even though sometimes
it can be an afterthought or taken for
granted. All kinds of components need
lubrication; from ballscrews and leadscrews
to bearings, gears and motors. Lubrication
is used to lubricate bearings in motors,
linear motion components such as
leadscrews and ballscrews as well as rails,
ways and guides.
Because ballscrews are a bearing
system, they’ll need some type of
lubrication to avoid metal-to-metal contact
of the balls in the raceway. While the
lubrication choice can be either oil or
grease, it’s advisable to avoid solid additives
(such as graphite) as they will clog the
recirculation system. An NLGI no. 2 type
grease is recommended but it should also
depend on the application, whether food-
grade or another special type of lubrication
is required. Ballscrews, especially those
used in machine tools, generally require
lubricants with EP additives to prevent
excessive wear. The frequency of lubrication
will vary depending on factors such as the
move cycle characteristics, or contamination
in the environment.
Leadscrew mechanisms using bronze
nuts also need a lubricant, usually a thick
damping grease. Leadscrew assemblies
with plastic nuts can run well without
lubricant due to the internal lubricants
in the nut materials, but the use of a gel
type lubricant will help increase allowable
loading and extend life by reducing friction.
If particulates are present, the screw should
be cleaned before reapplying lubricant.
Scheduled preventative maintenance
should occur when there is no visible film
remaining on the flanks of the screw thread.
Grease should not be used in
environments with significant particulate or
debris that can load the grease and cause
it to become an abrasive slurry. In this type
of application, dry film lubricant should be
used instead. PTFE coating is a dry film
that creates a lubrication barrier between
a metal substrate and a polymer bushing
or lead nut. It is well suited for use with
plastic nuts and stainless-steel leadscrews.
Lubrication maintenance intervals can be
eliminated and the coating does not attract
particulate like a gel lubricant.
There are linear motion systems that
require periodic application of a lubricant,
but most are available pre-lubricated. In
addition, a number of systems use self-
lubricated moving elements, eliminating the
need for lubrication during the useful life.
The rails, ways and guides of linear
motion systems tend to pick up dirt and
debris from their application environment.
For this reason, it’s good to use carriages
and slides with some kind of wiper system
to keep the systems clean.
“LUBRICANTS CAN BE CLASSIFIED IN A NUMBER OF DIFFERENT WAYS,
BUT USUALLY ARE IDENTIFIED AS EITHER ONE OF TWO KINDS; OILS
OR GREASES.“
Lubrication_PTGuide_V2-mb.indd 79 4/29/16 11:58 AM
ClearPath brushless servomotors from Teknic include a DSP-based
vector servodrive, high-resolution encoder, and controller. The
compact motors are low cost to let machine builders replace ac
induction, stepper, dc brush, and other servomotors without
sacrificing performance.
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
80 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
ELECTRIC MOTORS
BASICS OF
AC MOTORS
All electric motors convert electrical energy to mechanical
energy. Motors are typically divided into either ac—
alternating current, or dc—direct current. The main
difference is that ac motors take an input of ac current,
while dc motors use dc current.
For ac motors, speed control is done by varying
the voltage and frequency (along with the number of
magnetic poles) while on dc motors control is achieved by
varying voltage and current.
There is another common way to break down ac
motors that is based on the magnetic
principle that produces rotation. So
there are two fundamental types of
ac motors; induction motors and
synchronous motors.
In induction motors, the key idea is the rotating
magnetic field. The most common source of this in ac
motors is the squirrel cage configuration. This is essentially
two rings, one at each end of the motor, with bars of
aluminum or copper connecting the two ends.
Induction motors have properties that make them
especially well suited to a number of industrial as well
as home appliance applications. For starters, they are
simple and rugged motors that are easy to maintain. They
also run at constant speed across a wide range of load
settings, from zero to full-load. The only drawback is that
induction motors are generally not amenable to speed
control, although the availability of sophisticated variable-
frequency drives means that even induction motors,
usually three-phase induction motors, can now be speed
controlled as well.
The other type of ac motor is a synchronous
motor. Synchronous motors are so named
because they run synchronously with whatever
the frequency of the source is. The motor
speed is fixed and doesn’t change with
changes to the load or voltage. These
motors are primarily used where the
requirement is precise and constant speed.
Most synchronous motors are used in heavy
industrial applications, with horsepower
ratings ranging from the low hundreds up
to thousands of hp.
Synchronous motors can
be used in motion control
applications, but there are
some down sides to using
these motors. Because of
the rotor size, the motor’s
response in incrementing
applications is typically not good.
MILES BUDIMIR • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_MOTION
Motors_PTGuide_V4.indd 80 4/29/16 12:03 PM
Also, because acceleration of inertial loads may not be as high as other
motor types, these motors may operate at irregular speeds and produce
undesirable noise. And generally, synchronous motors are larger and more
costly than other motors with the same horsepower rating.
DC MOTORS
Motors characterized as dc generate a magnetic field via electromagnetic
windings or permanent magnets. According to most common industry
naming conventions, there are three dc motor subtypes: brush motors,
permanent-magnet (PM) motors, and universal motors.
Many larger dc motors still employ brushes and wound fields, but PM
motors dominate fractional and integral-horsepower applications below 18
hp. That being said, PM motors are increasingly common in many designs.
In a brushed dc motor, the magnet acts as the stator. The armature is
integrated onto the rotor and a commutator switches the current flow. The
commutator’s function is to transfer current from a fixed point to the rotating
shaft. Brushed dc motors generate torque straight from the dc power
supplied to the motor by using internal commutation, fixed permanent
magnets, and rotating electromagnets.
Brushless dc (BLDC) motors, on the other hand, do away with
mechanical commutation in favor of electronic commutation, which
eliminates the mechanical wear and tear involved with brushed dc motors.
In BLDC motors, the permanent magnet is housed in the rotor and the coils
are placed in the stator. The coil windings produce a rotating magnetic field
because they’re separated from each other electrically, which enables them
to be turned on and off. The BLDC’s commutator does not bring the current
to the rotor. Instead, the rotor’s permanent magnet field trails the rotating
stator field, producing the rotor field.
STEPPER MOTORS
Stepper motors are one of the most common motors used in motion control
applications. They’re used mostly in positioning applications and have the
advantage of being able to be accurately controlled for the most precise
positioning applications, down to fractions of a degree without the use
of feedback devices such as encoders or resolvers. They are operated in
open-loop (not closed-loop), without the need for tuning parameters as in
closed-loop servo systems.
Steppers are generally classified by the number of allowable steps
they can be commanded to move. For instance, a 1.8 degree step motor
is capable of 200 steps/revolution (1.8 x 200 = 360 degrees, or one full
revolution) in full-step mode. If operated in half-step mode, each step
becomes 0.9 degrees and the motor can then turn 400 steps/revolution.
Another mode called microstepping subdivides the degrees per step even
further, allowing for extremely precise movements.
There are several different stepper motor technologies including
permanent magnet motors, variable reluctance, and hybrid types. The
principle of operation for stepper motors is fairly straightforward. Traditional
variable reluctance stepper motors have a large number of electromagnets
arranged around a central gear-shaped piece of iron. When any individual
electromagnet is energized, the geared iron tooth closest to that
electromagnet will align with it. This makes them slightly offset from the next
electromagnet so when it is turned on and the other switched off, the gear
MOTORS
81DESIGN WORLD — MOTIONmotioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
Motors_PTGuide_V4.indd 81 4/29/16 12:04 PM
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
82 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
moves slightly to realign. This continues
with the energizing and de-energizing of
individual electromagnets, thus creating
the individual steps of motion.
Stepper motors are relatively
inexpensive and can be run open loop,
requiring no feedback devices. Also,
because the speed is proportional to the
frequency of the input pulses, a wide range
of speeds is attainable. However, while
stepper motors are capable of producing
high torque at low speeds, they generally
are well suited for lower power applications
not for applications requiring lots of torque
to move heavier loads. They are best
for applications requiring the control of
rotation angle, speed, and position.
A few drawbacks are that not properly
controlling the motor can produce
undesired resonance in the system. Also,
stepper motors are generally not easy to
operate at extremely high speeds. And
as the motor speed increases, torque
decreases.
A stepper motor’s low-speed torque
varies directly with current. How quickly the
torque falls off at higher speeds depends
on a number of factors such as the winding
inductance and drive circuitry including
the drive voltage. Steppers are generally
sized according to torque curves, which are
typically specified by the manufacturer.
SERVOMOTORS
The hallmark of any servomotor is the
presence of feedback and closed-loop
control. Servomotors provide precise
control of torque, speed or position using
closed-loop feedback. They can also
operate at zero speed while maintaining
enough torque to maintain a load in a
given position.
Servomotors have several distinct
advantages over other types of motors. For
starters, they offer more precise control of
motion. This means they can accommodate
complex motion patterns and profiles more
readily. Also, because the level of precision
offered is high, the position error is greatly
reduced.
The electric motor itself can be either
an ac or a dc motor. Under the dc heading,
brushed dc servomotors are generally less expensive than brushless
servos, but do require more maintenance due to the brushes needed for
motor commutation.
Brushless servomotors are more expensive than brushed dc motors.
Generally, these are used in applications requiring higher torque. Brushless
dc servomotors are highly reliable and virtually maintenance free.
However, the drives for brushless dc servomotors are more complex
because the commutation is done electronically rather than mechanically
as in the brushed dc motor.
Another way to classify servomotors can be as either single-phase or
three-phase motors. Motors of the single-phase variety can range from the
simple and inexpensive brushed dc motors to voice coils for small micro-
and nano-positioning applications.
Servomotors also require a form of feedback, often with the feedback
device, such as an encoder, built right into the motor frame. The feedback
signal is needed by the control circuitry to close the control loop. It is
this closed-loop control that gives servomotors their precise positioning
ability. Lastly, the control circuitry typically involves a motion controller,
which generates the motion profile for the motor, and a motor drive which
supplies power to the motor based on the
commands from the motion controller.
Servomotors are used in many different
industrial applications from machine tools,
packaging machinery, communications
and robotics applications to newer
applications such as solar panel control
and a broad range of automation control
applications. The diversity of applications
means that servomotors are designed for
general-purpose indoor environments but
also for specialized situations requiring
them to withstand extreme temperatures
and pressures outdoors as well as
the special demands of food
processing industries in
washdown environments.
The MCM series of synchronous
servomotors from Lenze are
optimized for a range of
positioning tasks, including
robotics, packaging
equipment and handling
systems. Featuring IP65-rated
protection class housings, the
motors come in power ratings
up to 3.35 hp and torque
ratings to 233.66 in-lb.
Motors_PTGuide_V4.indd 82 4/29/16 12:05 PM
The Only Coupling
To Earn Its Wings
©2016 Baldor Electric Company
The NEW patented Baldor•Dodge®
Raptor takes
coupling innovation to greater heights. Utilizing a
patented winged element design for higher bond
strength and improved fatigue resistance, the Raptor
delivers:
• Longer driven equipment life and increased
reliability
• Easier installation and reduced maintenance
• Drop-in interchangeability
The Raptor is backed by over 50 years of natural
rubber expertise and an industry leading 5-year
warranty. Expect a higher level of reliability with the
new Baldor•Dodge Raptor coupling.
baldor.com 479-646-4711
Raptor’s slotted clamp rings offer more clearance
at the bolt holes for an easier installation than
competitive designs.
Download a QR reader app
and scan this code for
more information.
www.baldor.com/dodgeraptor
Baldor_PTGuide4-16.indd 83 4/29/16 1:43 PM
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
84 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
POSITIONING
STAGES
BASICS OF
MILES BUDIMIR • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_MOTION
Linear stages for extremely fine positioning, such as the
V-52x series from Physik Instrumente, feature a voice coil
linear motor direct drive with 0.1-micrometer resolution.
An integrated optical linear encoder and precision crossed
roller bearings with anti-creep cage assist provide high
positioning resolution and guiding accuracy.
POSITIONING
stages and tables are a part of many
motion systems. Stages or tables, whether
linear or rotary, are complete motion sub-systems themselves. That
is, they’re comprised of components such as linear motion elements,
motors or actuators, encoders, sensors and controllers.
Stages have continued to evolve as their components improve.
Some key developments include better mechanical components and
innovations in feedback and control that are improving metrology,
particularly in high-end stages.
As a result, today’s positioning stages can do many things
including making moves with incredible accuracy, synchronizing
complicated axis commands, and optimizing travel from coarse and
fine drives in tandem, closing the loop on one common position
feedback.
Stages and tables are used in a wide range of high-performance
applications such as industrial robots, fiber optics and photonics,
vision systems, machine tools, semiconductor equipment, medical
component laser machining, micromachining, electronic manufacturing,
and other industrial automation applications.
Stages can provide one of several different types of motion.
They can be linear, rotary, or even lift types (Z-axis positioning stages).
Among these, they can be configured in many different ways including
movement in one direction (or axis) only, in multiple directions (X-Y
positioning), or for extremely small and precise movements, as in
nanopositioning applications where moves are in the micro- or nano
meter range.
PositioningStages_PTGuide_V2-mb.indd 84 4/29/16 12:22 PM
  POSITIONING STAGES
85DESIGN WORLD — MOTION4 • 2016
MATTERS
PERFORMANCE
primatics.com • 541-791-9678
At Primatics, when we tell you that our precision
motion products will perform to specification, you
can be certain they will do just that. And, we have
the data to back it up.
We build high performance motion solutions that
integrate easily and function seamlessly with
complex automated systems.
Our clients experience a high correlation between
the test data we provide and the performance they
are measuring in the field.
When performance matters,
Primatics delivers!
The PXL33B is small form factor linear stage,
optimized for higher accuracy, repeatability, and
nanometer level minimum incremental motion.
The drive mechanisms
for positioning stages
and tables can also vary
significantly, depending on a
number of factors including
cost and desired accuracy.
For instance, stages can be
direct-drive types driven by
linear servomotors or by a
combination of motors and
gearing and couplings, and
can be linear or rotary actuator
driven (either using electric
actuators, or even pneumatic
of hydraulic actuation). Other
methods can include belt and
pulley systems, ballscrews or
leadscrews.
Precision and accuracy
requirements can also dictate
design decisions such as
the components used in
assembling a positioning
stage. One kind of component
used in stages where reliability
and high accuracy are desired
are air bearings. Air bearings
support a load with a thin film
of pressurized air between the
fixed and moving elements.
They are typically referred
to as aerostatic bearings,
because a source of pressure
rather than relative motion
supplies the film of air.
Unlike ordinary bearings,
the surfaces of an air bearing
do not make mechanical
contact, so these systems do
not need to be lubricated.
Because the surfaces do
not wear, the systems don’t
generate particulates, which
makes them suitable for
clean-room applications.
When supplied with clean,
filtered air, the bearings can
operate without failure for
many years.
PositioningStages_PTGuide_V2-mb.indd 85 4/29/16 12:54 PM
86 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
SEALS
REVIEW OF
SEALS
perform a vital
job in any power
transmission system—they keep dirt
and other ingress materials from
entering and damaging critical,
internal components. They also
have the equally important job of
preventing leakage of necessary
lubricants, such as oil, grease or
hydraulic fluid.
Molded seals and v-shaped
seals are two of the most common
seals found in power transmission
applications. V-shaped seals, such
as wipers, are used most commonly
in fluid power systems to prevent
contaminants from entering a
system while allowing lubricating
oils to return to a system on inward
stroke of the hydraulic piston.
Molded seals, which are more
common in power transmission
applications, can be further
divided into O-rings, radial lip
seals and shaft seals. O-rings are
one of the most common types
of seals because of their simple
and inexpensive construction.
They are designed to create a seal
between the interfaces of two or
more components. They generally
consist of an elastomer ring with a
circular cross section and are usually
placed in a groove. They are used
frequently in hydraulic components,
particularly on cylinder pistons and
rotating pump shafts.
Mechanical face seals, or
heavy-duty seals, are used in
extreme applications, such as
bearings, gearboxes, turbines and
machinery that is used in extremely
tough and dirty environments,
such as mining and agriculture.
They feature two metal seal rings
identical in nature that mount
separately on a lapped face seal. A
flexible, elastomer element centers
the metal rings, allowing one half to
rotate while the other remains still.
While many seals are designed
primarily to keep debris from
entering a machine, radial lip seals
are designed to keep lubricants
within a machine that has rotating
or oscillating parts. These seals are
available as one of two types—
spring loaded and non-spring
These all-rubber HSS seals are
specially developed to protect
large size bearings under the
tough operating conditions in
heavy industrial applications
such as metal rolling mills,
mining equipment or wind
turbines. A well-proven sealing
lip design and a new concept
of reinforcement provides high
stability. Image courtesy of SKF
Some seals — such as this Centritec Seal from
the Carlyle Johnson Machine Co. — work even
in vertical shafts for rotating machinery. This
particular design uses centrifugal pressure
and includes a sump to collect lubrication
when equipment stops (so there’s no
weepage). They’re appropriate for conveyors,
gearboxes and heavy equipment.
Image courtesy of Trelleborg Sealing Solutions
MARY GANNON • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_MARYGANNON
Seals_PTGuide_V4.indd 86 4/29/16 12:31 PM
C E N T A P O W E R T R A N S M I S S I O N
L E A D I N G B Y I N N O V AT I O N
2570 Beverly Dr. #128, Aurora, IL 60502 T 630.236.3500
Catalog downloads at www.centa.info • Email inquiries to dw@centacorp.com
The global leader in flexible couplings
for power transmission and motion control.
Trust the innovator-trust CENTA.
Maintenance Free | Lower Bearing Forces
Reduced Total Cost of Ownership
MAKE THE C O N N EC TI O N
precompressed-rubber
in compression
torsionally rigid -
zero backlash
CENTAFLEX-Series XCENTAFLEX-Series BCENTAFLEX-Series A
customizable
curved jaw
SEALS
87DESIGN WORLD — MOTIONmotioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com 4 • 2016
loaded. Each is suited to a particular type of lubricant,
grease or oil. Non-spring loaded seals are suited for
applications that use a highly viscous lubricant and
operate at slower shaft speeds. Spring-loaded seals are
best paired with lubricants with low viscosity and higher
speeds. The spring helps the seal lip maintain its contact
with the shaft even as the seal material itself breaks down.
In addition to keeping contaminants out and fluids in,
rotary and shaft seals have the extra benefit of providing
low friction and resistance to wear, thus extending
component life.
When selecting a seal, fluid or lubricant type,
material compatibility is critical. The four most commonly
used materials for sealing applications are polyurethane
(PU), acrylonitrile-butadiene-rubber (NBR), fluoro rubber
(FKM), and polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE). For example,
PTFE is common in hydraulic systems for its resistance
to high temperatures and corrosive chemicals and fluids.
Nitrile rubber provides wear and aging resistance for
lower temperature applications. FKM is best in higher
temperature applications, or where extremely aggressive
fluids are present.
PTFE is one of the most commonly used materials in O-ring seals,
particularly in hydraulic systems. They offer resistance to high
temperatures and corrosive fluids and chemicals. Image courtesy of
Trelleborg Sealing Solutions
Hackensack, NJ 07601, USA ∙ +1.201.343.8983 ∙ main@masterbond.com
www.masterbond.com
Seals_PTGuide_V4.indd 87 4/29/16 12:31 PM
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
88 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
SHOCK &
VIBRATION
ABSORBERS
THE BASICS OF
MARY GANNON • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_MARYGANNON
MOTION
is present in almost all industrial automation
systems. Stopping or changing the direction
of that motion releases kinetic energy, which can cause shock
and vibration to occur. Any sudden shock in a system can cause
immediate damage to the overall machine and the components
it may be manufacturing or processing. And consistent vibration
inputs can cause damaging fatigue over time. This is why it’s
necessary to decelerate a system smoothly through the use of
shock and vibration attenuation components.
Based on the type of inputs present in the application,
vibration and shock attenuation components can be comprised
of shock absorbers, linear dampers, wire rope or spring
isolators, elastomeric isolators, air springs, or structural damping
treatments. These devices help manufacturers reduce equipment
downtime and costly cycle time limitations.
These products can be used in a broad range of applications,
from the rate control mechanisms that slow the motion of the
overhead luggage bin or seat recline on commercial aircraft,
to the isolators which keep GPS systems from losing signal or
becoming damaged on farm and construction equipment as they
harvest crops or pave roadways.
Most shock absorbers achieve their damping characteristics
through the use of hydraulic fluids. The fluid is pushed by a piston
and rod through small orifice holes to create damping, and this
action compresses some type of gas. This in turn creates a spring
force to return the rod back to its
starting position when the load is
removed.
Besides mechanical devices, elastomer and other
synthetic and rubber pads can also damp vibration
and isolate shock loads. These material blocks,
tubes, bushings and washers dissipate energy in
a variety of applications. Manufacturers usually
tailor the geometry, thickness and durometer
of the material pieces to meet specific design
requirements. Common uses are in lab and testing
equipment, aerospace, foundations for presses,
plants and machines, under cranes, as impact
plates, for pipelines and bridges, and in other
heavy-duty applications.
In some cases, the manufacturer assembles
the material in layers to create strong cushioning
plates that protect machinery subsystems against
impacts and isolate vibration and structure-borne
noise. For example, PAD plates from ACE Controls
withstand compressive loads to 10,000 psi (69 N/
mm2
) depending on plate form and size.
Another custom product called Sorbothane
(from a company with the same name) is a
thermoset that attenuates shock with near-faultless
memory. That means its deformation is elastic and
not plastic, so pads of the material reliably return to
their original shape. Custom pieces of the material
work for vibration damping, acoustic damping and
isolation. Sorbothane works by turning mechanical
energy into heat as the material is deformed.
Molecular friction generates heat energy that
translates perpendicularly away from the axis of
incidence.
Designed to meet specific requirements
such as load, area, and natural frequency, many
of these padding materials come in soft, rubber-
like consistencies that are forgiving in most
environments.
Predicting the natural frequency of an
application lets material manufacturers target
known disturbance frequencies to dissipate energy.
The lower the ratio of natural system frequency to
disturbance frequency, the more it’s possible to
isolate problem vibrations.
SLABS OF MATERIAL
ALSO DAMP VIBRATION
RIGHT: Material pads such as these custom Sorbothane components
can isolate vibrations. The manufacturer designs and manufactures
them in a variety of shapes, sizes and durometers. Each part is
specific to the design and function requirements of end products
and set client parameters.
TOP: SLAB damping pads from ACE Controls are made of a
viscoelastic PUR and adapt to myriad applications. A calculating
tool helps users configure pieces with product engineers.
Shocks_PTGuide_V3.indd 88 4/29/16 12:51 PM
ITT_4-16.indd 89 4/29/16 1:44 PM
90 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
Shock absorbers and dampers are generally made of high-
strength steel to handle the pressures from the internal hydraulic
forces. Elastomeric seals prevent the fluid from leaking out of the
cylinder, and special plating and coatings keep the units protected
from harsh operating environments.
Recent and ongoing developments in sealing technologies
and in the internal designs of shock absorbers and dampers
have allowed for longer service life and more compact designs.
Ongoing research in the field of noise attenuation (high frequency,
low amplitude vibration) has led to an increased effectiveness in
noise reduction technologies.
A unique application for these types of hydraulic damping
devices has come with the increased awareness for seismic
and environmental protection of our infrastructure (buildings
and bridges, for example). By adding damping to these critical
structures, energy is absorbed by the hydraulic devices instead of
damaging the structure.
Vibration isolation products rely generally on mechanical
designs to achieve their isolation characteristics. A spring function
provides support for the mounted equipment, while decoupling
it from the vibration source. Friction and elastomeric material
properties give the isolators their damping characteristics.
Isolators can be made from a variety of materials. Wire rope
and spring isolators can be made from carbon steel, stainless
steel or aluminum. Elastomeric isolators generally have metallic
Industrial shock absorbers are available in a
variety of sizes and styles to help prevent the
sudden release of kinetic energy in a system,
reducing potential and catastrophic machine
damage. Photo courtesy ACE Controls
Deceleration & Vibration
Technology:
Expect more
than Automation
Control!
Motion Control
Custom control
of hand forces
Safety
Products
Protection
for all
machine
designs under
any condition
Vibration Control
Isolate unwanted
vibrations
Automation
Control
Optimum tuning
for any design
More Info?
Tel. 800-521-3320
Email: shocks@acecontrols.com
Download a CAD file or our product
sizing software at: www.acecontrols.com
by ACE
Shocks_PTGuide_V3.indd 90 4/29/16 12:52 PM
SHOCK & VIBRATION ABSORBERS
91DESIGN WORLD — MOTIONmotioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com 4 • 2016
Wire rope isolators reduce system vibration,
which can cause damaging fatigue over time.
Photo courtesy ITT Enidine
components that function as
mounting brackets, separated
by an elastomeric material
that provides the stiffness and
damping desired. Common
elastomeric compounds
include natural rubber,
neoprene and silicone;
however, a vast selection of
compounds and compound
blends can be used to achieve
different characteristics
specific to the application.
Air springs are comprised
of metallic end fittings
coupled by a composite
elastomeric-based bladder
that contains the compressed
air used to provide isolation.
These single-acting designs
are comprised of a pressurized
bladder and two end plates.
As air is directed into the air
bladders, they are expanded
linearly.
All of these reusable designs are self-
contained, offering a number of advantages
over any other technology that may
require outside componentry. For example,
hydraulic systems may require plumbing
while electrical systems may require wiring
and power.
Energy or power dissipation
is key when selecting a damper or
shock-absorbing device. The size and
characteristics of the device are based
on these inputs, so it is generally the first
consideration to make.
Dynamic spring rate and damping
are the two biggest considerations when
selecting an isolator. These characteristics
will define the natural frequency (sometimes
referred to as resonant frequency) of the
isolation system and are important in
achieving the desired performance.
Shocks_PTGuide_V3.indd 91 4/29/16 12:55 PM
PowerTransmission
REFERENCEGUIDE
92 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com
ACE Controls Inc. ..................................................... 90
All Motion ................................................................. 81
Altra Industrial Motion Corp. .................................... 53
AMETEK PMC ............................................................ 1
AMETEK/DFS (Windjammer) .................................... 21
AutomationDirect ....................................................... 9
Baldor Electric ....................................................83, BC
BellowsTech. LLC ...................................................... 43
Bison Gear & Engineering Corp. .............................IBC
Bodine Electric Company ......................................... 65
Carlyle Johnson ........................................................ 22
Centa Corporation ................................................... 87
CGI, Inc. ............................................................. 12, 13
Custom Machine and Tool Co. Inc. .......................... 29
DIEQUA Corporation ............................................... 59
Dunkermotoren, part of AMETEK ............................ 71
GAM Gear ................................................................ 47
Groschopp. Inc ......................................................... 67
Harmonic Drive ......................................................... 61
Haydon/Kerk .............................................................. 3
igus, inc. ............................................................. 24, 25
Intech ........................................................................ 63
ITT Enidine ............................................................... 89
KHK USA Inc. ............................................................ 55
Kuebler Inc. .............................................................. 45
Martin Sprocket ........................................................ 36
Master Bond ............................................................. 87
Neugart USA Corp. .................................................. 57
NSK Precision ........................................................... 17
PBC Linear ................................................................ 73
PITTMAN .................................................................... 7
Primatics, Inc. ........................................................... 85
Promess Inc. ............................................................... 2
Power Transmission Distributors Association ........... 49
R+W America ........................................................... 48
Rotor Clip Company, Inc. ......................................... 39
Ruland Manufacturing .............................................. 77
SAB North America .................................................. 33
Serapid Inc. .............................................................. 19
Servometer ............................................................... 43
SEW Eurodrive .......................................................... 51
Teledyne LeCroy ......................................................... 5
THK America, Inc. ....................................................IFC
Whittet-Higgins Co. .................................................. 76
Zero-Max, Inc. ........................................................... 23
LEADERSHIP TEAM
Publisher
Mike Emich
memich@wtwhmedia.com
508.446.1823
@wtwh_memich
Managing Director
Scott McCafferty
smccafferty@wtwhmedia.com
310.279.3844
@SMMcCafferty
EVP
Marshall Matheson
mmatheson@wtwhmedia.com
805.895.3609
@mmatheson
Followthewholeteamontwitter@DesignWorld
CONNECT
WITHUS!
Michelle Flando
mflando@wtwhmedia.com
440.670.4772
@mflando
Mike Francesconi
mfrancesconi@wtwhmedia.com
630.488.9029
David Geltman
dgeltman@wtwhmedia.com
516.510.6514
@wtwh_david
Neel Gleason
ngleason@wtwhmedia.com
312.882.9867
@wtwh_ngleason
Tom Lazar
tlazar@wtwhmedia.com
408.701.7944
@wtwh_Tom
Jim Powers
jpowers@wtwhmedia.com
312.925.7793
@jpowers_media
Courtney Seel
cseel@wtwhmedia.com
440.523.1685
@wtwh_CSeel
SALES
Mike Caruso
mcaruso@wtwhmedia.com
469.855.7344
Todd Christenson
tchristenson@wtwhmedia.com
440.381.9048
@wtwh_todd
Jessica East
jeast@wtwhmedia.com
330-319-1253
@wtwh_MsMedia
Michael Ference
mference@wtwhmedia.com
408.769.1188
@mrference
Ad Index
DESIGN WORLD does not pass judgment on subjects of controversy nor enter into dispute with or between any individuals or organizations. DESIGN WORLD is also an independent forum for the expression
of opinions relevant to industry issues. Letters to the editor and by-lined articles express the views of the author and not necessarily of the publisher or the publication. Every effort is made to provide accurate
information; however, publisher assumes no responsibility for accuracy of submitted advertising and editorial information.
Non-commissioned articles and news releases cannot be acknowledged. Unsolicited materials cannot be returned nor will this organization assume responsibility for their care.
DESIGN WORLD does not endorse any products, programs or services of advertisers or editorial contributors. Copyright© 2016 by WTWH Media, LLC. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form or
by any means, electronic or mechanical, or by recording, or by any information storage or retrieval system, without written permission from the publisher.
Subscription Rates: Free and controlled circulation to qualified subscribers. Non-qualified persons may subscribe at the following rates: U.S. and possessions: 1 year: $125; 2 years: $200; 3 years: $275; Canadian
and foreign, 1 year: $195; only US funds are accepted. Single copies $15 each. Subscriptions are prepaid, and check or money orders only.
Subscriber Services: To order a subscription or change your address, please email: designworld@halldata.com, or
visit our web site at www.designworldonline.com
POSTMASTER: Send address changes to: Design World, 6555 Carnegie Ave., Suite 300, Cleveland, OH 44103
WTWH Media, LLC
6555 Carnegie Ave., Suite 300
Cleveland, OH 44103
Ph: 888.543.2447
FAX: 888.543.2447
Index_PTGuide_V1.indd 92 5/2/16 9:34 AM
We make your products go.™
THE BEST JUST GOT BETTER...
To learn more about PowerSTAR® right-angle gearmotors, please visit Bison’s
NEW WEBSITE at www.bisongear.com or call 1-800-AT-BISON.
©2014 Bison Gear and Engineering Corp.
AC and DC options available now
1/15 - 1/2 HP; 35-1780 in-lbs
• AC MOTOR OPTIONS:
115V 1PH, 115/230V 1PH
230V 3PH Inverter Duty, 230/400-460 50/60HZ 3PH
• DC MOTOR OPTIONS
720 frame size: 12V, 24V, 90V, 130V and 180V
725 frame size: 12V, 24V, 90V, 130V and 180V
730 frame size: 24V, 90V and 130V
• Maximum power density means a compact profile without compromising
performance
• Ground gearing provides whisper quiet operation, low backlash precision
• Latest hypoid gear technology ensures less friction/heat and extends product life
• Versatile mounting interchangeability to easily upgrade your installed drives
• Exclusive PowerSTAR® EP lubricant for extended life
Runs Cooler & Longer Lasting than
Traditional Right Angle Gearmotors
DC
AC
Bison Gear 7-15.indd 1 4/29/16 1:45 PM
The Only Coupling
To Earn Its Wings
©2016 Baldor Electric Company
The NEW patented Baldor•Dodge®
Raptor takes
coupling innovation to greater heights. Utilizing a
patented winged element design for higher bond
strength and improved fatigue resistance, the Raptor
delivers:
• Longer driven equipment life and increased
reliability
• Easier installation and reduced maintenance
• Drop-in interchangeability
The Raptor is backed by over 50 years of natural
rubber expertise and an industry leading 5-year
warranty. Expect a higher level of reliability with the
new Baldor•Dodge Raptor coupling.
baldor.com 479-646-4711
Raptor’s slotted clamp rings offer more clearance
at the bolt holes for an easier installation than
competitive designs.
Download a QR reader app
and scan this code for
more information.
www.baldor.com/dodgeraptor
Baldor_PTGuide4-16.indd 83 4/29/16 1:46 PM

Pt guide 4 16

  • 1.
  • 2.
    Our wide rangeof products gives you maximum design freedom. As the leader in linear motion, THK is dedicated to developing not just the best choices, but also the most choices in linear motion solutions. Our virtually limitless range of products includes linear motion guides, ball screws, actuators, specialty products and more - many featuring our patented Caged Technology. To learn more, give us a call at 1-800-763-5459 or visit www.thk.com. 84014203 THKProdLineAd(DW)_840-06205 GN-N Ad(MSD) 12/23/14 2:35 PM Page 1 THK_PTGuide4-16.indd 1 4/29/16 9:53 AM
  • 3.
    Whatever keeps youup at night, we’ve got a solution—the largest selection of motors, pumps and air-moving devices available. Plus, one-of-a-kind solutions ready to be custom-engineered for your precision industrial, commercial, combustion or transportation application. If you can dream it, you’ll find it at Solution City. FOR MOTION CONTROL INNOVATION, SOLUTION CITY NEVER SLEEPS. © 2015 by AMETEK Inc. All rights reserved. 100 East Erie Street Kent, OH 44240 ametekdfs.com AMETEKPMC 18611_City Never Sleeps Ad_9x10.875.indd 1 7/29/15 9:14 AMAMETEK PMC (Solutions City) 8-15 (NEW).indd 1 4/29/16 9:56 AM
  • 4.
    promessinc.com 810-229-9334 Providing solutions tothe industry since 1984 “Cloning the Perfect Part” WHY?WHY? Still putting science projects on your floor? Still putting science projects on your floor? Promess provides you with a COMPLETE system to help make YOUR life easier. Don’t guess what you need, let Promess help you. Call us today to set up a visit to our Process Development Center EMAP REMAP TorquePRO Promess_PTGuide4-16.indd 2 4/29/16 9:58 AM
  • 5.
    HaydonKerk LinearActuators... 1500 MeridenRoad Waterbury,CT 06705 U.S.A. Telephone: 203 756 7441 SOLUTIONSINMOTION ® Haydon Kerk Motion Solutions hybrid and can-stack linear actuators continue to offer equipment designers new motion control solutions that provide unmatched performance-to-size ratios, patented technologies and thousands of configuration options, and a vast experience in customized solutions. HYBRID actuators are available in six sizes from Size 8: 21 mm2 (0.8 -in.) to Size 34: 87 mm2 (3.4-in.) – capable of delivering up to 500 pounds (2224 N) of force. Travels per step range from .001524 mm (.00006-in) to .127 mm (.005-in), with micro stepping capability for even finer resolution. An integrated, programmable IDEA™ Drive is also available for Size 17 hybrids. The G4 Series represents the industry’s most robust and most powerful CAN-STACK linear actuators. The G4 Series offers diameters of 20 mm (.79-in), 26 mm (1-in), and 36 mm (1.4-in). The can-stack product line also includes motors with diameters of 15 mm (0.59-in), 20 mm (.79-in) , 26 mm (1-in), 36 mm (1.4-in) and Ø 46 mm (1.8-in), available with captive, non-captive or external linear lead-screws. Haydon Kerk Motion Solutions continues to be an innovative motion control technology company with a global network of people, facilities and services dedicated to engineering and manufacturing the world’s most advanced linear motion solutions. For more information: www.HaydonKerk.com > Linear Actuators Size 17 - 43 mm2 (1.7-in)2 non-captive hybrid linear actuator with programmable IDEA™ stepper motor drive High performance, precision linear motion technology 25000 Series G4, can-stack captive, non-captive, external linear actuator steppers 25 mm (1.0-in) diameter Size 8 - 21 mm2 (0.8-in)2 captive hybrid linear actuator stepper motor. Also available in Single and Double Stack, non-captive and external linear. Size 34 - 87 mm2 (3.4-in)2 captive hybrid linear actuator stepper motor. Non-captive and external linear also available. Size 17 - 43 mm2 (1.7-in)2 Double Stack - external, non-captive, captive hybrid linear actuator stepper motors Call 1 8OO 243 2715 www.HaydonKerk.com Haydon Kerk 4-16.indd 3 4/29/16 9:59 AM
  • 6.
    4 DESIGN WORLD 4 • 2016 www.designworldonline.com PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE MOTION designs continually evolve, but will always rely on mechanical devices, particularly where the drive of an electric motor engages a load to execute machine tasks. In fact, as the technical reviews in this 2016 Power Transmission Reference Guide explain, applications for mechanical motion components only proliferate as technical innovations make them increasingly effective. Consider this Reference Guide’s section on bearings by Associate Editor Mike Santora. The most common bearing applications are in heavy machinery and industrial setups as always, but renewable- energy use is spurring innovations to get higher capacities as turbines push the limits of bearing designs. There’s also increased demand for complete system solutions over components, which is changing the POWER-TRANSMISSION COMPONENTS ARE MAINSTAYS POWER-TRANSMISSION COMPONENTS ARE MAINSTAYS design of linear systems, actuators and gearmotors, as well as subsystems such as conveyors and robotics. Consider the section on gearmotors in this Reference Guide by Senior Editor Miles Budimir. Here, manufacturers are predesigning and assembling more motors than ever with gearboxes upfront, for an ever-expanding array of ac gearmotors and servo gearmotors. Such gearmotors are increasingly accurate as well, particularly those sporting planetary gearsets. That’s thanks in part to how manufacturers are making gearing with the latest approaches in design, machining and assembly. Check out the sections in this Reference Guide covering gear-design consultation, custom gear designs and analysis, as well as general speed reducers, worm gearing, and shaft-mount sets. These articles detail common and custom offerings that optimize inertia matching and speed output. In fact, today’s software now lets designers get design-specific gearing—and other power- transmission components—at lower cost than that of general-purpose offerings from just a decade ago. In fact, today’s moving designs rely on an increasingly diverse array of mechanical components to protect expensive subsystems and change motion-system dynamics to simplify programming. These actuators, ballscrews, bearings, brakes, chains, collars, couplings, gearing, rails and rack-and-pinion sets transmit power in ways that get higher performance than ever. LISA EITEL SENIOR EDITOR @DW_LISAEITEL DW half p Editorial_PTGuide_V3.LE.MD.indd 4 4/29/16 10:20 AM
  • 7.
    WWW.MOTIONCONTROLTIPS.COM WEBINAR ALERT DOWNLOAD ONDEMAND: TRENDS TO WATCH IN MOTION CONTROL bit.ly/1Lxaexl So use this Reference Guide as a review of basic component functions or as an update on what’s new in power-transmission designs—and to get instructions on how to make the most of proliferating features to meet evolving motion-system requirements. As mechanical designs change, count on us Design World editors to bring you technology updates to help you specify and integrate the right components. We invite your feedback and requests for technical information. There are innumerable ways to reach us: Email me at leitel@wtwhmedia.com or tweet to @DW_LisaEitel, @Linear_Motion and @Motion_Control. Connect with our Design World Network Facebook page at facebook.com/DesignWorldNetwork, and let us know what designs you’re using or are looking to apply. Also look out for the 2016 Motion Systems Handbook and 2016 Motion Casebook coming to you in August and November for complete coverage of electronic and programming technologies for motion designs, as well as real-world application examples and illustrations to inform your next build. In the mean time, also find all our motion-technology news announcements (as well as technical archives) on our motion tips sites—motioncontroltips. com, linearmotiontips.com, sensortips.com, bearingtips.com and couplingtips.com. Get a Free Power Basics Poster teledynelecroy.com/motor-drive-analyzer | teledynelecroy.com/contactus © 2015 Teledyne LeCroy, Inc. All rights reserved. Line Voltage, Current, and Power – The Basics THREE-PHASE LINE VOLTAGE Single-phase line voltage consists of one voltage vector with: • Magnitude (voltage) • Angle (phase) Typically, the single-phase is referred to as “Line” voltage, and is referenced to neutral. Neutral Line The single-phase voltage vector rotates at a given frequency • Typically, 50 or 60 Hz for utility-supplied voltage At any given moment in time, the voltage magnitude is V * sin(α) • V = magnitude of voltage vector • α = angle of rotation, in radians The resulting time-varying “rotating” voltage vector appears as a sinusoidal waveform with a fixed frequency • 50 Hz in Europe • 60 Hz in US • Either 50 or 60 Hz in Asia • Other frequencies are sometimes used in non-utility supplied power, e.g. • 400 Hz • 25 Hz SINGLE-PHASE Three-phase line voltage consists of three voltage vectors. • By definition, the system is “balanced” • Vectors are separated by 120° • Vectors are of equal magnitude • Sum of all three voltages = 0 V at Neutral Typically, the three phases are referred to as A, B, and C, but other conventions are also used: • 1, 2, and 3 • L1, L2, and L3 • R, S, and T The three voltage vectors rotate at a given frequency • Typically, 50 or 60 Hz for utility-supplied voltage The resulting time-varying “rotating” voltage vectors appear as three sinusoidal waveforms • Separated by 120° • Of equal peak amplitude Voltage value = VX*sin(α) • VX = magnitude of phase voltage vector • α = angle of rotation, in radians VA-B VA-N 120° VA VB VC Neutral A B C ω (rad/s) or freq (Hz) 120° 120° 120° Neutral Neutral Line ω (rad/s) or freq (Hz) 200 Time AC Single-Phase “Utility” Voltage 120VAC Volts(Peak),Line-Neutral 150 100 50 0 -50 -100 -150 -200 120 VAC Example 800 Time AC Three-Phase “Utility” Voltage 480VAC , Measured Line-Line Volts(Peak),Line-Line 600 400 200 A-B Voltage B-C Voltage C-A Voltage 0 -200 -400 -600 -800 480 VAC Example 800 Time AC Three-Phase “Utility” Voltage 480VAC , Measured Line-Neutral Volts(Peak),Line-Neutral 600 400 200 A-N Voltage B-N Voltage C-N Voltage Three-phase Rectified DC 0 -200 -400 -600 -800 480 VAC Example Line-Line Voltage Measurements Line-Neutral Voltage Measurements Important to Know • Voltage is stated as “VAC”, but this is really VRMS • Rated Voltage is Line-Neutral • VPEAK = 2 * VAC (or 2 * VRMS ) • 169.7 V in the example below • VPK-PK = 2 * VPEAK • If rectified and filtered • VDC = 2 * VAC = VPEAK Voltages can be measured two ways: • Line-Line (L-L) • Also referred to as Phase-Phase • e.g. from VA to VB, or VA-B • Line-Neutral (L-N) • Neutral must be present and accessible • e.g. from VA to Neutral, or VA-N • VL-L conversion to VL-N • Magnitude: VL-N * 3 = VL-L • Phase: VL-N - 30° = VL-L Important to Know • Voltage is stated as “VAC”, but this is really VRMS • Rated Three-phase voltage is always Line-Line (VL-L) • Line-Line is A-B (VA-B), B-C (VB-C), and C-A (VC-A) • Line-Line is sometimes referred to as Phase-Phase • VPEAK(L-L) = 2 * VL-L • 679 V in the example to the right • VPK-PK(L-L) = 2 * VPEAK(L-L) If a neutral wire is present, three-phase voltages may also be measured Line-Neutral • VL-N = VL-L/ 3 • 277 VAC (VRMS) in this example • VPEAK = 2 * VL-N • 392 V in the example to the right • VPK-PK = 2 * VPEAK If all three phases are rectified and filtered • VDC = 2 * VL-N * 3 = VPEAK * 3 = 679 V in the example to the right LINE CURRENT Like voltage, the single-phase current vector rotates at a given frequency • Typically, 50 or 60 Hz At any given moment in time, the current magnitude is I*sin(α) • I = magnitude of current vector • α = angle of rotation, in radians The resulting time-varying “rotating” current vector appears as a sinusoidal waveform Like voltage, the resulting time-varying “rotating” current vectors appear as three sinusoidal waveforms • Separated by 120° • Of equal peak amplitude for a balanced load Current value = IX*sin(α) • IX = magnitude of line current vector • α = angle of rotation, in radians Neutral Line freq (Hz) By definition, the system is “balanced” • Vectors are separated by 120˚ • Vectors are of equal magnitude • Sum of all three currents = O A at neutral (provided there is no leakage of current to ground) Like voltage, three-phase current has three different line current vectors that rotate at a given frequency • Typically, 50 or 60 Hz for utility-supplied voltage SINGLE-PHASE THREE-PHASE A B C ω (rad/s) or freq (Hz) 120° 120° 120° Neutral Line Current Measurements 10 ARMS Example Important to Know • Current is stated as “lAC”, but this is really IRMS • Line currents can represent either current through a coil, or current into a terminal (see image below) depending on the three-phase winding connection • IPEAK = 2 * IRMS • 14.14A for a 10 ARMS current in the example to the right • IPK-PK = 2 * IPEAK -15 -12 -9 -6 -3 0 3 6 9 12 15 LineCurrent(Peak) Time AC Three-Phase "Line" Currents A Current B Current C Current IC IA IB A B C N A B C IC IA IB LINE POWER SINGLE-PHASE Electric Power • “The rate at which energy is transferred to a circuit” • Units = Watts (one Joule/second) For purely resistive loads • P = I2R = V2/R = V * I • The current vector and voltage vector are in perfect phase I Inductive load V P ≠ V * I φ N I Capacitive load P ≠ V * I V φ N Real Power ImaginaryPower S P Q φ φ φ φ QB QC QA SB SA SC PB PA PC Phase Angle (φ) • Indicates the angular difference between the current and voltage vectors • Degrees: - 90° to +90° • Or radians: -π/2 to + π/2 For capacitive and inductive loads • P ≠ V * I since voltage and current are not in phase • For inductive loads • The current vector “lags” the voltage vector angle φ • Purely inductive load has angle φ = 90° • Capacitive Loads • The current vector “leads” the voltage vector by angle φ • Purely capacitive load has angle φ = 90° THREE-PHASE For purely resistive loads • PA = VA-N * IA • PB = VB-N * IB • PC = VC-N * IC • PTOTAL = PA + PB + PC As with the single-phase case, Power is not the simple multiplication of voltage and current magnitudes, and subsequent summation for all three phases. Apparent Power for each Phase • |S|, in Volt-Amperes, or VA • = VRMS * IRMS for a given power cycle Real Power for each Phase • P, in Watts • = instantaneous V * I for a given power cycle Voltage is measured L-L • Neutral point may not be accessible, or • L-L voltage sensing may be preferred Current is measured L-N L-L voltages must be transformed to L-N reference: Calculations are straightforward, as described above: • PTOTAL= PA + PB + PC • STOTAL = SA + SB + SC • QTOTAL = QA + QB + QC Voltage is measured L-L on two phases • Note that the both voltages are measured with reference to C phase Current is measured on two phases • The two that flow into the C phase Mathematical assumptions: • Σ(IA + IB + IC) = 0 • Σ(VA-B + VB-C + VC-A) = 0 This is a widely used and valid method for a balanced three-phase system VB-C VA-C IA IB A B C N A B C VB-C VA-C IA IB Single-phase, Non-resistive Loads Phase Angle Single-phase Real, Apparent and Reactive Power Three-phase, Resistive Loads Three-phase, Non-resistive Loads Two Wattmeter Method – 2 Voltages, 2 Currents with Wye (Y or Star) or Delta (∆) Winding VB-N VA-N VC-N IC IA IB A B C N VA-B VB-C VC-A IC IA IB A B C N Power Factor (PF, or λ) • cos(φ) for purely sinusoidal waveforms • Unitless, 0 to 1, • 1 = V and I in phase, purely resistive load • 0 = 90° out of phase, purely capacitive or purely inductive load • Not typically “signed” – current either leads (capacitive load) or lags (inductive load) the voltage Voltage Current Note: Any distortion present on the Line voltage and current waveforms will result in power measurement errors if real power (P) is calculated as |S|*cos(φ). To avoid measurement errors, a digital sampling technique for power calculations should be used, and this technique is also valid for pure sinusoidal waveforms. Resistive load V P=V * I N I Power Factor Line-Line Voltage Sensing Case VB-N VA-N PTOTAL = VA-N * IA + VB-N * IB + VC-N * IC VC-N IB IA IC N φ VB-N VA-N PTOTAL ≠ VA-N *IA + VB-N * IB + VC-N * IC VC-N IB IAIC N Three-phase, Any Load Apparent Power • |S|, in Volt-Amperes, or VA • = VRMS * IRMS for a given power cycle Real Power • P, in Watts • = instantaneous V * I for a given power cycle Reactive Power • Q, in Volt-Amperes reactive, or VAr • Q = S2 - P2 • Does not “transfer” to load during a power cycle, just “moves around” in the circuit Reactive Power for each Phase • Q, in Volt-Amperes reactive, or VAr • Q = S2 - P2 • PTOTAL = PA + PB + PC • STOTAL = SA + SB + SC • QTOTAL = QA + QB + QC PTOTAL = VA-C * IA + VB-C * IB STOTAL= VRMSA-C * IRMSA + VRMSB-C * IRMSB QTOTAL = STOTAL 2 - PTOTAL 2 “Not True” RMS Wye (Y) 3-phase Connection • Neutral is present in the winding • But often is not accessible • Most common configuration Delta (∆) 3-phase Connection • Neutral is not present in the winding (in most cases)A B C N A B C For one power cycle • The digital samples are grouped into measurement cycles (periods) • For a given cycle index i…. • The digitally sampled voltage waveform is represented as having a set of sample points j in cycle index i • For a given cycle index i, there are Mi sample points beginning at mi and continuing through mi + Mi -1. • Voltage, current, power, etc. values are calculated on each cycle index i from 1 to N cycles. Digital Sampling Technique for Power Calculations� Period 1 Mi = 18 points Period 2 Mi = 18 points mi = point 7 mi = point 25 VPK-PK “True” RMS For one power cycle Three-Phase Winding Connections VRMS IRMS Real Power (P, in Watts) Apparent Power (S, in VA) Reactive Power (Q, in VAR) Power Factor (λ) Phase Angle (φ) VRMSi = Vj 2 Mi 1 mi + Mi - 1 Σj=mi IRMSi = Ij 2 Mi 1 mi + Mi - 1 Σj=mi Pi = Vj * Ij Mi 1 mi + Mi - 1 Σj=mi Si = VRMSi * IRMSi magnitude Qi = Si 2 - Pi 2 Sign of Qi is positive if the fundamental voltage vector leads the fundamental current vector λi = Pi Si magnitude Φi = cos-1λi Sign of Φi is positive if the fundamental voltage vector leads the fundamental current vector Formulas Used for Per-cycle Digitally Sampled Calculations VRMS = VPK-PK 2 2 1 VRMS = VAC 2 MDA800 Series Motor Drive Analyzers 8 channels, 12-bits, 1 GHz tlec-2015_power-poster-final-cmyk-HIRES.pdf 1 11/9/15 2:54 PM Learn more about the MDA800 and sign up to receive a Power Basics Poster for free: teledynelecroy.com/static-dynamic-complete Identify 3-phase electrical and motor mechanical static and dynamic power behaviors. Built on an 8 channel, 12-bit, 1 GHz oscilloscope platform for power section and embedded control debug – complete test capability. MDA800 Series Motor Drive Analyzers One Instrument, One Solution Identify 3-phase mechanical behaviors. Built on an platform for power section complete test capability. MDA800 Series Motor Drive Analyzers One Instrument, One Solution tlec-mda-poster-designworld.indd 1 2/5/16 2:04 PM Editorial_PTGuide_V3.LE.MD.indd 5 4/29/16 10:37 AM
  • 8.
    PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE 6 DESIGN WORLD— MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com VIDEO Videographer John Hansel jhansel@wtwhmedia.com @wtwh_Jhansel Videographer Kyle Johnston kjohnston@wtwhmedia.com @wtwh_Kyle Videographer Alex Barni abarni@wtwhmedia.com EDITORIAL Editorial Director Paul J. Heney pheney@wtwhmedia.com @dw_Editor Managing Editor Leslie Langnau llangnau@wtwhmedia.com @dw_3Dprinting Executive Editor Leland Teschler lteschler@wtwhmedia.com @dw_LeeTeschler Senior Editor Miles Budimir mbudimir@wtwhmedia.com @dw_Motion Senior Editor Mary Gannon mgannon@wtwhmedia.com @dw_MaryGannon Senior Editor Lisa Eitel leitel@wtwhmedia.com @dw_LisaEitel Associate Editor Mike Santora msantora@wtwhmedia.com @dw_MikeSantora Assistant Editor Michelle DiFrangia mdifrangia@wtwhmedia.com @wtwh_Michelle NEW MEDIA/WEB/ BUSINESS DEVELOPMENT Web Development Manager B. David Miyares dmiyares@wtwhmedia.com @wtwh_WebDave Web Development Specialist Patrick Amigo pamigo@wtwhmedia.com @amigo_patrick Digital Marketing Specialist Andrew Zistler azistler@wtwhmedia.com GRAPHICS Director, Creative Services Mark Rook mrook@wtwhmedia.com @wtwh_graphics Art Director Matthew Claney mclaney@wtwhmedia.com @wtwh_designer Graphic Designer Allison Washko awashko@wtwhmedia.com @wtwh_allison Traffic Manager Mary Heideloff mheideloff@wtwhmedia.com Production Associate Tracy Powers tpowers@wtwhmedia.com MARKETING Marketing Manager Stacy Combest scombest@wtwhmedia.com @wtwh_Stacy Marketing & Event Coordinator Jen Kolasky jkolasky@wtwhmedia.com @wtwh_Jen Marketing Coordinator Lexi Korsok lkorsok@wtwhmedia.com @medtech_Lexi Digital Marketing Specialist Josh Breuler jbreuler@wtwhmedia.com @wtwh_Joshb Digital Marketing Intern Aly Ryan aryan@wtwhmedia.com @wtwh_Aly Business Development Manager Patrick Curran pcurran@wtwhmedia.com @wtwhseopatrick Online Coordinator Jennifer Calhoon jcalhoon@wtwhmedia.com @wtwh_Jennifer Director, Audience Development Bruce Sprague bsprague@wtwhmedia.com Controller Brian Korsberg bkorsberg@wtwhmedia.com 2011 - 2015 2014 Winner Follow the whole team on twitter @DesignWorld CONNECT WITH US! StaffPage_PTGuide_V1.indd 6 4/29/16 5:34 PM
  • 9.
    The PITTMAN Difference Whenevaluating DC motor choices, it’s what’s inside that matters. What’s Inside Matters® On the outside, this looks like an ordinary DC motor. In fact, this particular motor is not a standard off-the-shelf part, but designed exactly to a customer’s specific technical requirements. PITTMAN has an experienced team of engineers focused on providing the perfect motor assembly to our customers demanding motion applications. • Special brush formulation for use in a very low humidity environment • Bearing system to handle higher than normal axial loads • Very tight balancing spec to minimize audible noise and vibration at high speeds • Unique magnet charge pattern to minimize cogging at low speeds • Specially chosen surface-mount components inside the motor to meet an aggressive EMC requirement • Numerous integrated spur and planetary gearboxes, encoders, brakes and drives www.Pittman–Motors.com 343 Godshall Drive, Harleysville, PA 19438 USA: +1 267 933 2105 Europe: +33 2 40 92 87 51 Asia: +86 21 5763 1258 Pittman (AMETEK) 3-16.indd 7 4/29/16 10:00 AM
  • 10.
    8 DESIGN WORLD— MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com PTDA Updates ..............................................10 Actuators Electrical ..................................................14 Rigid Chain ..............................................18 Ballscrews .....................................................20 Bearings ......................................................24 Belts, Pulleys ...........................................28 Brakes, Clutches ...................................31 Cabling ................................................32 Chain, Roller, Sprocket .......................34 Compression Springs ........................38 Couplings ..........................................41 Drives ................................................50 Gearing .............................................54 Gearmotors ........................................66 Leadscrews...........................................68 Linear Motion ........................................70 Locking Devices, Shaft Collars .................75 Lubrication ..................................................78 Motors ..........................................................80 Positioning Stages ........................................84 Seals .............................................................86 Shock, Vibration Damping ............................88 MOTIONCONTROLTIPS.COM INSIDE P04Power-transmission components are mainstays VOL2 NO2 18 Cover photography by Miles Budimir Contents_PTGuide_V1.indd 8 5/3/16 10:42 AM
  • 11.
    the #1 valuein automation Order Today, Ships Today! *SeeourWebsitefordetailsandrestrictions. ©Copyright2014AutomationDirect,Cumming,GA USA. Allrightsreserved. 1-800-633-0405 Research, price, buy at: www.automationdirect.com/power-transmission Precision Gearboxes If it is precision you need, our SureGear family of precision gearboxes is an excellent solution. They are available in a wide range of ratios and styles, and provide high-precision motion control at an incredible price. • Servomotor gearboxes start at $398.00 • Small NEMA motor gearboxes start at $209.00 Worm Gearboxes IronHorse® worm gearboxes are built to withstand the toughest applications while delivering reliable speed reduction and increased torque output. • Aluminum gearboxes start at $88.00 • Cast Iron gearboxes start at $147.00 Affordable Power Transmission high-quality components at low prices! NEW! • Jaw / Spider Couplings start at $10.50 • Double Loop Couplings start at $34.00 • Oldham Couplings start at $14.25 • Beam-Style Servo Couplings start at $42.00 • Bore Reducers start at $7.00 Synchronous Drives Our SureMotion line of synchronous drive components provide dependable speed and torque changes without unwanted slippage and speed variations. • Drive pulleys start at $5.25 • Drive belts start at $2.00 SureMotion® Drive Couplings Reduce the unwanted stress caused by shaft misalignment with our new line of high-quality drive couplings. These drive couplings come in a variety of styles, torque ranges and coupling capabilities each designed to enhance system performance and prevent costly failures. AutomationDirect_PTGuide4-16.indd 9 4/29/16 10:32 AM
  • 12.
    Power Transmission REFERENCE GUIDE 10DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com 2016 LEADERSHIP DEVELOPMENT CONFERENCE The Power Transmission Distributors Association (PTDA) held its 2016 Leadership Development Conference in early March in the Historic District of Charleston, S.C. PTDA members continuously seek ways to bring their future management team up-to-speed so they can step into a supervisory role ready to excel. The 2016 Leadership Development Conference fulfilled that need. Designed for emerging power transmission/motion control leaders who want to enhance their management skills, network in small group settings, and learn best practices that support business results, those that participated in this year’s conference benefited from two sessions: • “Ready. Get Set. Lead”—a dinner program by Randy Disharoon, director global accounts, Rexnord Industries, on how to quickly ramp up younger leaders for success to kick-off the conference • “Businessopoly”—a full-day, interactive, team-oriented business simulation game, led by industry veteran Michael Cinquemani, president and CEO, Master Power Transmission. Cinquemani said, “We are going to really challenge people to give them a deeper understanding of their decision-making: how it affects the profit and loss statement, the balance sheet, the statement of cash flows, and then review their results compared to their initial plans.” PTDAP O W E R T R A N S M I S S I O N D I S T R I B U T O R S A S S O C I AT I O N UPDATESMIKE SANTORA • ASSOCIATE EDITOR • @DW_MIKESANTORA The PTDA Spring Governance Meetings attracted nearly 90 volunteer senior leaders to Charleston, S.C., along with more than 45 Next-Gen members who took part in the PTDA 2016 Leadership Development Conference. Attendees played Businessopoly, the name PTDA gave to an interactive, hands-on board game that teaches executive management skills. PTDAUpdates_PTGuide_V3.indd 10 4/29/16 10:38 AM
  • 13.
    11DESIGN WORLD —MOTIONmotioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com 4 • 2016 PTDA WELCOMES SIX NEW MEMBERS PTDA has recently welcomed six new member companies. DISTRIBUTOR MEMBER MJ May Material Specialists (South Holland, Ill.) distributes mechanical PT components, bearings, motors, motor/motion control, electrical/electronic drives, material handling, hydraulics/pneumatics, and PT accessories. President Walter Lopez said, “As a small business looking to grow in the power transmission market, it was a no- brainer for us to join. The access to manufacturers and opportunity to strengthen established relationships will greatly benefit us in our quest to become a premier distributor of power transmission products.” MANUFACTURER MEMBERS Auburn Bearing & Manufacturing (Macedon, N.Y.) manufacturers bearings. “We chose to join PTDA because a vast majority of our sales are through an established network of distributors across the marketplace. PTDA will assist us in expanding that network even further,” said Peter Schroth, president. Helical Products Company, a location of MW Industries, (Rosemont, Ill.) manufactures spring couplings and retaining rings. Robert Jack, VP marketing and strategic planning, said, “The opportunity to network with both manufacturers and distributors in our industry is very valuable to us, and we look forward to being an active member and forging many new relationships in the years to come." iwis Drive Systems (Indianapolis, Ind.) manufactures chains and sprockets. “iwis joined PTDA to increase our network within the industrial distribution arena. The fact is, we have made significant investments into new products and value added services and PTDA represents a powerful tool for us to capitalize on these initiatives,” said Kody Fedorcha, VP, sales and marketing. Rosta USA Corporation (South Haven, Mich.) is a manufacturer of motor bases. Wittenstein (Bartlett, Ill.) manufactures couplings, gearing, motors, motor/motion control products and linear motion components. Tom Coyle, director of sales NA, said, “We are pleased to be a part of this association. My goals as a member of PTDA are to leverage the wide network of distributor organizations and contacts, gain access and new perspectives to industry economics and trends, and finally to increase exposure of Wittenstein,” PTDA 2016 CANADIAN CONFERENCE Registration is still open for the PTDA 2016 Canadian Conference, to be held June 9-10, 2016, at The Westin Ottawa in Ottawa, Ontario. For the 15th year, members of the Canadian power transmission/motion control (PT/MC) industry gather for business networking, market-driven education, a manufacturer industry showcase and more. Networking opportunities abound at the PTDA 2016 Canadian Conference. Participants have many opportunities to meet channel partners—both new and established—in comfortable settings such as the Industry Showcase Welcome Reception, featuring tabletop exhibits from every registered PTDA manufacturer member company. Along with networking, business market-driven education takes center stage. Participants will hear information targeted to solve the most vexing needs of the industry including information on corporate culture, hiring, knowledge transfer and an update on the Canadian mining industry. For more information about the Canadian Conference, please visit www.ptda.org/CanadianConference. Jim LaHaie, president, W.C. DuComb Co. and John Masek, SVP, Bearing Service Inc., took advantage of PTDA’s complimentary Regional Networking Events and an optional Detroit Tigers game last year. In 2016, complimentary PTDA Regional Networking Events are coming to Minneapolis, Chicago and Cincinnati and are open to any employee of a PTDA member company or a prospective member company. PTDAUpdates_PTGuide_V3.indd 11 4/29/16 10:39 AM
  • 14.
    Advanced Products forRobotics and Automation. Customer Driven Innovation Design EngineeringPrototype to Product Launch From customer driven innovation to contract manufacturing, we help differentiate your product and applications. Connect with us today to explore what CGI Motion can do for you. Download our full capabilities brochure at cgimotion.com copyright©2016 cgi inc. all rights reserved. 0425CCBS CGI’s World Class Vertically Integrated Flow Processes • Design for Manufacturability - DFM • Fixturing Design and Fabrication • Prototyping Support 3-D Model Printing on-site • Process controls designed and implemented • Process development for Assembly and Testing of Motion Control Assemblies for Advanced Devices and Systems • Complete Test Device, Design & Development • Minitab Statistical Analysis Tools • Computer Aided Machining (CAM) • Six Sigma black belt expertise Precision Gears Precision Gearboxes Precision Mechanical Components Precision Bearings CGI-PTGuide4.16-Spread.indd 12 5/2/16 11:48 AM
  • 15.
    www.cgimotion.com 800.568.GEAR (4327) Manufacturing EngineeringSupport Worldwide SupportTesting & Validation CGI’s Quality Equipment: Highly Qualified Inspection Department • Zeiss Contura Coordinate Measuring Machine (CMM) • Brown and Sharpe Coordinate Measuring Machine (CMM) • PECo Next Dimension 300 Gear Analyzer • Micro-Vu Vertex Vision System • Starrett Optical Comparators with Digital Readout • TESA Scanner • PECo Dual Flank Test Roll Checker • Micro Check Dual Flank Test Roll Checkers • Vari-Roll Dual Flank Test Roll Checkers • Inspection Xpert software for First Article Reports CGI Enables Design Excellence. Precision Mechanical Assemblies Electro-mechanical AssembliesCustomized Components CGI-PTGuide4.16-Spread.indd 13 5/2/16 11:48 AM
  • 16.
    PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE 14 DESIGN WORLD— MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com MANY applications call for converting rotary motion into motion that moves in a straight line. For these applications, linear electric or electromechanical actuators handle the task efficiently. In fact, today’s actuators are so efficient that the variety available for different design needs has proliferated. That means that actuators today are easier than ever to integrate into machinery; they’re also less costly. Electric actuators turn an electric motor’s power into linear motion in one of three ways: through a linear motor, belt or screw drive. Linear motors are the most technologically advanced and efficient method of directly transmitting the power of the motor into the motion of the actuator. Instead of the rotor rotating in the stator, the rotor travels in a linear, flat-array fashion along the stator. Belt drive actuators are less costly, but can still move loads at fairly high linear speeds. Because the motor is separate from the drive, the mechanical advantage can increase thrust speed. The disadvantage of belt drives is that they wear over time and require maintenance. ELECTRIC ACTUATORS: SMART DESIGNS EXCEL LISA EITEL SENIOR EDITOR @DW_LISAEITEL ElectricActuators_PT2016_V3.indd 14 4/29/16 10:40 AM
  • 17.
    ELECTRIC ACTUATORS 15DESIGN WORLD— MOTIONmotioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com 4 • 2016 Most screw drives take the form of either rod-style actuators or rodless cylinders. A motor transmits power through a coupler or pulley arrangement to rotate the screw and translate a nut along the screw axis. Attached to this nut is either the rod or saddle of the actuator. Screw drives can use roller, ball or leadscrews. Electric actuators have several benefits over hydraulic or pneumatic actuators. For one, the operation is cleaner because they operate without the need for fluids or ancillary equipment. They have the ability to integrate power, control and actuation mechanisms into one device. And they combine force, velocity and positioning in a single, compact motion control device. Another advantage is the ability to constantly monitor feedback directly from the motor and adjust performance accordingly. Though not necessary for every application, closed-loop operation has the ability to adjust and correct variances in the operation, resulting in repeatable and accurate motion with every move. Today, the prices for drives for electric actuators have come down, which has opened new application uses for the linear actuator. So, electric actuators are more viable for applications where hydraulic, pneumatic and manual operations once ruled. In many applications, servomotors are replacing induction motors because of their performance and energy efficiency. Direct drives are replacing traditional motor-gearbox combinations because of their high dynamic performance, high precision and long life. And electric actuators are replacing pneumatic cylinders in many applications for similar reasons. But the biggest improvements in the last five to ten years can be found in the control systems integrated with electric actuators. Faster bus systems, like industrial Ethernet and real-time communication, make the use of electric actuators simpler. Servo systems require fast communication and exchange of real-time data between the drive and the overlaid machine control. The bus was always the bottleneck in these systems. Now, with the much higher data rates and real-time capacity of industrial Ethernet, the integration and the use of electric actuators is easier. Stepper and servo drive options with Ethernet protocols (Ethernet IP, Modbus, TCP) turn single-axis actuators into simple, low-cost motion devices with infinite positioning, precise control and longer life. Electric linear actuators are an alternative to pneumatic cylinders in several applications because of the flexibility they deliver in the design of production processes and production monitoring systems. In conveying applications, for example, diverting and sorting functions are more frequently controlled using electric actuators. Typically, pneumatic actuators have been used, but the required manual adjustments were often subject to human error. Plus, the pneumatic actuators could only handle a small amount of variability in product sizes. Electric actuators are flexible by design. For example, material handling applications have experienced an increase in the variety and variability of package sizes. In packaging machines, consumer products manufacturers are Linear positioning actuators of extremely long stroke lengths — such as this LoPro linear actuator from Bishop- Wisecarver — typically use belt drives. Polyurethane belting is quiet and delivers long mechanical actuation with good accuracy and high speeds. LoPro actuators are three to 8 m long, but units to 15 m are possible. Tolomatic ERD hygienic all-stainless-steel electric cylinders have a roller-screw option that boosts maximum thrust to 7,868 lbf (35.6 kN) for better life and performance under high duty cycles than ballscrew models. ElectricActuators_PT2016_V3.indd 15 4/29/16 10:40 AM
  • 18.
    PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE 16 DESIGN WORLD— MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com NSK’s MCM Series Monocarrier includes a ballscrew, linear guide and supports in one compact structure. It boosts accuracy and reduces installation time, and some versions are available through a Quick Ship Program. producing more package sizes with the same manufacturing lines, which require equipment to be adaptable enough to handle different product sizes and types. Electric actuators easily handle these variability requirements and, over the life of the motion system, can be less expensive. SELECTING AN ELECTRIC ACTUATOR The process for selecting an electric actuator is similar to one for hydraulic or pneumatic actuators, with a few differences. Here are the essentials. Start with the motion profile. This establishes the demands for velocity and time as well as force (or torque) and the required travel distance. This is also the place to determine the maximum stroke needed as well as maximum and minimum speed requirements. Then calculate the load. This can have many different components including inertial load, friction load, the external applied load, as well as the gravitational load. Load calculations also depend on the orientation of the actuator itself, whether it’s horizontal or vertical. Duty cycle is another important factor. This is defined as the ratio of operating time to resting time and is usually expressed as a percentage. The cycling rate may be in seconds, minutes, hours or even days, and knowing the operating hours per day may also be necessary. Knowing the duty cycle helps the engineer estimate the system life requirements and can also eliminate problems such as overheating, faster wear and premature component failure due to an incorrectly sized actuator. Know the positional accuracy and precision demanded by the application. The actuator’s precision should meet or exceed the application’s requirements for accuracy, backlash, and straightness and flatness of linear motion. This directly impacts the cost of the system; if the application doesn’t demand high accuracy or precision, then there is no need to buy a more expensive actuator when a less expensive one will satisfy the demands of the application. Aside from the technical specifications mentioned above, there is also the need to select the proper configuration for the actuator in the final design. This includes mounting considerations and the need for any other external components, such as holding brakes and communication and power cables. Lastly, consider the operating environment for the actuator. What are the temperature requirements? Are there any contaminants such as water, oil or abrasive chemicals? Contaminants can affect seals and impact the working life of the actuator. In such cases, selecting the appropriate IP rating for an application can guard against the effects of contaminants. ElectricActuators_PT2016_V3.indd 16 4/29/16 10:41 AM
  • 19.
    1.800.255.4773 www.nskamericas.com BALL BEARINGS| ROLLER BEARINGS | LINEAR MOTION PRODUCTS | TECHNICAL SERVICES nsk k1TM lubricaTion uniT Experience long-term, maintenance-free operation with NSK K1™ Lubrication Units. These patented units provide fresh, continuous oil flow onto the rail or shaft during operation, making them ideal for environments where grease replenishment is undesirable or where grease is easily washed away. Available on NSK linear guides, ball screws, Monocarrier™ actuators and Robot Modules, K1™ Lubrication Units prolong life for up to 5 years or 10,000 km operational distance. MAINTENANCE- fREE OPERATION. WORRy-fREE DESIGN. NPA-SL-020 Design World ad_K1 Unit[250314]v1.indd 1 2014-03-25 3:14 PM NSK 8-15.indd 17 4/29/16 10:04 AM
  • 20.
    PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE 18 DESIGN WORLD— MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com This is a custom loading-station scissor lift that uses a SERAPID 40 chain actuator. Retractable to table-top level, the platform can smoothly lift a heavy load more than 10 ft. A space- saving chain storage magazine fits compactly at the bottom. MECHANICAL COMPONENTS AT THE HEART OF MOTION DESIGN LISA EITEL • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_LISAEITEL RIGID-CHAIN actuators work by pairing a drive (usually an electric motor) with a length of chain sporting shoulders on each link. The motor output shaft—fitted with a specialty sprocket or pinion—applies tangential force to the chain. Then the chain comes out and straightens, and its links’ shoulders lock to form a rigid series. When the motor runs in the opposite direction, the chain shoulders disengage and allow for coiling. Inside the actuator body, reaction plates and guides counter thrust resistance and keep the chain on track. Links travel around the pinion to exit the actuator body along the stroke path. Here, the motor’s torque comes to act as forward thrust via the link shoulder to the rest of the links’ shoulders. The last link in the chain before the load has geometry that puts the thrust higher than the articulation axis. This makes a moment that effectively locks the link shoulders. In reverse, pulling force acts along the links’ cross axes. Rigid-chain actuators have the mechanical benefits of conventional chain but can act in horizontal push setups or vertically as jacks. Plus they’re compact. In contrast, traditional chain drives can only pull, so need two drives for bidirectional motion. Traditional screw jacks for vertical power transmission need space for retraction that’s as long as the working stroke itself. Before specifying a rigid-chain actuator, determine the application’s total load, including the transported load, acceleration forces, external environmental forces, and that due to friction—with a coefficient between 0.05 and 0.5 for typical rigid-chain actuator setups. Next, determine what type of actuator body and chain-storage magazine the application can accommodate. Determine whether the chain will need to change direction on its way from the magazine to actuator body. Actuators usually feed chain around 90° or 180° turns. Note that rigid-chain actuators can work alone or in tandem. Twin-chain setups deliver high positioning accuracy and stability where loads are large or bulky. Common rigid chain has two rows of link plates and shoulders; duplex chain has three; other options abound. Image courtesy iwis Drive Systems DW half page rv RigidChainActuators_PTGuide_V3.LE.MD.indd 18 4/29/16 10:43 AM
  • 21.
    Choose a rigid-chainactuator to satisfy the design geometry. ... but guided chain is most stable. Unguided chain with shoulders up coils downwards ... Common rigid-chain arrangements Pinion Actuator body Input drive shaft Chain link shoulders RIGID CHAIN ACTUATORS Unguided chain with shoulders up coils downward, which is useful but not always stable enough for long strokes. That with shoulders down (here, bottom) is slightly more stable. Use guided chain wherever space permits. Here, a pushing bar acts as a yoke to keep loads steady, with optional hooks for pulling as well. Optimized geometry has the force vector act on the load’s center for balance. If twin-chain setups are impossible, consider adding framework to guide awkward loads. Guides on the chain also help maintain stability—even over very long strokes—because they address side and buckling forces. Such guides come in different shapes with different crampons and subcomponents to engage the chain. Where use of chain guides is impossible, most designs run the chain with link shoulders down for moderate stability. Some last design notes: Standard chain is carbon steel to withstand heat to 200° C, but stainless, high-temperature, and coated chain for long life are other options. The required length of chain is total design stroke plus a few links to engage the actuator pinions. As with any power- transmission setup, consult the manufacturer for tips and guidance on determining necessary drive power and other details. SERAPID Inc. | 34100 Mound Rd. | Sterling Heights, MI | Tel +1 586-274-0774 | info-us@serapid.com | www.serapid.com SOLUTIONS FOR PRECISION MOVEMENT OF VERY HEAVY LOADS Press-mounted dual push-pulls QUICK DIE CHANGE STAGE AND ORCHESTRA LIFTS CUSTOM ENGINEERED SYSTEMS INDUSTRIAL LIFTS LinearBeam guided push-pull LinkLi li columns RollBeam Telescopic push-pull DW half page rv.indd 1 4/12/2016 2:17:33 PM RigidChainActuators_PTGuide_V3.LE.MD.indd 19 4/29/16 2:58 PM
  • 22.
    PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE 20 DESIGN WORLD— MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com This cutaway, courtesy of Nook Industries, shows the inner workings of a ballscrew, most notably the recirculating balls and the deflector, in relation to the screw assembly. BALLSCREWS B A S I C S O F MILES BUDIMIR • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_MOTION BALLSCREWS are a mainstay of motion actuation. Compared to similar actuation methods such as leadscrews, they typically cost a bit more but are generally more accurate. They also boast higher efficiencies, even though they demand more lubrication because of the use of recirculating balls. The basic components of a ballscrew are a nut, a screw with helical grooves, and balls (often made from steel, ceramic, or hard plastic material) that roll between the nut, the screw and the grooves when either the screw or nut rotates. Balls are routed into a ball return system of the nut and travel in a continuous path to the ball nut’s opposite end. Seals are often used on either side of the nut to prevent debris from compromising smooth motion. Recent advances in manufacturing and materials have improved ballscrew performance so machine designers today can get better linear motion with them at lower cost. Some improvements include the fact that the latest generation of ballscrews has more load density than ever, giving designers higher capacity from a smaller package. There is also a trend toward more miniaturization, but also faster ballscrews with rolled and ground screw manufacturing methods. Ballscrews suit applications needing light, smooth motion, applications requiring precise positioning, and when heavy loads must be moved. Examples include machine tools, assembly devices, X-Y motion, Z motion, and robots. Ballscrews are usually classified according to factors such as lead accuracy, axial play and preload, and life/load relationship. Lead accuracy refers to the degree to which the shaft’s rotational movements are translated into linear movement. With lead accuracy and axial play determined by the manufacturing method of the ballscrew shaft and the assembly of the nut, high lead accuracy and zero axial play is generally Ballscrews_PTGuide_V2-mb.indd 20 4/29/16 2:26 PM
  • 23.
    © 2015 byAMETEK Inc. All rights reserved. Nothing moves air with more rock-solid reliability than AMETEK® Rotron regenerative blowers. Fifteen years’ service life is not unusual. These low-pressure, high-volume blowers feature rugged, compact construction and quiet operation. Their proven design makes them ideal in applications from chemicals, wastewater and furnaces to vapor recovery and more. Plus, they’re backed by the industry’s most knowledgeable engineering experts. AMETEK can customize your blower for harsh environments, high voltage and specialized applications, too. So make your next air-moving challenge a breeze. Call us at +1 330-673-3452 or visit our website to get started. What’s 15 years to one of our blowers? A warm-up. 100 East Erie Street Kent, OH 44240 ametekdfs.com AMETEKDFS Regen Blower Ad_9x10.875.indd 1 6/1/15 5:03 PM AMETEK 6-15 (NEW AD).indd 21 4/29/16 10:04 AM
  • 24.
    22 DESIGN WORLD 4 • 2016 www.designworldonline.com REFERENCE GUIDE POWER TRANSMISSION www.cjmco.com Phone: 860-643-1531 291 Boston Tpke, Bolton, CT 06043 Engineering Solutions for Clutches & Brakes Clutches,Brakes & Power Transmission Products •electrical, mechanical, pneumatic & hydraulic models •system design and integration •expert engineers working on every order Highest Torque in the Smallest Space ... or the largest. Maxitorq® clutches and brakes deliver power, reliability and are customized to meet your exact needs. Land, sea and air – CJM is everywhere. AS9100C:2009/Certified associated with relatively higher-cost precision ground ballscrews, while lower lead accuracy and some axial play is associated with lower cost rolled ballscrews. Fabricated by rolling or other means, ballscrew shafts yield a less precise but mechanically efficient and less expensive ballscrew. Axial play is the degree to which a ball nut can be moved in the screw axis direction without any rotation of either nut or screw. Preload is applied to eliminate axial play. The process of preloading removes backlash and increases stiffness. Ball recirculation inside the ball nut can affect precision and repeatability. Thus, ball nuts are available with a range of preload options to reduce or remove the axial play as they rotate around the screw. Minimal axial play allows better accuracy, for example, because no motion is lost from the clearance in the balls as they reengage. There are several techniques for preloading. Some common methods include oversizing the balls inside the nut housing; using the so-called “double-nut” or “tension nut” method; or by using a manufactured offset in the raceway spiral to change the angle of ball engagement (the “lead shift” method) and deliberately force the balls into a preload condition. Each method has its advantages and disadvantages, but all serve to minimize or eliminate backlash between the nut and screw. Perhaps the biggest overall benefit of a ballscrew is that it has high efficiencies that can be well over 90%. By contrast, Acme lead screws average about 50% efficiency or less. There are also minimum thermal effects. Backlash can be eliminated through preloading. Ballscrews also offer smooth movement over the full travel range. The higher cost of ballscrews can be offset by decreased power requirements for similar net performance. One drawback to ballscrews is that they require high levels of lubrication. Ballscrews should always be properly lubricated, with the correct type of lubricant, to prevent corrosion, reduce friction, extend operating life, and ensure efficient operation. Because ballscrews are a bearing system, they’ll need some type of lubrication to avoid metal-to-metal contact of the balls in the raceway. While the lubrication choice can be either oil or grease, it’s advisable to avoid solid additives (such as graphite) as they will clog the recirculation system. An NLGI no. 2 type grease is recommended but it should also depend on the application, whether food-grade or another special type of lubrication is required. Ballscrews, especially those used in machine tools, generally require lubricants with EP additives to prevent excessive wear. The lube amount will be fixed, but the frequency of lubrication will vary depending on factors such as the move cycle characteristics, or contamination in the environment. Contaminated lubrication can increase friction. In addition, ballscrews can fail if the balls travel over metal chips or dirt in the ball thread raceway. Using lubricants recommended by machine tool manufacturers can help prevent this effect. Using telescopic covers or bellows can help keep ballscrews clean when used in environments with many contaminants. A sample ballscrew assembly, such as the Precision Metric Ball Screws (PMBS) series from Nook Industries, features a single nut with flange, uses precision thread-rolling technology and is available in a wide range of leads and diameters. Ballscrews_PTGuide_V2-mb.indd 22 4/29/16 10:47 AM
  • 25.
    Together a winningcombination for today’s servomotor applications. Our ServoClass® couplings have been recently redesigned to enable your actuator to go even faster and achieve the positional accuracy that will take your designs to the next level. Our couplings will do all this with low bearing loads. 3 New sizes now available. Now, size, select and see the right ServoClass® coupling solution for your application with Zero-Max 3D CAD files. Check our FAST deliveries. www.zero-max.com 800.533.1731 © 2010 ZERO-MAX Your ball screw Your servomotor Our coupling # Zero-Max_full_pgs_r10_Design World 2/12/10 4:02 PM Page 1 Zero Max ad 8-15.indd 23 4/29/16 10:05 AM
  • 26.
    PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE DESIGN WORLD —MOTION 4 • 201624 BEARINGS REVIEW OF IT’S EASY for bearings to go unnoticed—an out of sight, out of mind mentality. This attitude is common among so many because bearings are simple, internal machine elements. However, that doesn’t make them any less crucial for motion applications. The purpose of a bearing is to reduce frictional forces between two moving parts by giving a surface something to roll on, rather than slide over. There are basic features that all bearings share, but specific application needs demand many different variations of this universal motion system component. A bearing usually consists of smooth rollers or metal balls and the smooth inner and outer surfaces, known as races, that the rollers or balls roll against. These rollers or balls act as the load carrier for the device, allowing it to spin freely. Bearings typically encounter two kinds of load: radial and axial. Radial loads occur perpendicular to the shaft, while axial loads occur parallel to the shaft. Depending on the application the bearing is being used in, some bearings experience both loads simultaneously. There are many different types of bearings, each suitable for different purposes in varying applications. BALL BEARINGS One of the most common forms of bearings is the ball bearing. As the name implies, ball bearings use balls to provide a low friction means of motion between two bearing races. Since the contact area between the balls and races is so small, ball bearings cannot support as large a load as other bearing types and are best suited for light to moderate loads. However, their small surface contact also limits the heat generated by friction, meaning that ball bearings can be used in high-speed applications. ROLLER BEARINGS Possibly the oldest form of bearing, roller bearings can be spherically or cylindrically shaped and are commonly used in applications like conveyor belt rollers. Because of their shape, roller bearings have greater surface contact than ball bearings, and are thus able to handle larger loads without deforming. Their shape also allows for a moderate amount of thrust load since the weight is distributed across cylinders instead of spheres. MIKE SANTORA • ASSOCIATE EDITOR • @DW_MIKESANTORA Plastics for longer life® 3 times lighter than stainless DryLin® aluminum lead screws with optimized geometry for high- efficiency and long service life. Variety of nut types available in 5 materials, including FDA and high-temperature compliant. Learn more at: www.igus.com/DryLin® Bearings_PTGuide_V3.indd 24 4/29/16 10:53 AM
  • 27.
     BEARINGS 25DESIGN WORLD —MOTIONmotioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com NEEDLE ROLLER BEARINGS When you need to reduce friction between two moving parts but have very limited space to do so, a needle roller bearing may be just what you’re looking for. A needle roller bearing is a roller bearing with rollers whose length is at least four times their diameter. Despite their low cross section, the large surface area of the needle roller bearing allows them to support extremely high radial loads. They usually consist of a cage, which orients and contains the needle rollers and an outer race, which is sometimes the housing itself. The bearings can often be found in two different arrangements. The first is a radial arrangement, in which the rollers run parallel to the shaft. The second is a thrust arrangement, in which the rollers are placed flat in a radial pattern and run perpendicular to the shaft. These bearings are often used in automotive applications, such as rocker arm pivots, pumps, compressors and transmissions. The drive shaft of a rear-wheel drive vehicle typically has at least eight needle bearings (four in each U joint) and often more if it is particularly long, or operates on steep slopes. Spherical roller bearings like Koyo’s RZ Spherical Roller Bearing have a greater surface contact than ball bearings, and are thus able to handle larger loads without deforming. THRUST BALL BEARINGS Thrust ball bearings are designed for use in applications with primarily axial loads and are capable of handling shaft misalignment. These bearings are also useful in high-speed applications, such as in the aerospace and automotive industries. THRUST ROLLER BEARINGS Thrust roller bearings are designed so that the load is transmitted from one raceway to the other, meaning that these bearings can accommodate radial loads. Bearings like these also have a self-aligning capability that makes them immune to shaft deflection and alignment errors. TAPERED ROLLER BEARINGS Tapered roller bearings feature tapered inner and outer ring raceways with tapered rollers arranged between them, angled so the surface of the rollers converge at the axis of the bearing. These bearings are unique in that, unlike most bearings that can handle either axial or radial loads, they can handle large amounts of load in both directions. A single row taper bearing is limited in that it can only take high axial loads from one direction, but if adjusted against a second tapered roller bearing, that axial load is counteracted. This allows the bearings to accept high radial and axial loads from multiple directions. Test 3621: Chainflex® control cable CF98.05.04 Has withstood more than 138 million strokes at a radius of 3.2 x d Test information and details available online: chainflex.com/test3621 Tested and Proven 138 million cycles Test3621 Bearings_PTGuide_V3.indd 25 4/29/16 2:33 PM
  • 28.
    26 DESIGN WORLD— MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE Depending on application requirements, some ball bearing are made with magnetic, lubricant-free motion plastics like this igus xiros M180 which uses a lightweight polymer ball bearing. The ability of a tapered roller bearing to accommodate angular misalignment of the inner ring in relation to the outer ring is limited to a few minutes of arc. As with other roller bearings, tapered roller bearings must be given a minimum load, especially in high speed applications where the inertial forces and friction can have a damaging effect between the rollers and raceway. LINEAR MOTION BEARINGS Linear motion bearings are specifically designed to allow motion in one direction and are typically used to carry a load on a slide or rail. They can be powered by a motor or by hand and experience over turning moments of force instead of radial and axial loads. PLAIN BEARINGS Plain bearings are the simplest form of bearing available, as they have no moving parts. They are often cylindrical, though the design of the bearing differs depending on the intended motion. Plain bearings are available in three designs: journal, linear and thrust. Journal style bearings are designed to support radial motion where a shaft rotates within the bearing. Linear bearings are often used in applications requiring slide plates, as these bearings are designed to permit motion in a linear motion. Finally, a plain thrust bearing is designed to do the same job as its roller bearing counterpart, but instead of using cone shaped rolling elements, the bearing uses pads arranged in a circle around the cylinder. These pads create wedge-shaped regions of oil inside the bearing between the pads and a rotating disk, which supports applied thrust and eliminates metal-on-metal contact. Out of all the bearing types available, plain bearings tend to be the least expensive. They can be made from a variety of materials including bronze, graphite and plastics, such Bearings_PTGuide_V3.indd 26 4/29/16 10:55 AM
  • 29.
     BEARINGS 27DESIGN WORLD —MOTIONmotioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com 4 • 2016 The greater surface contact of roller bearings enables them to handle larger loads without deforming. Demonstrating just a few of the many types of roller bearings, here we see a needle, spherical, tapered and cylindrical roller bearing. Image courtesy of AST. as Nylon, PTFE and polyacetal. Improvements in material characteristics have made plastic plain bearings increasingly popular in recent years. Plain bearings of all types, however, are lightweight, compact and can carry a substantial load. As far as lubrication is concerned, some plain bearings require outside lubrication while others are self-lubricating. Plain bearings made of bronze or polyacetal, for example, contain lubricant within the walls of the bearing, but require some outside lubrication to maximize performance. For other plain bearings, the material itself acts as the lubricant. Such is the case with bearings made from PTFE or metalized graphite. The growing popularity of plain plastic bearings and increasingly stringent industry standards has resulted in more consumers requiring the bearings to meet FDA and RoHS standards. There has even been a call for the bearings to meet the standards of EU directive 10/2011/EC, which also takes the material manufacturing process into account. Common applications for drawn cup needle roller bearings like this from Koyo include: precision gear boxes, machine tool, medical equipment, precision assembly equipment, robotics, after-market racing equipment and aerospace. APPLICATIONS Bearings are all around us in everyday life and most of the time they go unnoticed. But without them, many of the tasks we undertake would move along much less smoothly. The ball bearings’ simple design, ability to operate at high speeds and relatively low- maintenance requirements, makes them one of the most common roller bearings found in a variety of industrial applications. For example, deep groove ball bearings are often used in small- to medium-sized electric motors because of their ability to accommodate both high speeds and radial and axial loads. Self-aligning ball bearings, on the other hand, are ideal for use in fans. These bearings have two rows of balls with a common raceway in the outer ring. This design allows for angular misalignment while maintaining running accuracy. They are, however, one of the most difficult bearings to install correctly. Tapered roller bearings are another form of bearing that just about every industry depends on one way or another. They are usually found in applications where support for axial and radial loads is required, such as in a tire hub where the bearing must deal with the radial load from the weight of the vehicle and the axial load experienced while cornering. These bearings are also commonly found in gearboxes where they are generally mounted with a second bearing of the same type in a face-to-face or back-to-back orientation. They provide rigid shaft support, keeping deflection to a minimum. This reduced shaft deflection minimizes gear backlash. Tapered bearings also have the advantage of having less mass but high efficiency, however this does limit their overall speed. In applications where bearings are mounted vertically, they are typically oriented in a face-to- face setup, while horizontal applications use a back-to-back setup. Some pumps use this design because of shaft deflection concerns. Bearings_PTGuide_V3.indd 27 4/29/16 2:36 PM
  • 30.
    28 DESIGN WORLD— MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE BELTS & PULLEYS THE BASICS OF Belts and pulleys lift loads, use mechanical advantage to apply forces, and transmit power.They also form the basis of industrial conveyors big and small. Here are the fundamentals of their operation and how to apply them. LISA EITEL • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_LISAEITEL Shown here is a Gates Carbon Drive CDN system—designed to be lower in cost for new bike applications. It leverages new materials and geometries, with nine carbon cords embedded within engineered polymer belt and a patented 11-millimeter tooth pitch profile for lower tension. Like many new belt applications, it replaces chain drives. INDUSTRIAL belt drives consist of rubber belts that wrap around drive pulleys, in turn driven by electric motors. In a typical setup, the belt also wraps around one or more idler pulleys that keep the belt taut and on track. The main reasons that engineers pick belt drives over other options is that modern varieties require little if no maintenance; they’re less expensive than chain drives; and they’re quiet and efficient, even up to 95% or more. In addition, the tensile members of today’s belts— cords embedded into the belt rubber that carry the majority of the belt load—are stronger than ever. Made of polyester, aramid, fiberglass or carbon fiber, these tensile cords make today’s belt drives thoroughly modern power-transmission devices. Manufacturers generally describe belts and pulleys with five main geometries. Pitch diameter is the drive pulley’s diameter. Center distance is the distance between the two pulleys’ centers. Minimum wrap angle is a measure of how much the belt wraps around the smallest pulley. Belt length is how long the belt would be if cut and laid flat. Finally, in the case of toothed belts (also called synchronous belts) the pitch is the number of teeth per some length—so a 3-mm pitch means that the belt has one tooth every 3 mm, for example. APPLYING SYNCHRONOUS BELTS Some general guidelines are applicable to all timing belts, including miniature and double-sided belts. First of all, engineers should always design these belt drives with a sufficient safety factor—in other words, with ample reserve horsepower capacity. Tip: Take note of overload service factors. Belt ratings are generally only 1/15 of the belt’s ultimate strength. These ratings are set so the belt will deliver at least 3,000 hours of useful life if the end user properly installs and maintains it. The pulley diameter should never be smaller than the width of the belt. BeltsPulleys_PTGuide_V1.LE.indd 28 4/29/16 4:10 PM
  • 31.
    29DESIGN WORLD —MOTION 4 • 2016 BELTS & PULLEYS Custom Synchronous Drives Precise. Reliable. Cost Effective. Timing Pulley Stock Guaranteed When You Need It. Manufacturers of Power Transmission and Motion Control Components Concentric Maxi Torque Stock and Custom Keyless Hub-to-Shaft Connection System Email or call to get your CMT Stock Products Catalog Order today. Ships today! Custom Machine & Tool Co., Inc. (800)355-5949 • sales@cmtco.com www.cmtco.com Precise. Reliable. Trusted. American Engineering • American Made © 2016 Custom Machine & Tool Co., Inc. As mentioned, belts are quieter than other power- transmission drive options … but they’re not silent. Noise frequency increases proportionally with belt speed, and noise amplitude increases with belt tension. Most belt noise arises from the way in which belt teeth entering the pulleys at high speed repeatedly compresses the trapped pockets of air. Other noise arises from belt rubbing against the flange; in some cases, this happens when the shafts aren’t parallel. Pulleys are metal or plastic, and the most suitable depends on required precision, price, inertia, color, magnetic properties and the engineer’s preference based on experience. Plastic pulleys with metal inserts or metal hubs are a good compromise. Tip: Make at least one pulley in the belt drive adjustable to allow for belt installation and tensioning. Also note that in a properly designed belt drive, there should be a minimum of six teeth in mesh and at least 60° of belt wrap around the drive pulley. Other tips: • Pretension belts with the proper recommended tension. This extends life and prevents belt ratcheting or tooth jumping. • Align shafts and pulleys to prevent belt-tracking forces and belt edge wear. Don’t crimp belts beyond the smallest recommended pulley radius for that belt section. • Select the appropriate belt for the design torque. • Select the appropriate belt material for the environment (temperature, chemical, cleaning agents, oils and weather). Belt-and-pulley systems are suitable for myriad environments, but some applications need special consideration. Topping this list are environmental factors. Dusty environments do not generally present serious problems as long as the particles are fine and dry. In contrast, particulate matter can act as an abrasive and accelerates belt and pulley wear. Debris should be prevented from falling into belt drives. Debris caught in the drive is generally either forced through the belt or makes the system stall. In either case, serious damage occurs to the belt and related drive hardware. Light and occasional contact with water—during occasional washdowns, for example—has little serious effect. However, These PowerGrip TruMotion timing belts from Stock Drive Products have nylon tooth facing for longer and quieter running and less dust. Fiberglass tensile cords resist elongation and have a high flex life. BeltsPulleys_PTGuide_V1.LE.indd 29 5/3/16 9:22 AM
  • 32.
    PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE 30 DESIGN WORLD— MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com prolonged contact with constant spray or submersion can significantly reduce tensile strength in fiberglass belts and make aramid belts break down and stretch out. In the same way, occasional contact with oils doesn’t damage synchronous belts. But prolonged contact with oil or lubricants, either directly or airborne, significantly reduces belt service life. Lubricants cause the rubber compound to swell, break down internal adhesion systems and reduce felt tensile strength. While alternate rubber compounds may provide some marginal improvement in durability, it’s best to prevent oil from contacting synchronous belts. The presence of ozone can be detrimental to the compounds used in rubber synchronous belts. Ozone degrades belt materials in much the same way as excessive temperatures. Although the bumper materials used in belts are compounded to resist the effects of ozone, eventually chemical breakdown occurs and they become hard and brittle and begin cracking. The amount of degradation depends on the ozone concentration and generation of exposure. Rubber belts aren’t suitable for cleanrooms, as they risk shedding particles. Instead, use urethane timing belts here … keeping in mind that while urethane belts make significantly less debris, most can carry only light loads. Also, none have static conductive construction to dissipate electrical charges. Shown here are Baldor-Maska sheaves for V-belt drives,also called friction drives for the way they operate. Minimum allowable sheave diameter depends on the belt shape and material, whether that’s synthetic, neoprene, urethane, or rubber. This setup has an electronic warning system from ContiTech to alert operators when a conveyor is elongating or at risk of ripping. Called CONTI PROTECT and most useful on industrial and mining conveyors, the system uses magnetic markings on the belts to track irregularities in the splice length and detects longitudinal rips before they grow. Such monitoring systems are just one example of how belt-drive technologies have kept pace with 21st-centrury design concepts. BeltsPulleys_PTGuide_V1.LE.indd 30 4/29/16 2:59 PM
  • 33.
    www.designworldonline.com 4 •2016 DESIGN WORLD 31 BRAKES & CLUTCHES BRAKES and clutches are a mainstay in motion designs that need to stop, hold or index loads. Especially over the last five years, a technology trend toward application-specific designs has quickened as several industries are pushing the performance envelope of stock components. Brakes are used to stop a load, typically a rotating load, while clutches are used to transfer torque. There are many different types of brakes and clutches. A brake would be used in applications where accurate stopping of the load is needed and the motor will stop as well. A clutch would be used in applications where it’s desirable to engage or disengage a load and motor while leaving the motor to run all the time. When a clutch is used, the load will be allowed to coast to a stop. A clutch and brake combination would be used where the load will be started and stopped while the motor continues to rotate. Both clutches and clutch brakes can mount to a motor shaft or be base-mounted and have input through a belt drive, chain drive or coupling. The motor horsepower and motor frame size play a key role in determining which specific brake or clutch to select. In the case of base-mounted units, it may be necessary to define the RPM at that location. Manufacturers provide quick selection charts where unit size is determined by finding the intersection of motor horsepower and speed at the clutch shaft. The charts are commonly created using the dynamic torque capacity for the product and the torque capacity for the motor plus an overload factor of some value. Using this method presumes that you’ve selected a motor that’s sized appropriately to the application. In applications where cycle rates are considered aggressive for the inertia of the load, it’s a good idea to consult with the application support staff of the manufacturer regarding the heat dissipation capacity. Coil voltage is another consideration. The most common options are 6, 24 and 90 Vdc with 90 V being widely preferred in North American markets, while 24 V is more common in Europe. In both cases, brake and clutch manufacturers can offer power supplies to convert ac to dc if required. BRAKES & CLUTCHES MORE INDISPENSABLE THAN EVER Shaft-mounted electric clutches from New Torque have a static torque rating from 15 to 202 Nm, voltage of 24 to95 Vdc, and power of 16 to 50 W. Some clutches and brakes — as the ones from Carlyle Johnson Machine Company shown here — can last 15 years on average, with some products lasting 50 years or more. Shown here is an ac solenoid shoe Brake from Ametek. Gemco industrial brakes stop industrial machines in steel mills, gantries, cranes, and commercial laundry equipment. They are tough and long-lasting. This is a Force Control Industries coupler brake. In fact, the company’s Posistop and MagnaShear coupler brakes mount between motors and reducers, so engineers can eliminate separate brake motors. LISA EITEL • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_LISAEITEL BrakesClutches_PTGuide_V3.indd 31 4/29/16 11:14 AM
  • 34.
    32 DESIGN WORLD— MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com ENGINEERS can use a multitude of cables (including data, coaxial, and instrumentation cables) in industrial settings for control networking, low and medium- voltage power transmission and distribution, and more. Most cables that distribute power to motors are low-voltage designs rated for 2,000 V and below. That said, some facilities with partial responsibility over the utility power they consume use medium-voltage cables rated for 2,000 to 35,000 V. Available as both single and multi-conductor designs, these power cables must be able to withstand high mechanical loads, speeds and accelerations. Common applications include machine tools, cranes, conveyors, portable designs and stationary heavy-duty equipment. Such cables can supply temporary ac or dc power to motors and generators, and can operate indoors and outdoors, depending on their temperature rating. The proper cable for an application depends on its function and environment. For instance, only use an unshielded cable when it will operate in an enclosed space only accessible by trained professionals. Such enclosures prevent electromagnetic interference and keep plant personnel safely away from potentially live electrical charges. Manufacturers usually construct low-voltage cables with aluminum or copper conductors, insulation and jacketing. Conductors can range anywhere from finely stranded bare copper wires to bunched strands of tinned annealed copper. They come in both shielded and unshielded versions and usually must be flame retardant and oil resistant. Power cables feature conductors that are either stranded in layers inside or bundled or braided. The stranded design is easier to manufacture so costs less. It features long, layered cores and firm strands wrapped with an extruded jacket. In the bundled or braided design, the conductors are braided around a tension-proof center. By eliminating the layers, a uniform bend radius is ensured. To accommodate the complex and sometimes cramped spaces where they operate, industrial power cables must also have tight bending radii, ranging anywhere from 5 to 15 times the overall cable diameter. Jacketing is also crucial to meet these bending radii requirements. Therefore, the use of flexible materials such as PVC, TPE and CPE not only helps these cables bend and flex but also protects them from environmental damage. Because their materials, shielding and jacketing all vary, so do industrial power cables’ installation techniques. Installers can put cables into fixed duct, shafts, and conduit; direct-bury or even immerse the cables in water in water; or lay cables into open-air applications. Depending on where a cable is manufactured and used, it must meet a variety of approvals, including UL, CSA, TC, AWM, RoHS, CE and more. In the U.S., the National Electrical Code (NEC) sets the standards that designers must usually follow. These codes ensure that the cables have key performance features to satisfy machine requirements—for example, to stop the propagation of flames, satisfy the application’s maximum voltage draw, withstand extreme temperatures, and maintain integrity even when exposed to oil. THE BASICS OF MARY GANNON • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_MARYGANNON INDUSTRIAL POWER TRANSMISSION CABLES REFERENCE GUIDE POWER TRANSMISSION Control cables, like this Chainflex continuous flex control design from igus, must be able to withstand high mechanical loads, speeds and accelerations. These Chainflex cables are intended for use in Energy Chain cable carriers and conform to key standards; are capable of torsion—depending on the cable; and can be used in high speeds and accelerations. They are UV resistant, flame retardant, halogen free, and can withstand very high or extremely low temperatures. They are available shielded or unshielded, with a choice of PVC, PUR and TPE outer jackets. Cabling_PTGuide_V2 MG.indd 32 4/29/16 11:15 AM
  • 35.
    • Flexible Control Cables •Continous Flex Cables • Torsion Cables • Halogen-Free Cables • European Cables • Servo Motor Cables Bus Cables • Data Cables • Tray Cables • Silicone Cables • Cable Accessories • Specialty Cables • Stock Available for Immediate Delivery SAB NORTH AMERICA344 Kaplan Drive, Fairfield NJ 07004 Phone: 866-722-2974 • Fax: 973-276-1515 info@sabcable.com • www.sabcable.com C M Y CM MY CY CMY K SAB_PTGuide4-16.indd 33 4/29/16 10:06 AM
  • 36.
    PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE 34 DESIGN WORLD— MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com THE BASICS OF LISA EITEL • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_LISAEITEL SPROCKETS & CHAIN DRIVES Shown here is an MPC sprocket from Martin Sprocket and Gear Inc. for use with a curvilinear timing belt. As a side note, synchronous belt drives work as a replacement for roller-chain drive systems where lubrication is unacceptable. ENGINEERS have used chains in motion systems for more than a century. They are versatile and reliable components to drive machinery and convey products. Now, advances in precision and technology let designers use chains in more applications than ever. Remote installations benefit from long-life chain that requires no lubrication, for example. Chain-based machinery abounds, but the most common industrial designs use roller chain. This type of chain consists of five basic components: pin, bushing, roller, pin link plate and roller link plate. Manufacturers make and assemble each of these subcomponents to precise tolerances and heat treat them to optimize performance. More specifically, modern roller chains exhibit high wear resistance, fatigue strength and tensile strength. Roller-chain applications generally fall into two categories: drives and conveyors. CHAIN-DRIVE APPLICATIONS Most typical drive applications use an ASME/ANSI roller chain wrapped around a driver sprocket (connected directly to the motor or reducer) and the driven sprocket (often connected to a machine’s conveyor head-shaft). This portion of the drive lets the designer build a system that’s either faster or slower by simply changing the ratio of teeth between the drive and driven sprocket. The ratio of the teeth determines the reduction in rpm … so to reduce rpm, the driven sprocket must be larger than the driver sprocket. For example, if the driver sprocket has 15 teeth and the driven sprocket has 30 teeth, the ratio is 2:1, so the rpm is halved at the driven sprocket. This Morse leaf chain from Power Transmission Solutions of Regal-Beloit America is made of roller-chain-type links and riveted pins for maximum strength for a given width. It works as tension linkage or a lifting device at slow speeds. ChainRollerSprockets_PTGuide_V3.indd 34 4/29/16 11:18 AM
  • 37.
    CHAIN, ROLLER &SPROCKET 35DESIGN WORLD — MOTIONmotioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com 4 • 2016 500 400 300 200 100 80 60 40 30 20 10 8 6 4 3 2 1 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.3 0.2 900 700 500 400 300 200 100 80 60 40 30 20 10 8 6 4 3 2 1 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.3 0.2 1,000 800 600 400 300 200 100 80 60 40 30 20 10 8 6 4 3 2 1 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.3 1,000 800 600 400 300 200 100 80 60 40 30 20 10 8 6 5 4 3 2 1 0.8 0.6 0.4 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 200 300 500 700 1,000 2,000 3,000 5,000 7,000 10,000 Roller-chaindrivecapacity(horsepower) Chain strands 4 3 2 1 25T 22T 19T 25T25T 25T 25T 25T 25T 25T 25T22T 21T 21T 21T 21T 21T 21T 19T 19T17T 17T 17T 17T 17T 19T 19T 19T 15T 15T 23T 23T 23T 23T 240200 180160140120100 80 60 50 40 35 Speed of roller chain’s small sprocket (rpm) Roller-chain selection chart This is a Zone Touch case conveyor from Container Handling Systems Corp. (CHSC), which uses chain drives that function as accumulating sections. It has longer life than conventional machines with rollers and fabric belts. It’s also quieter than roller conveyors because its tabletop chain rides low- friction UHMW wear strips and return ways. The easiest way to select a roller chain is using horsepower charts. First, obtain the motor horsepower and rpm of the small driver sprocket. From this, determine the chain size and number of teeth for the driver sprocket. Where roller chain must drive applications that need long life without contamination, pick chain with self-lubricating subcomponents. Where roller chain must drive applications that need high precision, pick chain with precision roller bearings at each link connection. CONVEYOR APPLICATIONS Conveyor chains come in myriad versions to move product horizontally, vertically or even around curved radii. The most common conveyor chains are ASME-style (ANSI-style) attachment chains. These chains include extended pins or plates with tabs onto which parts or product-holding shoes can bolt. Common versions are single-pitch attachment chain, double-pitch attachment chain, hollow-pin chain, curved- attachment chain and plastic-sleeve chain. The attachments let engineers put special fixtures or blocks onto the chain to serve specific conveyor functions. One subtype of conveyor chain is the accumulating conveyor. These stop discrete products even while the chain is still moving, and they do so with minimal friction and wear. Accumulating conveyors are suitable for applications (such as assembly lines) that have products ride through several stations. Tip: Select chain with top rollers or side rollers to let discrete products idle while the conveyor continues to run. Also pick custom attachments or work with manufacturers that make custom fixtures to handle specific parts. Many industries (including the automotive, food and beverage, and consumer-products industries) use custom attachments on their chain-based accumulator conveyors to economically and consistently move. CHAINS ENDURE SUBOPTIMAL ENVIRONMENTS The environments of many chain applications are less than ideal. Some require clean operation without the lubrication that can contaminate products. Others expose chain-driven machinery to weather, water or chemicals. So, chain manufacturers offer several products to meet these challenges. Consider roller chain: One critical area where roller chains need lubrication is the pin-bushing contact zone. Self-lubricating chains stay cleaner because the exterior of the chain is free of excess lube. These chains Morse inverted-tooth chain drives from Power Transmission Solutions of Regal-Beloit America come in HV versions for high capacity at high speed. Silent chain is another option to make smooth, silent drives at slower speeds. ChainRollerSprockets_PTGuide_V3.indd 35 4/29/16 11:19 AM
  • 38.
    • Available fromstock from over 30 Martin locations throughout North America • MTOs in days not weeks: » QD bushed » MST® bushed » Finished bore » Stainless steel » Aluminum » And more... • Over 350 MPC® SKUs on the shelf • Stocked in TB and Minimum Plain Bore • Compatible with all leading Curvilinear Belts Martin's MPC® Sprockets are manufactured in various sizes, dimensions and capacities to meet a variety of industrial requirements.These include a wide range of loads, speeds, and demanding applications such as blowers, conveyors, pumps and mixers. MPC ® SYNCHRONOUS SPROCKETS Direct drop-in for the most popular tooth profile martinsprocket.com • 817 258 3000 MartinSprockett_PTGuide4-16.indd 36 4/29/16 10:11 AM
  • 39.
    CHAIN, ROLLER &SPROCKET 37DESIGN WORLD — MOTIONmotioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com 4 • 2016 A1 chain (sometimes called B1 one-hole chain) has links with one hole and a bent attachment. A2 is similar but always double pitch with two attachment holes per link. K1 (B2 one-hole) and K2 (B2 two-hole) chains both have bent attachments on both sides. D1 (E1) and D3 (E2) chains have extended pins. Single-pitch WA1 (WCB1 one hole) chain and wide-contour WA2 (WCB1 two holes) chain both have bent attachments on one side and one or two holes per link. WSK1 (WCS2 one-hole or WM1) and WSK2 (WCS2 two holes or WM2) is wide-contour chain with straight attachments on both sides. WK1 (WCB2 one-hole) and WK2 (WCB2 two holes) is wide-contour chain with bent attachments. SK1 chain (sometimes called S2 one-hole or M1 chain) has straight attachments on both sides. SK2 (S2 two holes or M2) is the same but with two holes per link. SA1 (S1 one-hole or M35) chain and SA2 (S1 two holes or M35-2) chain both have straight attachments on one side, but the latter has two holes per link. Power-transmission and conveyor chain attachment options Roller-chain sprockets come in myriad versions, but most are shaft-ready designs. The sprocket here is from the Power Transmission Solutions division of Regal-Beloit America. also attract less dust and particulates than regular chains. Such roller chains are useful where oil contamination is a concern, including paper-product or wood-processing industries. SPECIALTY COATINGS AND STAINLESS STEEL CAN DELAY OR PREVENT CORROSION Nickel-plated chains offer another alternative for chain coatings, providing some protection for mildly corrosive environments. Stainless-steel chains offer superior corrosion resistance; however, designers must be aware that regular stainless steels cannot be hardened in the same manner as carbon steel. Therefore, the load carrying capacity of stainless steel is lower than carbon steel. Proper chain maintenance requires periodic inspection. All chains must be checked for damage, wear and chemical attack on a regular basis. Another issue is wear elongation. Eventually roller chains wear so much that they necessitate replacement—typically at 1.5 to 2% (12.180 in./ft to 12.240 in./ft) elongation. Chains may work until they reach 3% elongation, but are at increased risk for suboptimal performance. ChainRollerSprockets_PTGuide_V3.indd 37 4/29/16 11:19 AM
  • 40.
    38 DESIGN WORLD 4 • 2016 www.designworldonline.com PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE COMPRESSION SPRINGS THE BASICS OF LISA EITEL • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_LISAEITEL When hit by an object, oil inside this Zimmer shock absorber floods a spiraling channel from its fat opening to its narrow end. Sold by Intercon Automation Parts, the shock absorber relies on compression springs to return to its extended position after each cycle. ENGINEERS incorporate compression springs in designs that need linear compressive forces and mechanical energy storage— designs such as pneumatic cylinders and push-button controls, for example. The most conventional compression spring is a round metallic wire coiled into a helical form. The most common compression spring, the straight metal coil spring, bends at the same diameter for its entire length, so has a cylindrical shape. Cone-shaped metal springs are distinct in that diameter changes gradually from a large end to a small end; in other words, they bend at a tighter radius at one end. Cone-shaped springs generally go into applications that need low solid height (the total height when compressed) and higher resistance to surging. Whether cylindrical or cone shaped, helical compression springs often go over a rod or fit inside a hole that controls the spring’s movement. Other configuration types include hourglass (concave), barrel (convex), and magazine (in which the wire coils into a rectangular helix). Most compression springs have squared and ground ends. Ground ends provide flat planes and stability under load travel. Squareness is a characteristic that influences how the axis force produced by the spring can be transferred to adjacent parts. Although open ends may be suitable in some applications, closed ends afford a greater degree of squareness. Squared and ground end compression springs are useful for applications that specify high-duty springs; unusually close tolerances on load or rate; minimized solid height; accurate seating and uniform bearing pressures; and minimized buckling. The key physical dimensions and operating characteristics of these springs include their outside diameter (OD), inside diameter, wire diameter, free length, solid height, and spring rate or stiffness. • Free length is the overall length of a spring in the unloaded position. • Solid height is the length of a compression spring under sufficient load to bring all coils into contact with adjacent coils.
 • Spring rate is the change in load per unit deflection in pounds per inch (lb/in.) or Newtons per millimeter (N/ mm). The dimensions, along with the load and deflection requirements, determine the mechanical stresses in the spring. When the design loads a compression spring, the coiled wire is stressed in torsion and the stress is greatest at the wire surface. As the spring is deflected, the load varies, causing a range of operating stress. Stress and stress range affect the life of the spring. The higher the stress range, the lower the maximum stress must be to obtain comparable CompressionSprings_PTGuide_V2.indd 38 4/29/16 11:21 AM
  • 41.
  • 42.
    40 DESIGN WORLD 4 • 2016 www.designworldonline.com PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE life. Relatively high stresses may be used when the stress range is low or if the spring is subjected to static loads only. The stress at solid height must be low enough to avoid permanent damage because springs are often compressed solid during installation. HOW TO SELECT COMPRESSION SPRINGS Here are the most important factors to consider when selecting helical compression springs. The OD of a spring expands under compression. Be sure to consider this if the spring goes into a tube or a bore during assembly. Also remember that the OD of a spring is subject to manufacturing tolerances, just as any mechanical part. If the tolerance range is positive, the spring’s dimensions may be slighter larger and can add to the overall assembly’s envelope size. Most spring suppliers specify work-in-hole diameters for their springs to factor in manufacturing tolerances and the OD’s expected expansion. Look for this information to quickly select from stock spring catalogs, or use this information to better communicate product needs when ordering custom-made springs. Consider loading or travel requirements on the compression spring. The spring rate (also called the spring constant) is the relationship of the force to compress a spring by a unit of length, typically pounds per inch. So with a given load, the product designer can calculate expected spring travel. The further the spring travels, the more stress it endures. So at a critical point, stress can yield the wire material … causing a phenomenon called spring set. After spring set, the spring can’t expand back to its original unloaded length. Even so, in some assemblies, such springs can still function. Stress formulas and online calculators predict spring set. Otherwise, a starting rule of thumb is to avoid solid height by at least 20% (so that there’s always 20% of the spring’s total travel left during the normal range of operation). Compression spring-end types are standard or special. Standard ends are either plain open or closed. Either can be ground or not ground. The ends actually affect the spring rate. So, springs with dissimilar ends that are otherwise identical (with the same total coils, wire size, and OD) have different spring rates. Ground ends require more manufacturing effort. However, combined with closed ends, round ends improve the squareness of the loading force and reduce spring-buckling tendencies. Some manufacturers include closed and ground ends in standard catalog stock design, while some don’t. Be sure to know the difference. Special end examples include reduced coil for screw mounting, offset legs to work as alignment pins, and enlarged coils to snap into ring grooves. Spring materials abound and include everything from carbon steel to exotic alloys. Music wire is a high-carbon spring steel and is the most widely used material. Stainless steel 302 has less strength than music wire, but adds general corrosion resistance. Nickel alloys make a lot of springs branded under various trademarks and are chosen for extreme high or low operating temperatures, specific corrosive environments, and non-magnetic qualities. Springs made of phosphor bronze and beryllium copper are copper alloys for good corrosion resistance and electrical conductivity. This concave (hourglass-shaped) compression spring can stay centered, even in large-diameter bores. Surging is when a spring builds compression-wave motion when subject to vibrations close to its natural frequency. This cone-shaped compression spring resists surging. The larger outer coils collapse before the smaller inner coils, so forces on the spring also increase the spring rate for a natural damping effect. Photo courtesy Lee Spring. This compression spring has reduced ends. This compression spring has a barrel shape for lateral stability. CompressionSprings_PTGuide_V2.indd 40 4/29/16 11:21 AM
  • 43.
    COUPLINGS 41DESIGN WORLD —MOTIONmotioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com 4 • 2016 COUPLINGS:TACKLING TORQUE, MISALIGNMENT AND MORE FOUND in countless applications, couplings are simple devices that connect two shafts together. Couplings are usually found on rotating equipment such as motors to transmit a number of motion parameters. These parameters include the precise transmission of velocity, angular positioning and torque. However, the simplicity of these devices often serves to obscure their importance. Couplings should be designed to allow for some end movement. Two types are available: rigid and flexible. Flexible couplings compensate for misalignment, while rigid designs are used when shafts are already in alignment. Within these two types exists a variety of coupling styles. Rigid couplings include sleeve-style and clamped, or compression style, and require precise alignment. Flexible couplings include bellows, jaw, Oldham, disc and beam styles. RIGID COUPLINGS Rigid couplings are torsionally stiff and best used when shafts are already in proper alignment; parallel shaft misalignment ideally should be well below one thousandth of an inch. One drawback is that they are susceptible to vibration and cannot be run at high speeds. Sleeve-style rigid couplings are suitable for light- to medium-duty applications. The one-piece sleeve— essentially a tube with an inner diameter that is the same as the shafts it is joining together—has two set-screws to fasten it to the shaft. They are easy to use and offer high torque capacity, stiffness and zero backlash. Clamped, or compression style, couplings come in two parts that completely wrap around the shaft. Like most coupling designs, this protects the shaft from damage while providing high torsional holding power. Their advantage comes from their two- piece design, which allows them to be removed for easy maintenance. FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS Flexible couplings can be used where there is a slight amount of misalignment between shafts. They accommodate misalignment while still transmitting torque. Misalignments can be one of several fundamental types, including lateral, axial, angular or skewed. The greater the misalignment, the less efficient the motor is in generating speed and torque. Misalignment also contributes to premature wear including broken shafts, failed bearings and excessive vibration. Flexible couplings are typically the most compliant of components in mechanical motion systems, making torsional stiffness a critical factor in terms of maintaining positional control over a load. Many users of servomotors require the shaft to start and stop multiple times per second, which requires a torsionally stiff coupling to help diminish the settling time between cycles. However, torsionally flexible couplings frequently win out in terms of their MIKE SANTORA • ASSOCIATE EDITOR • @DW_MIKE SANTORA In these images we see an exploded and fully assembled view of GAM’s KHS metal bellows coupling. The conical hubs, and rotationally symmetric construction allow for speeds up to 30,000RPM and are commonly used for test stands, spindle drives and other high speed applications. Couplings_PTGuide_V3.indd 41 4/29/16 11:23 AM
  • 44.
    PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE 42 DESIGN WORLD— MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com Key benefits of bellows couplings include misalignment compensation and precise transmission of velocity, positioning and torque. Bellows couplings are known for their exceptional torsional rigidity, and flexibility in dealing with axial, angular and parallel shaft misalignment. Bellows couplings are typically made from a stainless-steel tube hydroformed to create deep corrugations that make them flexible across axial, angular and parallel shaft misalignments. When coupling shafts, bellows couplings absorb slight misalignments from perpendicularity and concentricity tolerances between the mounting surfaces of the two connected components. Jaw couplings feature two metal hubs and a spider insert, usually made of elastomer, which are fitted together to absorb vibration and shock. The elastomer is available in a variety of hardness and temperature ratings, so the spiders can be chosen for specific applications. Because they are not as torsionally stiff as other couplings, they are better suited to constant motion applications. Jaw couplings are available in two types: straight jaw and curved jaw with zero backlash. Because accuracy of torque transmission can be an issue, straight jaw couplings are not used in most servo applications. Curved jaw couplings, on the other hand, reduce deformation on the spider and the effects of centrifugal forces during high-speed (up to 40,000+ torque capacity in a given body size. Torsionally flexible couplings are naturally better for vibration damping, which is needed just as frequently in continuous motion applications as in cyclic duty applications. Types of motion differ in applications as well. For instance, in manufacturing lines, motion may be either continuous or start and stop. With the latter type, couplings can help dampen all-too-common vibration, diminish the settling time of the system and improve throughput. In contrast, continuous motion applications give greater weight to torsional strength over damping capabilities. Motion applications that require precise motion control, such as in packaging and scanning and inspection, call for zero-backlash couplings. Bellows couplings are commonly used in motion control applications that require precision control and where shaft misalignment is present. If your application requires precision, then it is important to understand the performance factors that are critical for selecting the optimum bellows coupling for the task. There is a difference between backlash—which is a true mechanical clearance, such as that which is found between gear teeth—and torsional deflection, or wind- up, which everything on earth will exhibit to some degree. Most couplings are preloaded to eliminate backlash or are inherently backlash free, like the bellows coupling. But they all have different levels of torsional stiffness, which is often traded off for lateral flexibility during the coupling selection process. Bellows couplings tend to have the highest torsional stiffness of any servomotor coupling, do not handle quite as much misalignment as others, but also do not impose heavy reaction loads onto the shafts and bearings as they flex. In this image we see R+W’s new SP6 series backlash free precision elastomer couplings. Elastomer couplings like this are often used for high speed spindle applications. Internal leaf springs, like those on this R+W BK-LK serve the purpose of making the coupling axially rigid for rotary / linear applications. Couplings_PTGuide_V3.indd 42 4/29/16 11:24 AM
  • 45.
    Making the Impossible…Possible! Electrodeposited Bellows Features: • Highest stroke length(90%) • Highest cycle life • Customization • Repeatability • Media compatibility • High temperature • SS, Titanium, alloys, etc. buy.bellowstech.com Transfer Pressure or Temperature into Linear Movement Transfer Pressure or Temperature into Linear Movement Features: • Zero backlash • Thinnest high strength walls • Seamless construction • Minimal side loading • Diameters as small as 0.020 in (5mm) • Highest cycle life • Design assistance for Customization buy.servometer.com Edge Welded Bellows Metal Bellows ServometerBellows_PTGuide4-16.indd 43 4/29/16 1:21 PM
  • 46.
    PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE 44 DESIGN WORLD— MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com rpm) operation. Both types can easily handle axial motion. If a spider breaks, the driving jaws can still contact the driven jaws directly, maintaining operation, making jaw couplings fail- safe designs. Oldham couplings can be preloaded to eliminate backlash and can handle misalignment of all types depending on the disc material. They are being used more often as an alternative to straight jaw couplings on general industrial equipment such as pumps, valves, gearboxes and conveyor systems. They are versatile and offer long lives when misalignment is an issue. Their three- piece design—two hubs and a torque- transmitting center—makes them easy to install and disassemble. Oldham couplings can be specified in a variety of materials to meet the needs of different applications, for example, if zero backlash is required versus vibration reduction. They are best suited when parallel misalignment may be high. And because of their three-piece design, axial motion is limited. Disc couplings are a logical choice for servomotor and other demanding applications because of their ability to transmit high torque, operate at high or changing speeds, and handle misalignment and system loads. While a coupling’s torque, misalignment and speed capacities need to be evaluated against a system’s requirements, the disc-pack usually is the most important aspect of the coupling’s construction because it will affect all critical performance aspects of the coupling and the system in which it is used. The most common type of disc-pack is made of metal and can be found in different shapes (straight-sided, scalloped edges, square, and so on). In the case of metal disc couplings, double-flex designs need to be used if there is to be any parallel shaft misalignment. The single-flex variety of metal disc coupling is good for angular misalignment but not parallel. This can be quite advantageous in case a user needs to suspend a load between two single-flex couplings, because their lateral stiffness can support the weight of the intermediate component. Beam, or helical couplings are almost always manufactured of aluminum, but stainless-steel versions are also available for use in corrosive environments and increased torque and stiffness. Their one- piece design makes them easy to maintain. Offering zero backlash, they feature spiral cuts that transmit torque and can handle all types of misalignment and angular, parallel or axial motion. Parallel motion is more of a challenge for the single beam design because it must bend in two directions, which causes stress and possible failure. Two designs exist under this style—single and multiple beams. Single beams are best suited to low-torque applications where no parallel misalignment is present, while multiple-beam designs are stiffer, for higher maximum torque capabilities. SPECIAL COUPLINGS Most disc couplings feature a metal disc-pack. However, some have composite disc-packs that are constructed of a special composite material rather than metal. This composite material provides an alternative to metal disc couplings. The advantages include its ability to absorb shock and vibration, its misalignment capacity, electrical isolation and elimination of fatigue and fretting. Whereas metal disc couplings Ringfeder Power Transmission’s Gerwah brand AKN series metal bellows coupling has zero backlash and compensates for angular, axial and radial misalignments. It uses clamping hubs on both sides for shaft connection. Couplings_PTGuide_V3.indd 44 4/29/16 11:24 AM
  • 47.
    Innovative Sensor Technology WINDELEVATOR MOBILE MOTOR SOLAR STEEL PACKAGING CRANE www.kuebler.com/usa ROTARY ENCODERS SOLUTIONS FOR INDUSTRIES FUNCTIONAL SAFETY INCLINOMETERSCOUNTERS AND PROCESS SLIP RINGS BEARINGLESS ENCODERS Kübler Group Kuebler Inc. 10430-J Harris Oaks Boulevard Charlotte, NC 28269 Tel +1 704 705 4710 Toll free +1 855 KUEBLER usa@kuebler.com Innovative Sensor Technology MOTOR CRANE LINEAR MEASUREMENT Pulses for Automation Made possible by Kübler Keubler_PTGuide4-16---2.indd 45 5/2/16 11:39 AM
  • 48.
    PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE 46 DESIGN WORLD— MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com may be less expensive initially, overall cost of composite disc couplings usually will be lower because they are maintenance free and are rated for long life. The ability to accommodate misalignment is a critical aspect of a flexible disc coupling. Misalignment between coupled shafts often exists due to manufacturing tolerances, improper installation or from loads on the system. Parallel, angular and axial misalignment between coupled shafts should all be examined to see if the coupling selected is up to the task. It is important to know a coupling’s misalignment rating as well as the stiffness rating. The stiffer a coupling, the higher the reaction load misalignment will transmit to the coupled items. These reaction loads will have a negative effect on the life of the system. To limit these reaction loads, composite disc couplings are less radially stiff than metal disc couplings. Therefore, they transmit lower reaction loads on the coupled equipment, thereby increasing the life of connected (and often expensive) components. The amount of misalignment that a system can experience will typically determine the selection between a single-flex (one flexible disc-pack) and a double- flex (two flexible disc-pack) coupling. While more compact in size than the double-flex variety, a single-flex coupling will have lower misalignment capacity and higher reaction loads. A common misconception is that single-flex disc couplings cannot accommodate parallel misalignment. Although this is true for metal disc couplings, the design of some disc-pack couplings allow single-flex CD couplings to accommodate limited parallel misalignment. This permits designers to implement a single-flex disc coupling into designs that may not have space for a double-flex coupling. Gear couplings are a type of mechanical device designed to transmit torque between two shafts that are not collinear. The coupling typically consists of two flexible joints, one fixed to each shaft. These joints are often connected by a third shaft called the spindle. Each joint generally consists of a 1:1 gear ratio internal/ external gear pair. The tooth flanks and outer diameter of the external gear are crowned to allow for angular displacement between the two gears. Mechanically, the gears are equivalent to rotating splines with modified profiles. They are called gears because of the relatively large size of the teeth. Gear couplings are generally limited to angular misalignments of 4 to 5°. Gear couplings ordinarily come in two variations: flanged sleeve and continuous sleeve. Flanged gear couplings consist of short sleeves surrounded by a Jaw couplings like the GWE 5104 from Ringfeder have two metal hubs and a spider insert, usually made of elastomer. This particular coupling is available with elastomeric spiders of different degrees of shore hardness for varying damping levels. Couplings_PTGuide_V3.indd 46 4/29/16 11:25 AM
  • 49.
    © 2015 GAM.ALL RIGHTS RESERVED901 E. Business Center Drive, Mount Prospect, IL 60056 Linear Mount Products WDS Bellows style distance coupling DL-DC Right angle Dyna Lite gearbox with hollow output design for easy mounting to linear actuators. Includes output adapter tailored to the actuator PMK Parallel mounting kit EPL-H Inline gearbox, with hollow output design for easy mounting to linear actuators For Everything Between the Motor and Actuator Linear Mount Products include gear reducers, couplings, and mounting kits designed to interface specifically with actuators. We don’t make the actuators... We make them better. Toll Free 888.GAM.7117 | www.gamweb.com/linear | info@gamweb.com 15M_GAM_025_LinearMountAd_I.indd 1 3/24/15 9:53 AMGAM_PTGuide4-16.indd 47 4/29/16 10:14 AM
  • 50.
    48 DESIGN WORLD— MOTION 4 • 2016 perpendicular flange. One sleeve is placed on each shaft so the two flanges line up face to face. A series of screws or bolts in the flanges hold them together. Continuous-sleeve gear couplings feature shaft ends coupled together and abutted against each other, which are then enveloped by a sleeve. Generally, these sleeves are made of metal, but they can also be made of Nylon. Single-joint gear couplings are used to connect two nominally coaxial shafts. In this application, the device is called a gear- type flexible, or flexible coupling. The single joint allows for minor misalignments, such as installation errors and changes in shaft alignment due to operating conditions. These types of gear couplings are generally limited to angular misalignments of 1 ⁄4 to 1 ⁄2°. Magnetic couplings are designed to transfer torque from one shaft to another, but they do so without a physical mechanical connection. This makes them suitable for fluid pumping applications since the connection can be made through thin barriers, which help maintain a hermetically sealed rotary feed through. Since there are no contacting parts in the coupling, wear is virtually nonexistent and the use of permanent magnets means no external power source is needed. Magnetic couplings also have a built-in safety feature where, in the event of an overload on the coupling, it will shift to the next position and keep going. Magnetic couplings can typically only handle light torque loads and applications with either gradual starts, or low rotational inertia of the driven side of the system. They are also rather large in diameter, considering their relatively light torque load. The couplings also have moderate radial loads on support bearings. REFERENCE GUIDE POWER TRANSMISSION THE COUPLING.RW-AMERICA.COM THE PROTECTOR FOR THE SAFETY OF YOUR DRIVE LINE: OUR PRELOADED BALL-DETENT SAFETY COUPLINGS. RW_DesignWorld_HalfIsland_round2.indd 1 4/18/13 8:09 PM "GEAR COUPLINGS ARE A TYPE OF MECHANICAL DEVICE DESIGNED TO TRANSMIT TORQUE BETWEEN SHAFTS THAT ARE NOT COLINEAR." Couplings_PTGuide_V3.indd 48 4/29/16 4:22 PM
  • 51.
    • Thoroughly vettedby industry experts • Over 350 pages covering 17 chapters on power transmission/ motion control products • New chapter on technical and engineering data for easy reference • Individual chapters available for purchase Get the industry “bible” “ “ Order by scanning this QR code, visiting www.ptda.org/Handbook or call +1.312.516.2100 or e-mail ptda@ptda.org Channeling the Power of Industry The definitive hands-on resource and textbook forthe power transmission/motion control industry CYANMAGENTAYELLOWBLACK Kenneth A. Miko Director Category Management & Strategic Accounts BDI Worldwide the FIFTH EDITION of the highly regarded resource I want in every person’s hands. Power Transmission Handbook There’s only one Also available as an eBook PTDA_PTGuide4-16.indd 49 4/29/16 1:25 PM
  • 52.
    50 DESIGN WORLD— MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE ELECTRIC motors that drive industrial machines need some way to control motor speed. And at its most basic level, a motor drive controls the speed of the motor. Some manufacturers refer to a controller and motor together as a drive system. However, from the electrical side of things, the drive is often specifically the electrical components that make up the variable frequency inverter itself. So drives are the interface between the control signals and the motor and include power electronic devices such as SCRs (silicon controlled rectifiers), transistors and thyristors. Matching the correct drive to the type of motor in an application is critical for getting the best fit. A wide range MOTOR DRIVES BASICS OF MILES BUDIMIR • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_MOTION Drives continue to offer more performance in smaller packages. For instance, a new line of drives from Yaskawa, the Sigma-7 family, features a smaller footprint, increased bandwidth, and 24-bit encoding that boosts precision. A package of algorithms corrects machine imperfections, including ripple compensation, anti-resonance and friction model compensation. of drives is available depending on the needs of the specific application and motor type. In general though, drive types typically fall into two categories: dc and ac. DC DRIVES Dc drives control dc motors. A basic dc drive is similar in operation to an ac drive in that the drive controls the speed of the motor. For dc motor control, a common method is a thyristor-based control circuit. These circuits consist of a thyristor bridge circuit that rectifies ac into dc for the motor armature. And varying the voltage to the armature controls the motor’s speed. AC DRIVES Ac drives control ac motors, such as induction motors and synchronous motors. These drives are sometimes known as variable frequency drives (VFDs) or inverters. Ac drives convert ac to dc, then, using a range of different switching techniques, generate variable voltage and frequency outputs to drive the motor. An adjustable speed drive is a general term used sometimes interchangeably with variable speed drive or variable frequency drive. It controls the motor by varying the frequency of the output power. Again, from an electrical perspective, all of these ultimately refer to the frequency converter circuitry. An ac motor’s speed is determined by the number of poles and the frequency. Thus, as frequency is adjusted, the motor’s speed can be controlled as well. A common way to control frequency is by the use of pulse width modulation (PWM). A PWM drive outputs a train of dc pulses to a motor and by modulating the pulse width, makes it either narrower or wider, which delivers an ac current waveform to the motor. Another drive feature, the ability to slow down or stop a motor, is known as regenerative braking or regen braking. It provides a way of stopping a motor’s rotation by using the same solid-state components that control the motor’s voltage. The energy generated from braking can be channeled back into the ac mains or into a braking resistor. One advantage of regenerative drives include their ability to stop a motor faster than it would normally coast to a stop. Drives_PTGuide_V2-mb.indd 50 4/29/16 4:27 PM
  • 53.
    ptpilot.com | 864-439-7537 Sizematters. Especially with gearmotors... Too small = premature failure Too large = high cost & low efficiency Unsure of your drive size? Then go online to PT Pilot® . Simply enter the parameters of your hoist, conveyor, or travel car. PT Pilot® will automatically calculate the optimal horsepower, speed, and gear unit – with or without a VFD. PT Pilot® also provides documentation, pricing, and a 3D CAD drawing for every selection. Visit ptpilot.com. SEW_MCTrends_3-16.indd 51 4/29/16 1:26 PM
  • 54.
    PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE 52 DESIGN WORLD— MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com VFDs VFDs operate by switching their output devices­­—which can be transistors, IGBTs (insulated gate bipolar transistors), or thyristors—on and off. VFDs can be either constant voltage or constant current. Constant voltage types are the most common type of VFD. They use PWM to control both the frequency and the voltage applied to the motor. Why use VFDs? They are a powerful way to control the speed of ac induction motors and are fairly simple and easy to use. Among the benefits of using a VFD for motor speed control is the actual energy savings. Controlling the amount of current drawn by the motor can save a lot on energy costs because the motor will not run at full load all of the time. Especially since Congress passed the Energy Independence and Security Act of 2007 (EISA), motor efficiency has become a top design priority. For instance, single-phase induction machines (specifically, permanent split- capacitor motors) and universal motors, widely used in industrial washers, are managed with simple voltage-control techniques. Contrast this with high-end, high-performance machines where three-phase motors are more common and which use VFDs. Switch reluctance motors (SRMs) are not yet an appropriate alternative because their control schemes are still evolving, but three-phase motors are readily available and may be a smart choice because their VFD control techniques have improved significantly. More importantly, VFD electronics costs have been dropping as well, making them more cost-effective. In the same way, an OEM using a universal motor with simple triac control may now find that a three-phase VFD control will provide better energy efficiency, while OEMs using three-phase/VFD configurations may make the move to technologies like brushless dc motors. Another advantage of VFDs is seen on motor start-up. Without a VFD, an induction motor on start-up has to handle a high initial in-rush current. As the motor speeds up and approaches a constant speed, the current levels off from the peak in-rush values. So with a VFD, the motor’s input starts off with low voltage and a low frequency, avoiding the problem of high in-rush currents. Of course, the main reason any kind of speed control is used on motors is to gain greater and more precise control over motor speed and therefore adjust the motor speed to meet the requirements of the load and reduce energy costs. Another benefit of using a VFD for motor speed control is the reduction of mechanical wear on the motor components. Eliminating the in-rush currents upon start-up gets rid of the excessive torque on the components, and thus increases the life of the motor and reduces maintenance costs and the need for repair. In addition, mechanical stresses on the entire system are greatly reduced. In many cases, mechanical controls such as throttles, valves, dampers and louvers can be removed, thereby reducing mechanical wear and maintenance costs. Further, with reduced mechanical wear, the system output quality may be improved and production times reduced. There are some drawbacks to using VFDs, however. The main one is the possibility of harmonic distortion which can effect the power quality as well as the operation of other machinery. However, VFD manufacturers have developed solutions that mostly eliminate this problem. The Altivar 320 series of drives from Schneider Electric boast connectivity options including Ethernet (Modbus TCP, Ethernet/ IP, Profinet, EtherCAT) or serial (Modbus RTU, CANopen, Profibus DP, DeviceNet) based networks. They also feature embedded safety solutions for simple application requirements to comply with Machinery Directive 2006/42/ EC and simplify certification. Drives_PTGuide_V2-mb.indd 52 4/29/16 11:31 AM
  • 55.
    Power Transmission andMotion Control Solutions for Industrial Applications The Power Brands in Power Transmission Ameridrives Couplings Ameridrives Power Tranmission Bauer Gear Motor Bibby Turboflex Boston Gear Delroyd Worm Gear Formsprag Clutch Guardian Couplings Huco Dynatork Industrial Clutch Inertia Dynamics Kilian Manufacturing Lamiflex Couplings Marland Clutch Matrix International Nuttall Gear Stieber Clutch Svendborg Brakes TB Wood’s Twiflex Limited Warner Electric Warner Linear Wichita Clutch www.AltraMotion.com Altra_PTGuide4-16.indd 53 4/29/16 1:29 PM
  • 56.
    Worm gear Spiral bevelgear Hypoid gear Spiroid® or Helicon® gear Spiroid® gear Helicon® gear 54 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE LISA EITEL • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_LISAEITEL THE PRIMARY function of a gear is to mesh with other gears to transmit altered torque and rotation. In fact, gearing can change the speed, torque and direction of motion from a drive source. When two gears with an une qual number of teeth engage, the mechanical advantage makes their rotational speeds and torques different. In the simplest setups, gears are flat with spur teeth (with edges parallel to the shaft) and the input gear’s shaft is parallel to that of the output. Spur gears mostly roll through meshing, so can be 98% or more efficient per reduction stage. However, there is some sliding between tooth surfaces, and initial tooth-to-tooth contact occurs along the whole tooth width at once, causing small shock loads that induce noise and wear. Sometimes lubrication helps mitigate these issues. In slightly more complex setups, parallel-axis gearsets have helical gears that engage at an angle between 90° and 180° for more tooth contact and higher torque capacity. Helical reducers are suitable for higher- horsepower applications where long-term operational efficiency is more important than initial cost. Helical gear teeth engage gradually over the tooth faces for quieter and smoother operation than spur gearsets. They also tend to have higher load capacities. One caveat: Angled tooth contact generates thrust that the machine frame must resolve. No matter the subtype, most parallel-axis gearsets have gear teeth with tailored involute profiles—customized versions of the rolled trace off a circle with an imaginary string. Here, mating gears have tangent pitch circles for smooth rolling engagement that minimizes slipping. A related value, the pitch point, is where one gear initially contacts its mate’s pitch point. Involute gearsets also have an action path that passes through the pitch point tangent to a base circle. Besides parallel-axis gearsets, there are non-parallel and right-angle gearsets. These have input and output shafts that protrude in different directions to give engineers more mounting and design options. The gear teeth of such gearsets are either bevel (straight, spiral or zerol), worm, hypoid, skew or crossed-axis helical gears. The most common are bevel gearsets with teeth cut on an angular or conical shape. Hypoid gears are much like spiral-bevel gearsets, but the input and output shaft axes don’t intersect, so it’s easier to integrate supports. In contrast, zerol gearsets have curved teeth that align with the shaft to minimize thrust loads. GEARING & GENERAL GEAR DESIGN THE BASICS Shown here are Spiroid and Helicon brand gearing. Suitable for right-angle power transmission in applications with high power density requirements, these skew-axis gear forms operate on non-intersecting and non-parallel axes. Compared to traditional right-angel bevel and worm gearing, the gear-centerline offset of Spiroid and Helicon branded gearing allows for more tooth-surface contact and results in higher contact ratios. This boosts torque capacity and smooths motion transmission. Spiroid brand gears use advanced software and tooling to make the proprietary gearing fit specific application requirements. The gearsets are quiet, stiff, and compact, delivering ratios from 3:1 to 300:1 and beyond. Gearing_PTGuide_V4.LE.indd 54 4/29/16 11:34 AM
  • 57.
    259 Elm Place,Mineola, NY 11501 Phone: 516.248.3850 | Fax: 516.248.4385 Email: info@khkgears.us Now available factory direct GEARS KHK-USA_9x10.875.indd 1 2/25/16 11:48 PMKHK_3-16_MCTrends.indd 55 4/29/16 1:30 PM
  • 58.
    Zerol bevel gearsetsare a special veriation of straight right-angle bevel sets. Worm gearsets are rugged and don’t let designs backdrive ... which can eliminate the need for brakes. ... but helical gearsets are more efficient. Cross-axis sets are another option. Spur gearsets are simple ... Planetary gearsets are compact and run to 10,000 rpm. Here, a lightweight Schaeffler differential for a hybrid vehicle has an axial spline to boost efficiency. Note there’s some overlap between bevel and worm applications. Case in point: The MS-Graessner DynaGear below is a single-stage bevel gear with a 30:1 ratio. Common gear options Pitch circle Reaction force 56 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com GENERAL SPEED REDUCERS, SHAFT-MOUNT SETS, WORM DRIVES THE BASICS OF GEARING: GEAR reducers, also known as speed reducers, are a component of many mechanical, electrical, and hydraulic motors. Essentially it is a gear or series of gears combined in such a manner as to alter the torque of a motor. Typically, the torque increases in direct proportion to the reduction of rotations per unit of time. Speed reducers come in two varieties; base mounted and shaft mounted. Shaft- mounted types come in two versions. One is truly shaft mounted in that the input shaft of the drive motor supports it … with a special coupling to address torque reactions. The other mounts to the machine housing so the input shaft doesn’t support the reducer’s weight or address torque reactions. By the American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA) definition, engineers apply the term “speed reducer” to units operating at pinion speeds below 3,600 rpm or pitch-line velocities below 5,000 fpm. (The AGMA is an international group of gear manufacturers, gear consultants, academics, and gear users and suppliers.) Reducers operating at speeds higher than these are called high-speed units. Manufacturers base catalog ratings and engineering specifications for speed reducers on these AGMA standards. There are as many types of speed reducers as there are gear types. Consider reducers in which the input and output shafts are at different angles. The most common of these are worm-gear reducers. Worm gear reducers are used in low to moderate-horsepower applications. They offer low initial cost, high ratios, and high output torque in a small package, along with a higher tolerance for shock loading then helical gear reducers. In a traditional setup, a cylindrical toothed worm engages a disk-shaped wheel gear with teeth on its circumference or face. Most worm gears are cylindrical with teeth of consistent size (for one pitch diameter for the length). Some worm-gear reducers use a double-enveloping tooth geometry, though—with a pitch diameter that goes from deep into short and back to deep—so more teeth engage. No matter the version, most wheel gears in worm-based reducers sport cupped teeth edges that wrap around the worm shaft during engagement. In many cases, the sliding engagement lowers efficiency but extends life, as worm- gear mating holds a film of lubricant during operation. The ratio of a worm-gear ratio is the number of wheel teeth to the number of threads (starts or leads) on the worm. A FEW WORDS ON GEARHEADS A gearhead is similar to a gear reducer; however, a gearhead doesn’t just reduce speed. Engineers use them wherever an application calls for high torque at low speed. It reduces a load’s reflected mass inertia, which makes accelerating heavy loads easier, enabling designs to run off smaller motors. Gearheads come in a variety of styles from basic spur gearheads to more complex planetary gearheads and harmonic type gearheads, each with their own characteristics and suitable applications. One caveat: In some applications, gearhead backlash may become an issue. In this case, consider using a gearhead with low or zero backlash. LISA EITEL • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_LISAEITEL The ratio of a helical or bevel gearset is simply the number of teeth in the larger gear divided by the number of teeth in the smaller gear. Other gear types such as planetary gears have more complex ratio relationships. REFERENCE GUIDE POWER TRANSMISSION Gearing_PTGuide_V4.LE.indd 56 4/29/16 11:34 AM
  • 59.
    Neugart 8-15.indd 574/29/16 1:32 PM
  • 60.
    PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE 58 DESIGN WORLD— MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com SERVO SYSTEMS are precision-motion setups with feedback and (in most cases) fairly stringent accuracy demands. So for these designs, engineers should pick servogear reducers with good torsional stiffness, reliable output torque and minimal backlash. OEMs tasked with integrating servo systems should look for quiet reducers that easily mount to the motor and require little or (if possible) no maintenance. In fact, a lot of advanced machinery integrates servogears into application- specific electromechanical arrangements, and several of these arrangements are common enough to have specific labels. Here is a look at some of the most widespread. Gearmotor: This complete motion component is a gear reducer integrated with an ac or dc electric motor. Usually the motor includes the gears on its output (typically in the form of an assembled gearbox) to reduce speed and boost available output torque. Engineers use gearmotors in machines that must GEARBOXES, SPECIALTY GEARHEADS & SERVOGEARSETS THE BASICS OF GEARING: LISA EITEL • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_LISAEITEL Interoll conveyors for material handling use power rollers that incorporate precision gearing. move heavy objects. Speed specifications for gearmotors are normal speed and stall-speed torque. Gearbox: This is a contained gear train … a mechanical unit or component consisting of a series of integrated gears. Planetary gears are common in integrated gearboxes. Planetary gears: Particularly common in servo systems, these gearsets consist of one or more outer planet gears that revolve about a central, or sun, gear. Typically, the planet gears mount on a movable arm or carrier that rotates relative to the sun gear. The sets often use an outer ring gear, or annulus, that meshes with the planet gears. The gear ratio of a planetary set requires calculation, because there are several ways they can convert an input rotation to an output rotation. Typically, one of these three gear wheels stays stationary; another is an input that provides power to the system, and the last acts as an output that receives power from the driving motor. The ratio of input rotation to output rotation depends on the number of teeth in each gear and on which component is held stationary. Planetary gearsets offer several advantages over other gearsets. These include high power density, the ability to get large reductions from a small volume, multiple kinematic combinations, pure torsional reactions and coaxial shafting. Another advantage to planetary gearbox arrangements is power-transmission efficiency. Losses are typically less than 3% per stage, so rather than waste energy on mechanical losses inside the gearbox, these gearboxes transmit a high proportion of the energy for productive motion output. Gearing_PTGuide_V4.LE.indd 58 4/29/16 11:35 AM
  • 61.
    GEARING 59DESIGN WORLD —MOTIONmotioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com 4 • 2016 Planetary gearbox arrangements distribute load efficiently, too. Multiple planets share transmitted load between them, which greatly increases torque density. The more planets in the system, the greater load ability and the higher the torque density. This arrangement is also very stable due to the even distribution of mass and increased rotational stiffness. Disadvantages include high bearing loads, inaccessibility and design complexity. In servo systems, besides boosting output torque, gearboxes impart another benefit—reducing settling time. Settling time is a problem when motor inertia is low compared to load inertia … an issue that’s the source of constant debate (and regular improvement) in the industry. Gearboxes reduce the reflected inertia at the controls by a factor equal to the gear reduction squared. These are self-lubricating metal-core gears from Intech for applications with frequent start-and-stop stop cycles and high torque that need power-transmission components to resist shock. DieQua offers more gearboxes Are You Selecting The Right Technology? Whether your application is for precise motion control or for general power transmission, there are several gear technologies that can do the job. But which one does it best? Only DieQua offers the widest range of gearmotors, speed reducers and servo gearheads along with the experience and expertise to help you select the optimal solution to satisfy your needs. www.diequa.com 630-980-1133 Helical GearmotorsWorm Reducers Planetary Gearheads ServoWorm Gearheads Spiral Bevel Gearboxes Precision Cycloidals If you are using gearboxes, you should be talking to DieQua! For Power Transmission For Motion Control half page horizontal ad.indd 1 1/19/16 3:00 PM Gearing_PTGuide_V4.LE.indd 59 4/29/16 11:35 AM
  • 62.
    Flexspline Circular spline PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE 60 DESIGNWORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com This is a progression of flex-spline tooth engagement with circular-spline teeth. The profile of Harmonic Drive gear teeth lets up to 30% of the teeth engage ... for higher stiffness and torque than gearsets with involute teeth. flexspline so the bearing is at the same axial location as the flexspline teeth. The flexspline wall near the brim of the cup conforms to the same elliptical shape of the bearing. This conforms the teeth on the outer surface of the flexspline to the elliptical shape. That way, the flexspline effectively has an elliptical gear-pitch diameter on its outer surface. The circular spline is a rigid circular steel ring with teeth on the inside diameter. It is usually attached to the housing and does not rotate. Its teeth mesh with those of the flexspline. The tooth pattern of the flexspline engages the tooth profile of the circular spline along the major axis of the ellipse. This engagement is like an ellipse inscribed concentrically within a circle. Mathematically, an inscribed ellipse contacts a circle at two points. However, gear teeth have a finite height, so two regions (instead of two points) engage. The pressure angle of the gear teeth transforms the output torque’s tangential force into a radial force acting on the wave-generator bearing. The teeth of the flexspline and circular spline engage near the ellipse’s major axis and disengage at the ellipse’s minor axis. The flexspline has two less teeth than the circular spline, so every time the wave generator rotates one revolution, the flexspline and circular spline shift by two teeth. The gear ratio is: number of flexspline teeth ÷ (number of flexspline teeth - number of circular spline teeth) The tooth engagement motion (kinematics) of the strain wave gear is different than that of planetary or spur gearing. The teeth engage in a manner that lets up to 30% of the teeth (60 for a 100:1 gear ratio) engage at all times. This contrasts with maybe six teeth for a planetary gear, and one or two teeth for a spur gear. In addition, the kinematics enable the gear teeth to engage on both sides of the tooth flank. Backlash is the difference between the tooth space and tooth width, and this difference is zero in strain-wave gearing. As part of the design, the manufacturer preloads the gear teeth of the flexspline against those of the circular spline at the ellipse’s major axis. The preload is such that the stresses are well below the material’s endurance limit. As the gear teeth wear, this elastic radial deformation acts like a stiff spring to compensate for space between teeth that would otherwise increase in backlash. This lets the performance remain constant over the life of the gear. Strain-wave gearing offers high torque-to-weight and torque-to-volume ratios. Lightweight construction and single-stage gear ratios (to 160:1) let engineers use the gears in applications requiring minimum weight or volume ... especially useful for designs with small motors. Another tooth profile for strain-wave gearing is the S tooth design. This design lets more gear teeth engage for a doubling of torsional stiffness and peak torque rating, as well as longer life. The S tooth form doesn’t use the involute tooth curve of a tooth. Instead, it uses a series of pure convex and concave circular arcs that match the loci of engagement points dictated by theoretical and CAD analysis. The increased root filet radius makes the S tooth much stronger than an involute curve gear tooth. It resists higher bending (tension) loads while maintaining a safe stress margin. STRAIN-WAVE gearing is a special gear design for speed reduction. It uses the metal elasticity (deflection) of a gear to reduce speed. (Strain- wave gearing sets are also known as Harmonic Drives, a registered trademark term of Harmonic Drive Systems Inc.) Benefits of using strain-wave gearing include zero backlash, high torque, compact size and positional accuracy. A strain-wave gearset consists of three components: wave generator, flexspline and circular spline. The wave generator is an assembly of a bearing and steel disk called a wave generator plug. The outer surface of the wave generator plug has an elliptical shape machined to a precise specification. A specialty ball bearing goes around this plug to conform to the same elliptical shape of the wave generator plug. Designers typically use the wave generator as the input (attached to a servomotor). The flexspline— usually acting as the output—is a thin- walled steel cup. Its geometry makes the cup walls radially compliant but torsionally stiff (because the cup has a large diameter). Manufacturers machine the gear teeth into the outer surface near the open end of the cup (near the brim). The cup has a rigid boss at one end for mounting. The wave generator goes inside the STRAIN-WAVE GEARING THE BASICS OF GEARING: LISA EITEL • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_LISAEITEL Gearing_PTGuide_V4.LE.indd 60 4/29/16 11:36 AM
  • 63.
    247 Lynnfield Street,Peabody, MA 01960 • 800.921.3332 • www.HarmonicDrive.net Harmonic Drive is a registered trademark of Harmonic Drive LLC. Robonaut image courtesy of NASA/JPL-Caltech. DW Robotics Ad.indd 1 9/15/15 2:04 PM Harmonic Drives 10-15_Robotic Supp.indd 61 4/29/16 1:33 PM
  • 64.
    62 DESIGN WORLD— MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE Most of the time, design engineers pair gearsets with electric motors. These setups get a roman-nu- meral service class number (I, II, or III, for example) that equates to the standalone gear-set service factor (in this case, 1.0, 1.41, or 2.0). This chart provides values for C-face motor input (flanged) or directly coupled (non-flanged) motors. It lets the design engineer verify that with 15:1 reduction, a 726 flanged gearbox outputs 116.7 rpm … and when used with a 2 hp motor, outputs 994 in.-lb of torque. Gearing_PTGuide_V4.LE.indd 62 4/29/16 11:36 AM
  • 65.
    CONSULTATION, CUSTOM GEAR DESIGN& GEAR ANALYSIS THE BASICS OF GEARING: CUSTOM gearboxes are increasingly common, mainly because they’re easier than ever to manufacture to specification. That’s not to say that the design work isn’t challenging. However, modern manufacturing lets some suppliers make gearboxes and components to meet specific application requirements. New supplier approaches to giving engineering support as well as new machine tools, automation and design software now let OEMs and end users get reasonably priced gearing even in modest volumes. When enlisting help from a consultant or manufacturer, an engineer is more likely to get gearing that mounts properly and performs to specification after reviewing the following and answering as many of these questions as possible: • What’s the input speed and horsepower? • What’s the gearbox target output speed or output torque? This partially defines the required gear ratio. • What are the characteristics of use? How many hours per day will the gearbox run? Will it need to withstand shock and vibration? • How overhung is the load? Is there internal overhung load? Remember that bevel gears usually can’t accommodate multiple supports, as their shafts intersect … so one or more gears often overhang. This load can deflect the shaft which misaligns the gears, in turn degrading tooth contact and life. One potential fix here is straddle bearings on each side of the gear. • Does the machine need a shaft or hollow-bore input ... or a shaft or hollow- bore output? • How will the gearing be oriented? For instance, if specifying a right-angle worm gearbox, does the machine need the worm over or under the wheel? Will the shafts protrude from the machine horizontally or vertically? • Does the environment necessitate corrosion-resistant paints or stainless-steel housing and shafts? Service factor: The starting point for most gearbox manufacturers is to define a service factor. This adjusts for such concerns as type of input, hours of use per day, and any shock or vibration associated with the application. An application with an irregular shock (a grinding application, for example) needs a higher service factor than one that’s uniformly loaded. Likewise, a gearbox that runs intermittently needs a lower factor than one used 24 hours a day. Class of service: Once the engineer determines the service factor, the next step is to define a class of service. A gearbox paired to LISA EITEL • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_LISAEITEL Shown here is a MS-Graessner PowerGearHS, a high-speed bevel gearbox for dynamic servo drivetrains. Efficiency reaches 98% and torque reaches 45 to 360 Nm (with emergency- stop torques of 90 to 720 Nm) depending on the version. GEARING 63DESIGN WORLD — MOTION4 • 2016 Gearing_PTGuide_V4.LE.indd 63 4/29/16 11:37 AM
  • 66.
    Trained machinists runthis machine shop to let gear manufacturer NORD Gear Corp. accommodate customer- specific requirements. The Waunakee, Wis. shop processes 20 to 30 specially designed and machined components each day. PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE 64 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com a plain ac motor driving an evenly loaded, constant-speed conveyor 20 hours per day may have a service class 2, for example. This information comes from charts from gearbox manufacturers that list classes of service. To use these charts, the design engineer must know input horsepower, application type and target ratio. For instance, suppose that an application needs a 2-hp motor with a 15:1 ratio. To use the chart, find the point where 2 hp and 15:1 ratio intersect. In this case, that indicates a size 726 gearbox. According to one manufacturer’s product-number system, size 726 defines a gearbox that has a 2.62 center distance. Such charts also work in reverse, to let engineers confirm the torque or speed of a given gearbox size. Overhung load: After the designer picks a size, the gearbox manufacturer’s catalog or website lists values for the maximum overhung load that is permissible for that sized unit. Tip: If the load in an application exceeds the allowed value, increase the gearbox size to withstand the overhung load. Mounting: At this point, the designer or manufacturer has defined the gearbox size and capability. So, the next step is to pick the mounting. Common mounting configurations abound, and gearbox manufacturers offer myriad options for each unit size. A flanged input with hollow bore for a C-frame motor combined with an output shaft projecting to the left may be the most common mounting, but there are many other choices. Options such as mounting feet for either above or below the body of the gearbox, hollow outputs, and input and output configuration are all possible. All gearbox manufacturers list their mounting options as well as dimensional information in catalogs and websites. Lubricant, seals and motor integration: Most manufacturers can ship gearboxes filled with lubrication. However, most default to shipping units empty to let users fill them on site. For applications where there is a vertical shaft down, some manufacturers recommend a second set of seals. Because many gearboxes eventually mount to a C-frame motor, many manufacturers also offer to integrate motors onto gearboxes and ship assemblies as single units. Work with consultants and even use custom gear designs if the application needs a unique motor-gearbox combination. Some combinations are more efficient. Getting a pre-engineered geamotor ensures that the motor-gearbox combination will perform to specification. Also remember that today’s custom and standard gearing aren’t mutually exclusive. Where fully custom gearboxes aren’t feasible (if quantities aren’t high enough, for example) consider working with manufacturers that sell gearboxes built to order from modular subcomponents. Otherwise, look for manufacturers that leverage the latest CAD and CAM software and machine tools to streamline post-processing work and reduce the cost of one-offs. One final tip: Once the gearmotor has been chosen and installed in the application, perform several test runs in sample environments that replicate typical operating scenarios. If the design exhibits unusually high heat, noise or stress, repeat the gear-selection process or contact the manufacturer. KHK USA Inc. manufactures gearing to operate in ratchets and pawls, which is mechanical gearing that transmits intermittent rotary motion. They only let shafts rotate in one direction. Gearing_PTGuide_V4.LE.indd 64 4/29/16 11:39 AM
  • 67.
    ® visit us atbodine-electric.com | info@bodine-electric.com | 800.726.3463 (USA)visit us at bodine-electric.com | info@bodine-electric.com | 800.726.3463 (USA) When second-best is just not good enough. From design to delivery, you can count on us to give you the best gearmotor solution for your application. When your product demands perfect performance every time, call Bodine. ® BOD designWorld-swoosh-full page.indd 1 3/21/16 9:58 AM Bodine_PTGuide4-16.indd 65 4/29/16 1:33 PM
  • 68.
    66 DESIGN WORLD— MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE GEARMOTORS TECHNICAL REVIEW OF GEARMOTORS are a fairly well-established technology. And recently, there is renewed interest in gearmotors, following a trend in integrated systems in general. More specifically, rising energy costs are driving demand for improved process efficiencies. This presents an opening for gearmotors that can be used in a variety of applications and represents a tremendous opportunity for global energy savings. Essentially, a gearmotor is a type of gear reducer based around an ac or dc electric motor. In fact, in a gearmotor, the gear and the motors are combined into one unit. It delivers high torque at low horsepower or low speed. The speed specifications for these motors are normal speed and stall-speed torque. These motors use gears, typically assembled as a gearbox, to reduce speed, which makes more torque available. Gearmotors are most often used in applications that need a lot of force to move heavy objects. By and large, most industrial gearmotors use ac motors, typically fixed-speed motors. However, dc motors can also be used as gearmotors, a lot of which are used in automotive applications. Gearmotors have a number of advantages over other types of motor/gear combinations. Perhaps most importantly, gearmotors can simplify design and implementation by eliminating the step of separately designing and integrating the motors with the gears, thus reducing engineering costs. Another benefit of gearmotors, if sized properly, is that having the right combination of motor and gearing can prolong gearmotor life and allow for optimum power management and use. Also, because gearmotors are integrated units, they eliminate the need for couplings and also eliminate any potential alignment problems. Such problems are common when a separate motor and gear reducer are connected together and result in more MILES BUDIMIR • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_MOTION engineering time and cost as well as the potential for misalignment causing bearing failure and ultimately reduced useful life. Gear reducers, also known as speed reducers, are a component of many mechanical, electrical and hydraulic motors. Essentially, it is a gear or series of gears combined in such a manner as to alter the torque of a motor. Typically, the torque increases in direct proportion to the reduction of rotations per unit of time. A gearbox, or gear train, is a mechanical unit or component consisting of a series of integrated gears. Planetary gears are a common type of integrated gearing in a gearbox. Advances in gearmotor technology include the use of new specialty materials, coatings and bearings, and also improved gear tooth designs that are optimized for noise reduction, increase in strength and improved life, all of which allows for improved performance in smaller packages. Conceptually, motors and gearboxes can be mixed and matched as needed to best fit the application, but in the end, the complete gearmotor is the driving factor. There are a number of motors and gearbox types that can be combined; for example, a right angle wormgear, planetary and parallel shaft gearbox can be combined with permanent magnet dc, ac induction, or brushless dc motors. Though there are a number of different motor and gearbox combinations available, not just any one will work for a specific application. There will be certain combinations that will be more efficient and cost-effective than others. Knowing the application and having accurate ratings for the motor and gearbox is the foundation for successfully integrating a gearmotor into a system. Gearmotors can be simply a motor with a simple gear attached or as complex as this unit from Nord Gear incorporating bevel gears with a 90-degree hollow-shaft output. An in-line gearmotor design featuring a helical gearset from Nord Gear is one common type of gearmotor. Gearmotors_PTGuide_V3.indd 66 4/29/16 11:40 AM
  • 69.
    YOUR NEEDS. OUR EXPERTISE. GroschoppInc. 420 15th St. NE Sioux Center, IA 51250 www.groschopp.com Phone: 712.722.4135 Toll-free: 800.829.4135 Fax: 712.722.1445 Email: sales@groschopp.com © 2016 Groschopp Inc. Groschopp_PTGuide4-16.indd 67 4/29/16 1:34 PM
  • 70.
    PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE 68 DESIGN WORLD— MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com LEADSCREWS BASICS OF MILES BUDIMIR SENIOR EDITOR @DW_MOTION Anti-backlash leadscrew assemblies, such as the CMP Series from Haydon Kerk, use a general purpose self- compensating nut in a small compact package. The standard CMP Series assembly uses a self-lubricating acetal nut, axially preloaded, on a 303 stainless steel screw. LEADSCREWS are one of many linear actuator components that also include ballscrews as well as belt and pulley systems, linear motors and belt-drive systems. A leadscrew, also known as a power screw, is a threaded rod or bar that translates rotational motion into linear motion. Leadscrews generate sliding rather than rolling friction between a nut and the screw. Consequently, higher friction means a lower overall efficiency. And efficiency, when talking about leadscrews, is simply the ability to convert torque to thrust while minimizing mechanical losses. Leadscrews are a staple of motion designs, driving axes on machines big and small alike. They usually sport higher ratings than comparable ballscrews thanks to more contact between the nut and screw load surfaces. Now, innovations in materials and helix geometry address old issues associated with leadscrew friction, bringing it down to better than 0.10 in some cases—good for fast and dynamic applications. In fact, there’s also been an uptick in leadscrew use because of proliferating machines for 3D printing, manufacturing and medical applications. Leadscrews_PTGuide_V3.indd 68 4/29/16 2:51 PM
  • 71.
    LEADSCREWS 69DESIGN WORLD —MOTIONmotioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com 4 • 2016 Smaller leadscrews have been finding their way into many applications, from vending machines to medical equipment. Miniature leadscrews such as the MINI Series from Haydon Kerk, are designed to minimize backlash with drag torque of less than 1 oz.-in. and in some sizes as low as 0.1 oz.-in. Industries across the board are adopting new leadscrew components and linear systems. Designers of kiosks and automated retail applications, for instance, are looking for ways to simplify machines, reduce design weight and simplify assembly and maintenance. In a similar way, both additive manufacturing (3D printing) and traditional subtractive processes—plasma cutter, laser and waterjet manufacturing—are driving new leadscrew uses. The same holds true for factory automation. Leadscrew manufacturing processes can determine the performance and cost of the leadscrew. For instance, there are three ways leadscrews can be manufactured; by machining, rolling, or grinding. Ground leadscrews are the most expensive and are generally considered to be the highest performing as well. Another determinant of efficiency is the thread type. Acme threads are the simplest to produce, the most inexpensive, but also among the least efficient. Other types include buttress threads and square threads, which generally have the least amount of friction and higher efficiencies. Leadscrews have a number of advantages including a relatively high load carrying capacity. They are also compact and simple to design into a system with a minimal number of parts. The motion is also generally smooth and quiet and requires little maintenance. Leadscrews also work well in wash-down environments because the materials used and the lubricant-free operation allows total immersion in water or other fluids. On the other hand, leadscrews do not have high efficiencies. Because of lower efficiency ratings they’re not used in applications requiring continuous power transmission. There’s also a high degree of friction on the threads meaning that the threads can wear quickly. Because a leadscrew nut and screw mate with rubbing surfaces they have relatively higher friction and stiction compared to mechanical parts that mate with rolling surfaces and bearings. There are several parameters that help determine leadscrew performance. These include thrust, speed, accuracy and repeatability. The two most important factors in determining the performance of a leadscrew are the screw pitch and lead. The pitch is the linear distance between the threads while the lead is the linear distance the nut travels. Speed is another critical parameter. Leadscrews have a critical velocity, which is the rotational velocity limit of the screw. Reaching this limit induces vibrations in the leadscrew. Accuracy and repeatability are also important factors. The accuracy of a leadscrew is a measure of how close to a desired end point the assembly can move a load to within a given tolerance. The accuracy of the leadscrew will mostly determine the system’s accuracy. On the other hand, repeatability is a measure of how well a leadscrew assembly can repeatedly move a load to the same position. Leadscrews_PTGuide_V3.indd 69 4/29/16 11:44 AM
  • 72.
    70 DESIGN WORLD— MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE 70 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com LINEAR-MOTION GUIDES, RAILS & SYSTEMS TECHNICAL SUMMARY OF LINEAR-MOTION systems are essential in all sorts of applications, including everything from manually operated industrial drawers to advanced Cartesian robots. Mechanisms that include the former operate without power, using inertia or manual power to move loads. Components to complete the latter include ready-to-install drive and guidance designs … in the form of self-contained actuators or linear-motion machinery subsections. Some designs simply rely on the rotary-to-linear mechanism or actuator structure for total load support. However, most industrial linear designs have pneumatics, linear motors or motor- driven, rotary-to-linear mechanisms to advance attached loads, as well as rails that guide and support the loads. Here, linear rails, rotary rails, guide rails, linear slides and linear ways are just a few options to facilitate single-axis motion. Their main function is to support and guide load with minimal friction along the way. Typical linear- motion arrangements consist of rails or shafts, carriages and runner blocks, and some type of moving element. Engineers differentiate these systems by the type of surface interaction (sliding or rolling), the type of contact points, and (if applicable) how the design’s rolling- element recirculation works. In fact, slides and rails are more advanced than ever, with advances in materials and lubrication setups (to help designs last longer in harsh applications), innovative rail geometries (to help designs withstand more misalignment and load than ever), and modular guide mounts (to boost load capacity and minimize deflection). No matter the ultimate installation, linear- motion rails, guides, and ways enable motion along an axis or rail either through sliding or rolling contact. Myriad moving elements can produce either sliding or rolling support: ball bearings, cam roller sliders, dovetail bearings, linear roller bearings, magnetic bearings, fluid bearings, X-Y tables, linear stages and machine slides. LISA EITEL • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_LISAEITEL This Schaeffler INA assembly has a linear recirculating-ball bearing and guideway. Called the KUVE-B-HS, it has conventional steel rolling elements for speeds to 10 m/sec. Plastic in the recirculation mechanism prevents rolling- element tilting and pulse loads. The guides run on standard guideways. Heavy Duty Slides from HepcoMotion work for long-length transport applications such as pick-and-place or robot-translation stages. V slide rails are made from bearing-grade steel in sections to four meters long. The V slides typically bolt to aluminum extrusions or supporting back plates. A guide wheel bearing with matching V geometry rolls on the V slide raceway. Image courtesy Bishop-Wisecarver LinearMotion_PTGuide_V3.indd 70 4/29/16 11:48 AM
  • 73.
  • 74.
    PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE 72 DESIGN WORLD— MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com One classic rail with sliding contact is a dovetail slide, and one classic rail with rolling contact is a ball rail with a recirculating system. Sliding-contact bearings are the more straightforward type of linear-motion component. These consist of a carriage or slide that rides over a surface known as a rail, way or guide. Sliding contact occurs when the moving part directly contacts the rail section. Older versions of these sliding-contact rails generated considerable friction during movement, so were only suitable for basic applications. However, newer versions have self- lubricating sleeves and other features to boost positioning accuracy and repeatability. In contrast, rolling-element linear-motion systems are either recirculating or non-recirculating. Non-recirculating types use rolling elements such as bearing balls, rollers and cam followers for movement. Recirculating types use some type of moving platform that houses a bearing block. This bearing block contains raceways with rolling elements that let the platform move along the rail with little friction. Recirculating types include linear guides and ball-bushing bearings. More specifically, rolling-element linear guides come in two basic versions—those with circular arc grooves and those with Gothic arc grooves. These groove choices are a result of industry evolution that’s enabled new geometries for better load handling. Circular arc grooves contact bearing balls at two points. The Gothic arch contacts the balls at four points for bidirectional load capacity. Another option for rolling-element linear motion is ball bushings that have a bushing nut lined with recirculating bearing balls. This nut rides along a round shaft to allow axial movement. History lesson: In 1946, the manufacturer Thomson introduced ball bushings, and the technology established the basic mechanism of rolling- element linear-motion bearings. In today’s designs, the bushings may also have integral flanges to support axial loads. SLIDING-CONTACT RAIL GEOMETRIES A distinguishing feature of sliding carriage-and-rail setups is that manufacturers typically incorporate a ground groove in a rectangular track’s geometry (to serve as a working surface). Manufacturers typically build these rails in one of three shapes: • Rails with a boxway shape or square shape are simplest. Square rails excel at carrying large loads without a lot of deflection. Manufacturers often preload square rails, and most linear systems based on square rails do not self- align. Square rails often have a smaller envelope size; the boxway rails handle the highest loads in all directions. • Rails with a dovetail shape (or twin rail) have male geometry that securely engages female saddle geometry. That boosts stability and load capacity, even in unusual orientations or applications with unsteady loads. • Round rails deflect less under load. In addition, systems based on round rails are inherently self-aligning, so are easier to install than the other options. No matter the type, rails are available in a wide range of sizes and lengths. ROLLING-CONTACT FUNCTIONS AND OPTIONS Rolling-element linear systems need little force to initiate motion. In addition, friction-force variations due to speed are minimal, so these systems can position loads with small and precise steps. The low friction also lets these systems move at high speeds without generating too much heat. That minimizes wear to help machinery maintain a level accuracy for much of the linear system’s operating life. Manufacturers produce rolling-contact guides in several variations. The differences are in rolling element shape (ball or roller); rolling element size; whether the rolling contact is two or four-point; conformity of ball contact; whether the design has two, four, six or some other number of rolling-element rows; contact angle; and how the rolling-element rows are arranged—in an X or O configuration. All these design factors determine load capacity, rigidity and friction. For example, O-shaped arrangements can withstand higher torque than X arrangements. In general, the number of load-bearing rolling- element rows influences the load capacity … so more rail rows means more load capacity and rigidity. However, more rows makes systems more complex and costly. This linear plain bearing is PBC Linear Uni-Guide with a Frelon self-lubricating liner to lower the coefficient of friction, reduce wear, and boost load capacity. LinearMotion_PTGuide_V3.indd 72 4/29/16 11:49 AM
  • 75.
    IoT Enabled LinearMotion Smart | Integrated | Networkable Key Advantages 1. Simplified wiring and panel size reduction 2. Recipe-driven machine configurations 3. Simplified commissions, troubleshooting, and maintenance Lead Screw Ball Screw Belt Drive PBC LINEAR, A PACIFIC BEARING CO. 1-800-962-8979 | www.pbclinear.com | 6402 Rockton Road, Roscoe, IL 61073 | USA Full Range of Transmission and Bearing Options Single- and Multi-Axis Cartesian Robot Configurations Watch the IoT Video at www.pbclinear.com PBC Linear 3-16.indd 73 4/29/16 1:36 PM
  • 76.
    PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE 74 DESIGN WORLD— MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com Here are more details on these rolling-contact options: • Rolling elements are either linear rollers or balls. Because the rolling elements recirculate in recirculating rolling-element guides, they have a nearly infinite stroke length. They are available on flat guide ways and guide way rails. Flat guide ways are available in single or double row rolling elements. Guide way rails are often square rails. • Non-recirculating roller type units have limited stroke length. Flat guide ways are dominant here and have either a grooved race compatible with crossed rollers, or non-grooved race, which uses cage and roller-type rolling elements. • Recirculating elements (ball or roller bearings) between the rail and the bearing block enable precise linear motion. The coefficient of friction with roller-element- based systems is much less than with slide based linear motion guides … about 1/50th that of non-recirculating systems. Ball-type rolling element units are also subdivided into recirculating and non-recirculating types. The flat guide ways here typically use double row recirculating rolling elements. The guide way rail can be either round or square. If the raceway is not grooved, the rolling element is typically a linear ball bushing. If the raceway is grooved, the unit usually uses a ball spline. For square rails, the raceway is usually grooved. For ball-type rolling element units that are non-recirculating, the flat guide ways are grooved and use linear ball guides. The guide ways are round rail, without a grooved raceway, and use stroke bearings. QUICK NOTE ON FLUID-FLOATED BEARINGS Less common types of linear systems include hydrostatic or aerostatic linear-motion bearings. Because these systems have no mechanical contact, they are suitable for applications that need extremely accurate or quiet operation. Here’s how they work: A pressure regulator sends pressurized fluid between the rail and carriage. That lifts the carriage off the guideway by about 0.01 mm or so. Aerostatic versions use air as the fluid; hydrostatic linear bearings use specially formulated hydraulic oil. This type of guide is difficult to manufacture and expensive, but damps vibrations and allows for moves to 120 m/min and 10 g—useful for ultra-precision machines. This Rexroth CKL Compact Module incorporates a linear motor to deliver high force density with a compact package … for travel velocities up to 5 m/sec. A ball rail with central relubrication helps the module deliver precise positioning and zero backlash. LINEAR-RAIL LUBRICATION Some linear-motion systems need periodic application of lubricant, but many are available pre-lubricated. In addition, a number of systems use self-lubricated moving elements, eliminating the need for lubrication during the useful life. Note that the rails, ways and guides of linear motion systems tend to pick up dirt and debris from their application environment. For this reason, use carriages and slides with some kind of wiper system to keep the systems clean. When selecting linear systems, engineers should consider space limitations, accuracy needs, stiffness, travel length, magnitude and direction of loads, moving speed and acceleration, duty cycle, and the application’s environment. Note that an excessively large load or an impact load can permanently deform the raceway surface whether the linear guideway is at rest or in motion. Most manufacturers offer tables on the basic dynamic load rating, which can help engineers determine the proper load ratings for a system. Another caveat about friction: Friction measurements are carried out on all profiled rail systems. The friction values are given in tables in the manufacturers’ respective product catalogs. The level of friction depends on load, preload and sealing, taking into account travel speed, lubricant and runner block temperature. The total friction of a runner block includes the associated rolling or sliding friction, lubricant friction, and the friction of any seals. LinearMotion_PTGuide_V3.indd 74 4/29/16 11:49 AM
  • 77.
    LOCKING DEVICES 75DESIGN WORLD— MOTIONmotioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com 4 • 2016 ESSENTIAL INFORMATION FOR SHAFT COLLARS & LOCKING DEVICES LISA EITEL • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_LISAEITEL IN THE context of motion and machine design, locking devices are mechanical connections that attach power- transmission parts, such as gears, timing-belt pulleys and sprockets, to drive shafts. Locking devices keep rotary drive components secure and machines running. To put locking devices in context, here are common approaches to mount and lock drive components on shafts. • Keyways are notched geometry in a rotary component’s inner diameter to mate with notched geometry in the shaft. In many cases, a key or metal slug plugs into the notches to set the component’s radial orientation. Though prone to backlash and eventual failure, this locking method is still common in industrial applications and some drivetrains in consumer products. • Setscrews mount through the face of a rotary component to tension via threads through the component and shaft surface. These can mount rotary components that output unidirectional rotation in lightweight designs that aren’t subject to any shock. • Shaft collars clamp or screw-set onto shafts to act as mechanical stops and axially locate components and bearings on shafts. Solid versions that use setscrews can gouge shafts unless the engineer specifies flat-machined shaft sections. In contrast, collars with screw- tightened tapers that clamp onto shafts are more reliable. One caveat: In applications subject to shock, taper-based collars need an undercut on the shaft to have a positive stop so they don’t turn free. Two-piece designs simplify installation. • Taper-locking devices are any components that use a wedge action from tightening a screw or screws to induce radial locking pressure at a hub and shaft bore. For example, QD bushings (short for quick detachable) are split rings with a screw that bridges the flange and taper opening. Typically (though not always) a few inches in diameter or smaller, screw tensioning clamps the bushing to the shaft and replicates a shrink fit. As a side note, traditional shrink fits are when a mounted component’s inner diameter comes to an interference fit with the shaft on which it mounts. The installer heats the component so it expands; when it cools to room temperature, the ID contracts and locks to the shaft. This BLC Bearlok Shrink Disc from Whittet-Higgins Co. locks power-transmission components such as gears, conveyor rolls, sheaves, cam shafts, pulleys and sprockets to keyless shafts more securely than conventional collars. It’s balanced for high-speed applications and comes in alloy steel and black-oxide coated versions. This flange coupling from Ringfeder Power Transmission is for heavy-duty applications. It has shrink discs to integrate into machines without making the installer cool or heat the connections. LockingDevices_PTGuide_V1.indd 75 4/29/16 4:40 PM
  • 78.
    76 DESIGN WORLD— MOTION 4 • 2016 LOCKING DEVICE OPERATION AND CAVEATS For applications of medium torque and above, double-taper locking devices—more commonly called keyless locking devices or power locks, friction locks or shaft locks—connect radial power-transmission components to shafts by interference fit. These have inner and outer rings held together by bolts or capscrews. Internal inclined planes make the rings come together and expand inward (into the shaft) and outward (to the radial component’s hub-bore inner diameter). That makes a two-way gripping force to hold components to shafts in a way that’s rigid and free of backlash. There are some caveats. Locking devices expand to accommodate a range of shaft ODs and component-bore IDs, but design engineers should respect published ranges and pick a locking device that’s sized to the machine application (or change the latter to match a standard locking device). In addition, locking devices only deliver top performance when they’re installed correctly, with a torque wrench in a diametrical pattern … just as one lugs a tire to a vehicle. When selecting a mounting approach in conjunction with a coupling, match it to the application while remembering that locking devices work well with couplings in high-speed or reversing applications— engineered disc couplings, for example. (In contrast, locking devices are over-engineered for applications of below-average precision and basic couplings.) In addition, design engineers should specify a shaft finish that’s not overly smooth—say, between 40 and 120 Ra—so the locking device can hold fast, even under maximum load. These clamp-style shaft collars are designed and manufactured by Ruland Manufacturing to have high holding power. Suitable for medical equipment, they are often used to guide, space, stop, and align. Precise face to bore perpendicularity is maintained by having TIR of less than or equal to 0.002”, which is critical when the collar is used as a load-bearing face or for aligning gears or bearings. Shown here are just some of 3,600 standard shaft collars, couplings, and mounts from Stafford Manufacturing Corp. for packaging machinery. Options include Staff- Lok hinged collars that simplify opening, closing, and clamping connections by hand, as well as Grip & Go handles that convert standard shaft collars into adjustable locators. The components come in aluminum, steel, stainless steel, and plastic in ODs from 1/4 to 6 in. Options and finishes abound. WHITTET-HIGGINS manufactures quality oriented, stocks abundantly and delivers quickly the best quality and largest array of adjustable, heavy thrust bearing, and torque load carrying retaining devices for bearing, power transmission and other industrial assemblies; and specialized tools for their careful assembly. Visit our website–whittet-higgins.com–to peruse the many possibilities to improve your assemblies. Much technical detail delineated as well as 2D and 3D CAD models for engineering assistance. Call your local or a good distributor. 33 Higginson Avenue, Central Falls, Rhode Island 02863 Telephone: (401) 728-0700 • FAX: (401) 728-0703 E-mail: info@whittet-higgins.com Web: www.whittet-higgins.com POWER TRANSMISSION RETAINING DEVICES & maintenance & assembly tools W HITTET-HIGGINS USA BEARLOK SHOELOK BEARLOK Shrink Disc BEARHUG CLAMPNUT TANGENTLOK PRECISION NUTS & WASHERS ADAPTER SLEEVE ASSEMBLIES NUTS & WASHERS HARDENED TONGUE WASHERS SPLIT COLLAR RETHREADING DIES ADJUSTABLE SPANNER WRENCH BEARING ASSEMBLY SOCKET INCH and METRIC THREADS LEFT HANDED as well as RIGHT -HANDED Materials of: CARBON, ALLOY and HARDENED ALLOY STEELS Materials of: ALLUMINUM and CORROSION RESISTANT STEEL LockingDevices_PTGuide_V1.indd 76 4/29/16 11:53 AM
  • 79.
    Single Source Widest rangeof shaft collars including over 2,500 standard parts to simplify the design process and ensure the collar you need is available from stock. carefully Made Shaft collars are manu- factured from select north american bar stock in our Marlborough, Ma factory using proprietary processes developed over 75 years. SHafT collar Hub ruland.com is your source for product specifications, cad models, technical articles, installation videos, live inventory, and application support. Find CAD models for your next design at www.ruland.com Over2,500 shaft collarsfor your DESIGN. 3.21.16_R1_RU_Design World Ad_9x10.875.indd 2 3/21/16 12:16 PMRuland_PTGuide4-16.indd 77 4/29/16 1:43 PM
  • 80.
    78 DESIGN WORLD— MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE LUBRICATION BASICS REVIEW OF IN ANY system with moving parts, no matter how small or large, lubrication is essential. It performs a number of important functions including reducing friction, dissipating heat, and protecting components from corrosion and wear. Lubricants can be classified in a number of different ways, but usually are identified as either one of two kinds; oils or greases. Oil-based lubricants can be made from petroleum sources or newer synthetic oils. Greases have an oil base to which various thickening agents are added. MILES BUDIMIR • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_MOTION The most important parameters for evaluating lubricants include operating temperature, load, speed, viscosity, and application rate. Lubricants are available to accommodate a wide range of application needs. For instance, there are general-purpose greases that handle lubrication needs for general industrial uses as well as greases for special requirements and special applications. For example, there are greases for high temperatures and for low temperatures, as well as greases for high-load applications. There are also greases designed to be biodegradable as well as food-grade greases for use in food and beverage production facilities. Potential problems with lubrication can include two extremes of either using too little lubrication or using too much. Using too little lubrication can increase friction and heat, leading to premature component damage. On the The MINIRAIL carriage for this SCHNEEBERGER miniature guideway has a lubricant reservoir carrying LUBE S lubricant. It uses a capillary effect to apply tangential lubrication of the circulating bearings, no matter the installation orientation. So under normal conditions and appropriate loads, the reservoir works to 20,000 km of carriage travel. Lubrication_PTGuide_V2-mb.indd 78 4/29/16 11:58 AM
  • 81.
    LUBRICATION 79DESIGN WORLD —MOTIONmotioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com 4 • 2016 other hand, using too much lubrication can also generate additional heat, which can cause lubrication to break down thermally, ultimately leading to more component damage. Sticking to a maintenance schedule can help avoid damage due to improper or inadequate lubrication and ensure against premature equipment failure. LUBRICATION FOR MOTION CONTROL In motion control applications, lubrication plays a critical role, even though sometimes it can be an afterthought or taken for granted. All kinds of components need lubrication; from ballscrews and leadscrews to bearings, gears and motors. Lubrication is used to lubricate bearings in motors, linear motion components such as leadscrews and ballscrews as well as rails, ways and guides. Because ballscrews are a bearing system, they’ll need some type of lubrication to avoid metal-to-metal contact of the balls in the raceway. While the lubrication choice can be either oil or grease, it’s advisable to avoid solid additives (such as graphite) as they will clog the recirculation system. An NLGI no. 2 type grease is recommended but it should also depend on the application, whether food- grade or another special type of lubrication is required. Ballscrews, especially those used in machine tools, generally require lubricants with EP additives to prevent excessive wear. The frequency of lubrication will vary depending on factors such as the move cycle characteristics, or contamination in the environment. Leadscrew mechanisms using bronze nuts also need a lubricant, usually a thick damping grease. Leadscrew assemblies with plastic nuts can run well without lubricant due to the internal lubricants in the nut materials, but the use of a gel type lubricant will help increase allowable loading and extend life by reducing friction. If particulates are present, the screw should be cleaned before reapplying lubricant. Scheduled preventative maintenance should occur when there is no visible film remaining on the flanks of the screw thread. Grease should not be used in environments with significant particulate or debris that can load the grease and cause it to become an abrasive slurry. In this type of application, dry film lubricant should be used instead. PTFE coating is a dry film that creates a lubrication barrier between a metal substrate and a polymer bushing or lead nut. It is well suited for use with plastic nuts and stainless-steel leadscrews. Lubrication maintenance intervals can be eliminated and the coating does not attract particulate like a gel lubricant. There are linear motion systems that require periodic application of a lubricant, but most are available pre-lubricated. In addition, a number of systems use self- lubricated moving elements, eliminating the need for lubrication during the useful life. The rails, ways and guides of linear motion systems tend to pick up dirt and debris from their application environment. For this reason, it’s good to use carriages and slides with some kind of wiper system to keep the systems clean. “LUBRICANTS CAN BE CLASSIFIED IN A NUMBER OF DIFFERENT WAYS, BUT USUALLY ARE IDENTIFIED AS EITHER ONE OF TWO KINDS; OILS OR GREASES.“ Lubrication_PTGuide_V2-mb.indd 79 4/29/16 11:58 AM
  • 82.
    ClearPath brushless servomotorsfrom Teknic include a DSP-based vector servodrive, high-resolution encoder, and controller. The compact motors are low cost to let machine builders replace ac induction, stepper, dc brush, and other servomotors without sacrificing performance. PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE 80 DESIGN WORLD — MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com ELECTRIC MOTORS BASICS OF AC MOTORS All electric motors convert electrical energy to mechanical energy. Motors are typically divided into either ac— alternating current, or dc—direct current. The main difference is that ac motors take an input of ac current, while dc motors use dc current. For ac motors, speed control is done by varying the voltage and frequency (along with the number of magnetic poles) while on dc motors control is achieved by varying voltage and current. There is another common way to break down ac motors that is based on the magnetic principle that produces rotation. So there are two fundamental types of ac motors; induction motors and synchronous motors. In induction motors, the key idea is the rotating magnetic field. The most common source of this in ac motors is the squirrel cage configuration. This is essentially two rings, one at each end of the motor, with bars of aluminum or copper connecting the two ends. Induction motors have properties that make them especially well suited to a number of industrial as well as home appliance applications. For starters, they are simple and rugged motors that are easy to maintain. They also run at constant speed across a wide range of load settings, from zero to full-load. The only drawback is that induction motors are generally not amenable to speed control, although the availability of sophisticated variable- frequency drives means that even induction motors, usually three-phase induction motors, can now be speed controlled as well. The other type of ac motor is a synchronous motor. Synchronous motors are so named because they run synchronously with whatever the frequency of the source is. The motor speed is fixed and doesn’t change with changes to the load or voltage. These motors are primarily used where the requirement is precise and constant speed. Most synchronous motors are used in heavy industrial applications, with horsepower ratings ranging from the low hundreds up to thousands of hp. Synchronous motors can be used in motion control applications, but there are some down sides to using these motors. Because of the rotor size, the motor’s response in incrementing applications is typically not good. MILES BUDIMIR • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_MOTION Motors_PTGuide_V4.indd 80 4/29/16 12:03 PM
  • 83.
    Also, because accelerationof inertial loads may not be as high as other motor types, these motors may operate at irregular speeds and produce undesirable noise. And generally, synchronous motors are larger and more costly than other motors with the same horsepower rating. DC MOTORS Motors characterized as dc generate a magnetic field via electromagnetic windings or permanent magnets. According to most common industry naming conventions, there are three dc motor subtypes: brush motors, permanent-magnet (PM) motors, and universal motors. Many larger dc motors still employ brushes and wound fields, but PM motors dominate fractional and integral-horsepower applications below 18 hp. That being said, PM motors are increasingly common in many designs. In a brushed dc motor, the magnet acts as the stator. The armature is integrated onto the rotor and a commutator switches the current flow. The commutator’s function is to transfer current from a fixed point to the rotating shaft. Brushed dc motors generate torque straight from the dc power supplied to the motor by using internal commutation, fixed permanent magnets, and rotating electromagnets. Brushless dc (BLDC) motors, on the other hand, do away with mechanical commutation in favor of electronic commutation, which eliminates the mechanical wear and tear involved with brushed dc motors. In BLDC motors, the permanent magnet is housed in the rotor and the coils are placed in the stator. The coil windings produce a rotating magnetic field because they’re separated from each other electrically, which enables them to be turned on and off. The BLDC’s commutator does not bring the current to the rotor. Instead, the rotor’s permanent magnet field trails the rotating stator field, producing the rotor field. STEPPER MOTORS Stepper motors are one of the most common motors used in motion control applications. They’re used mostly in positioning applications and have the advantage of being able to be accurately controlled for the most precise positioning applications, down to fractions of a degree without the use of feedback devices such as encoders or resolvers. They are operated in open-loop (not closed-loop), without the need for tuning parameters as in closed-loop servo systems. Steppers are generally classified by the number of allowable steps they can be commanded to move. For instance, a 1.8 degree step motor is capable of 200 steps/revolution (1.8 x 200 = 360 degrees, or one full revolution) in full-step mode. If operated in half-step mode, each step becomes 0.9 degrees and the motor can then turn 400 steps/revolution. Another mode called microstepping subdivides the degrees per step even further, allowing for extremely precise movements. There are several different stepper motor technologies including permanent magnet motors, variable reluctance, and hybrid types. The principle of operation for stepper motors is fairly straightforward. Traditional variable reluctance stepper motors have a large number of electromagnets arranged around a central gear-shaped piece of iron. When any individual electromagnet is energized, the geared iron tooth closest to that electromagnet will align with it. This makes them slightly offset from the next electromagnet so when it is turned on and the other switched off, the gear MOTORS 81DESIGN WORLD — MOTIONmotioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com Motors_PTGuide_V4.indd 81 4/29/16 12:04 PM
  • 84.
    PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE 82 DESIGN WORLD— MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com moves slightly to realign. This continues with the energizing and de-energizing of individual electromagnets, thus creating the individual steps of motion. Stepper motors are relatively inexpensive and can be run open loop, requiring no feedback devices. Also, because the speed is proportional to the frequency of the input pulses, a wide range of speeds is attainable. However, while stepper motors are capable of producing high torque at low speeds, they generally are well suited for lower power applications not for applications requiring lots of torque to move heavier loads. They are best for applications requiring the control of rotation angle, speed, and position. A few drawbacks are that not properly controlling the motor can produce undesired resonance in the system. Also, stepper motors are generally not easy to operate at extremely high speeds. And as the motor speed increases, torque decreases. A stepper motor’s low-speed torque varies directly with current. How quickly the torque falls off at higher speeds depends on a number of factors such as the winding inductance and drive circuitry including the drive voltage. Steppers are generally sized according to torque curves, which are typically specified by the manufacturer. SERVOMOTORS The hallmark of any servomotor is the presence of feedback and closed-loop control. Servomotors provide precise control of torque, speed or position using closed-loop feedback. They can also operate at zero speed while maintaining enough torque to maintain a load in a given position. Servomotors have several distinct advantages over other types of motors. For starters, they offer more precise control of motion. This means they can accommodate complex motion patterns and profiles more readily. Also, because the level of precision offered is high, the position error is greatly reduced. The electric motor itself can be either an ac or a dc motor. Under the dc heading, brushed dc servomotors are generally less expensive than brushless servos, but do require more maintenance due to the brushes needed for motor commutation. Brushless servomotors are more expensive than brushed dc motors. Generally, these are used in applications requiring higher torque. Brushless dc servomotors are highly reliable and virtually maintenance free. However, the drives for brushless dc servomotors are more complex because the commutation is done electronically rather than mechanically as in the brushed dc motor. Another way to classify servomotors can be as either single-phase or three-phase motors. Motors of the single-phase variety can range from the simple and inexpensive brushed dc motors to voice coils for small micro- and nano-positioning applications. Servomotors also require a form of feedback, often with the feedback device, such as an encoder, built right into the motor frame. The feedback signal is needed by the control circuitry to close the control loop. It is this closed-loop control that gives servomotors their precise positioning ability. Lastly, the control circuitry typically involves a motion controller, which generates the motion profile for the motor, and a motor drive which supplies power to the motor based on the commands from the motion controller. Servomotors are used in many different industrial applications from machine tools, packaging machinery, communications and robotics applications to newer applications such as solar panel control and a broad range of automation control applications. The diversity of applications means that servomotors are designed for general-purpose indoor environments but also for specialized situations requiring them to withstand extreme temperatures and pressures outdoors as well as the special demands of food processing industries in washdown environments. The MCM series of synchronous servomotors from Lenze are optimized for a range of positioning tasks, including robotics, packaging equipment and handling systems. Featuring IP65-rated protection class housings, the motors come in power ratings up to 3.35 hp and torque ratings to 233.66 in-lb. Motors_PTGuide_V4.indd 82 4/29/16 12:05 PM
  • 85.
    The Only Coupling ToEarn Its Wings ©2016 Baldor Electric Company The NEW patented Baldor•Dodge® Raptor takes coupling innovation to greater heights. Utilizing a patented winged element design for higher bond strength and improved fatigue resistance, the Raptor delivers: • Longer driven equipment life and increased reliability • Easier installation and reduced maintenance • Drop-in interchangeability The Raptor is backed by over 50 years of natural rubber expertise and an industry leading 5-year warranty. Expect a higher level of reliability with the new Baldor•Dodge Raptor coupling. baldor.com 479-646-4711 Raptor’s slotted clamp rings offer more clearance at the bolt holes for an easier installation than competitive designs. Download a QR reader app and scan this code for more information. www.baldor.com/dodgeraptor Baldor_PTGuide4-16.indd 83 4/29/16 1:43 PM
  • 86.
    PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE 84 DESIGN WORLD— MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com POSITIONING STAGES BASICS OF MILES BUDIMIR • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_MOTION Linear stages for extremely fine positioning, such as the V-52x series from Physik Instrumente, feature a voice coil linear motor direct drive with 0.1-micrometer resolution. An integrated optical linear encoder and precision crossed roller bearings with anti-creep cage assist provide high positioning resolution and guiding accuracy. POSITIONING stages and tables are a part of many motion systems. Stages or tables, whether linear or rotary, are complete motion sub-systems themselves. That is, they’re comprised of components such as linear motion elements, motors or actuators, encoders, sensors and controllers. Stages have continued to evolve as their components improve. Some key developments include better mechanical components and innovations in feedback and control that are improving metrology, particularly in high-end stages. As a result, today’s positioning stages can do many things including making moves with incredible accuracy, synchronizing complicated axis commands, and optimizing travel from coarse and fine drives in tandem, closing the loop on one common position feedback. Stages and tables are used in a wide range of high-performance applications such as industrial robots, fiber optics and photonics, vision systems, machine tools, semiconductor equipment, medical component laser machining, micromachining, electronic manufacturing, and other industrial automation applications. Stages can provide one of several different types of motion. They can be linear, rotary, or even lift types (Z-axis positioning stages). Among these, they can be configured in many different ways including movement in one direction (or axis) only, in multiple directions (X-Y positioning), or for extremely small and precise movements, as in nanopositioning applications where moves are in the micro- or nano meter range. PositioningStages_PTGuide_V2-mb.indd 84 4/29/16 12:22 PM
  • 87.
      POSITIONING STAGES 85DESIGNWORLD — MOTION4 • 2016 MATTERS PERFORMANCE primatics.com • 541-791-9678 At Primatics, when we tell you that our precision motion products will perform to specification, you can be certain they will do just that. And, we have the data to back it up. We build high performance motion solutions that integrate easily and function seamlessly with complex automated systems. Our clients experience a high correlation between the test data we provide and the performance they are measuring in the field. When performance matters, Primatics delivers! The PXL33B is small form factor linear stage, optimized for higher accuracy, repeatability, and nanometer level minimum incremental motion. The drive mechanisms for positioning stages and tables can also vary significantly, depending on a number of factors including cost and desired accuracy. For instance, stages can be direct-drive types driven by linear servomotors or by a combination of motors and gearing and couplings, and can be linear or rotary actuator driven (either using electric actuators, or even pneumatic of hydraulic actuation). Other methods can include belt and pulley systems, ballscrews or leadscrews. Precision and accuracy requirements can also dictate design decisions such as the components used in assembling a positioning stage. One kind of component used in stages where reliability and high accuracy are desired are air bearings. Air bearings support a load with a thin film of pressurized air between the fixed and moving elements. They are typically referred to as aerostatic bearings, because a source of pressure rather than relative motion supplies the film of air. Unlike ordinary bearings, the surfaces of an air bearing do not make mechanical contact, so these systems do not need to be lubricated. Because the surfaces do not wear, the systems don’t generate particulates, which makes them suitable for clean-room applications. When supplied with clean, filtered air, the bearings can operate without failure for many years. PositioningStages_PTGuide_V2-mb.indd 85 4/29/16 12:54 PM
  • 88.
    86 DESIGN WORLD— MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE SEALS REVIEW OF SEALS perform a vital job in any power transmission system—they keep dirt and other ingress materials from entering and damaging critical, internal components. They also have the equally important job of preventing leakage of necessary lubricants, such as oil, grease or hydraulic fluid. Molded seals and v-shaped seals are two of the most common seals found in power transmission applications. V-shaped seals, such as wipers, are used most commonly in fluid power systems to prevent contaminants from entering a system while allowing lubricating oils to return to a system on inward stroke of the hydraulic piston. Molded seals, which are more common in power transmission applications, can be further divided into O-rings, radial lip seals and shaft seals. O-rings are one of the most common types of seals because of their simple and inexpensive construction. They are designed to create a seal between the interfaces of two or more components. They generally consist of an elastomer ring with a circular cross section and are usually placed in a groove. They are used frequently in hydraulic components, particularly on cylinder pistons and rotating pump shafts. Mechanical face seals, or heavy-duty seals, are used in extreme applications, such as bearings, gearboxes, turbines and machinery that is used in extremely tough and dirty environments, such as mining and agriculture. They feature two metal seal rings identical in nature that mount separately on a lapped face seal. A flexible, elastomer element centers the metal rings, allowing one half to rotate while the other remains still. While many seals are designed primarily to keep debris from entering a machine, radial lip seals are designed to keep lubricants within a machine that has rotating or oscillating parts. These seals are available as one of two types— spring loaded and non-spring These all-rubber HSS seals are specially developed to protect large size bearings under the tough operating conditions in heavy industrial applications such as metal rolling mills, mining equipment or wind turbines. A well-proven sealing lip design and a new concept of reinforcement provides high stability. Image courtesy of SKF Some seals — such as this Centritec Seal from the Carlyle Johnson Machine Co. — work even in vertical shafts for rotating machinery. This particular design uses centrifugal pressure and includes a sump to collect lubrication when equipment stops (so there’s no weepage). They’re appropriate for conveyors, gearboxes and heavy equipment. Image courtesy of Trelleborg Sealing Solutions MARY GANNON • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_MARYGANNON Seals_PTGuide_V4.indd 86 4/29/16 12:31 PM
  • 89.
    C E NT A P O W E R T R A N S M I S S I O N L E A D I N G B Y I N N O V AT I O N 2570 Beverly Dr. #128, Aurora, IL 60502 T 630.236.3500 Catalog downloads at www.centa.info • Email inquiries to dw@centacorp.com The global leader in flexible couplings for power transmission and motion control. Trust the innovator-trust CENTA. Maintenance Free | Lower Bearing Forces Reduced Total Cost of Ownership MAKE THE C O N N EC TI O N precompressed-rubber in compression torsionally rigid - zero backlash CENTAFLEX-Series XCENTAFLEX-Series BCENTAFLEX-Series A customizable curved jaw SEALS 87DESIGN WORLD — MOTIONmotioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com 4 • 2016 loaded. Each is suited to a particular type of lubricant, grease or oil. Non-spring loaded seals are suited for applications that use a highly viscous lubricant and operate at slower shaft speeds. Spring-loaded seals are best paired with lubricants with low viscosity and higher speeds. The spring helps the seal lip maintain its contact with the shaft even as the seal material itself breaks down. In addition to keeping contaminants out and fluids in, rotary and shaft seals have the extra benefit of providing low friction and resistance to wear, thus extending component life. When selecting a seal, fluid or lubricant type, material compatibility is critical. The four most commonly used materials for sealing applications are polyurethane (PU), acrylonitrile-butadiene-rubber (NBR), fluoro rubber (FKM), and polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE). For example, PTFE is common in hydraulic systems for its resistance to high temperatures and corrosive chemicals and fluids. Nitrile rubber provides wear and aging resistance for lower temperature applications. FKM is best in higher temperature applications, or where extremely aggressive fluids are present. PTFE is one of the most commonly used materials in O-ring seals, particularly in hydraulic systems. They offer resistance to high temperatures and corrosive fluids and chemicals. Image courtesy of Trelleborg Sealing Solutions Hackensack, NJ 07601, USA ∙ +1.201.343.8983 ∙ main@masterbond.com www.masterbond.com Seals_PTGuide_V4.indd 87 4/29/16 12:31 PM
  • 90.
    PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE 88 DESIGN WORLD— MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com SHOCK & VIBRATION ABSORBERS THE BASICS OF MARY GANNON • SENIOR EDITOR • @DW_MARYGANNON MOTION is present in almost all industrial automation systems. Stopping or changing the direction of that motion releases kinetic energy, which can cause shock and vibration to occur. Any sudden shock in a system can cause immediate damage to the overall machine and the components it may be manufacturing or processing. And consistent vibration inputs can cause damaging fatigue over time. This is why it’s necessary to decelerate a system smoothly through the use of shock and vibration attenuation components. Based on the type of inputs present in the application, vibration and shock attenuation components can be comprised of shock absorbers, linear dampers, wire rope or spring isolators, elastomeric isolators, air springs, or structural damping treatments. These devices help manufacturers reduce equipment downtime and costly cycle time limitations. These products can be used in a broad range of applications, from the rate control mechanisms that slow the motion of the overhead luggage bin or seat recline on commercial aircraft, to the isolators which keep GPS systems from losing signal or becoming damaged on farm and construction equipment as they harvest crops or pave roadways. Most shock absorbers achieve their damping characteristics through the use of hydraulic fluids. The fluid is pushed by a piston and rod through small orifice holes to create damping, and this action compresses some type of gas. This in turn creates a spring force to return the rod back to its starting position when the load is removed. Besides mechanical devices, elastomer and other synthetic and rubber pads can also damp vibration and isolate shock loads. These material blocks, tubes, bushings and washers dissipate energy in a variety of applications. Manufacturers usually tailor the geometry, thickness and durometer of the material pieces to meet specific design requirements. Common uses are in lab and testing equipment, aerospace, foundations for presses, plants and machines, under cranes, as impact plates, for pipelines and bridges, and in other heavy-duty applications. In some cases, the manufacturer assembles the material in layers to create strong cushioning plates that protect machinery subsystems against impacts and isolate vibration and structure-borne noise. For example, PAD plates from ACE Controls withstand compressive loads to 10,000 psi (69 N/ mm2 ) depending on plate form and size. Another custom product called Sorbothane (from a company with the same name) is a thermoset that attenuates shock with near-faultless memory. That means its deformation is elastic and not plastic, so pads of the material reliably return to their original shape. Custom pieces of the material work for vibration damping, acoustic damping and isolation. Sorbothane works by turning mechanical energy into heat as the material is deformed. Molecular friction generates heat energy that translates perpendicularly away from the axis of incidence. Designed to meet specific requirements such as load, area, and natural frequency, many of these padding materials come in soft, rubber- like consistencies that are forgiving in most environments. Predicting the natural frequency of an application lets material manufacturers target known disturbance frequencies to dissipate energy. The lower the ratio of natural system frequency to disturbance frequency, the more it’s possible to isolate problem vibrations. SLABS OF MATERIAL ALSO DAMP VIBRATION RIGHT: Material pads such as these custom Sorbothane components can isolate vibrations. The manufacturer designs and manufactures them in a variety of shapes, sizes and durometers. Each part is specific to the design and function requirements of end products and set client parameters. TOP: SLAB damping pads from ACE Controls are made of a viscoelastic PUR and adapt to myriad applications. A calculating tool helps users configure pieces with product engineers. Shocks_PTGuide_V3.indd 88 4/29/16 12:51 PM
  • 91.
  • 92.
    90 DESIGN WORLD— MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE Shock absorbers and dampers are generally made of high- strength steel to handle the pressures from the internal hydraulic forces. Elastomeric seals prevent the fluid from leaking out of the cylinder, and special plating and coatings keep the units protected from harsh operating environments. Recent and ongoing developments in sealing technologies and in the internal designs of shock absorbers and dampers have allowed for longer service life and more compact designs. Ongoing research in the field of noise attenuation (high frequency, low amplitude vibration) has led to an increased effectiveness in noise reduction technologies. A unique application for these types of hydraulic damping devices has come with the increased awareness for seismic and environmental protection of our infrastructure (buildings and bridges, for example). By adding damping to these critical structures, energy is absorbed by the hydraulic devices instead of damaging the structure. Vibration isolation products rely generally on mechanical designs to achieve their isolation characteristics. A spring function provides support for the mounted equipment, while decoupling it from the vibration source. Friction and elastomeric material properties give the isolators their damping characteristics. Isolators can be made from a variety of materials. Wire rope and spring isolators can be made from carbon steel, stainless steel or aluminum. Elastomeric isolators generally have metallic Industrial shock absorbers are available in a variety of sizes and styles to help prevent the sudden release of kinetic energy in a system, reducing potential and catastrophic machine damage. Photo courtesy ACE Controls Deceleration & Vibration Technology: Expect more than Automation Control! Motion Control Custom control of hand forces Safety Products Protection for all machine designs under any condition Vibration Control Isolate unwanted vibrations Automation Control Optimum tuning for any design More Info? Tel. 800-521-3320 Email: shocks@acecontrols.com Download a CAD file or our product sizing software at: www.acecontrols.com by ACE Shocks_PTGuide_V3.indd 90 4/29/16 12:52 PM
  • 93.
    SHOCK & VIBRATIONABSORBERS 91DESIGN WORLD — MOTIONmotioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com 4 • 2016 Wire rope isolators reduce system vibration, which can cause damaging fatigue over time. Photo courtesy ITT Enidine components that function as mounting brackets, separated by an elastomeric material that provides the stiffness and damping desired. Common elastomeric compounds include natural rubber, neoprene and silicone; however, a vast selection of compounds and compound blends can be used to achieve different characteristics specific to the application. Air springs are comprised of metallic end fittings coupled by a composite elastomeric-based bladder that contains the compressed air used to provide isolation. These single-acting designs are comprised of a pressurized bladder and two end plates. As air is directed into the air bladders, they are expanded linearly. All of these reusable designs are self- contained, offering a number of advantages over any other technology that may require outside componentry. For example, hydraulic systems may require plumbing while electrical systems may require wiring and power. Energy or power dissipation is key when selecting a damper or shock-absorbing device. The size and characteristics of the device are based on these inputs, so it is generally the first consideration to make. Dynamic spring rate and damping are the two biggest considerations when selecting an isolator. These characteristics will define the natural frequency (sometimes referred to as resonant frequency) of the isolation system and are important in achieving the desired performance. Shocks_PTGuide_V3.indd 91 4/29/16 12:55 PM
  • 94.
    PowerTransmission REFERENCEGUIDE 92 DESIGN WORLD— MOTION 4 • 2016 motioncontroltips.com | designworldonline.com ACE Controls Inc. ..................................................... 90 All Motion ................................................................. 81 Altra Industrial Motion Corp. .................................... 53 AMETEK PMC ............................................................ 1 AMETEK/DFS (Windjammer) .................................... 21 AutomationDirect ....................................................... 9 Baldor Electric ....................................................83, BC BellowsTech. LLC ...................................................... 43 Bison Gear & Engineering Corp. .............................IBC Bodine Electric Company ......................................... 65 Carlyle Johnson ........................................................ 22 Centa Corporation ................................................... 87 CGI, Inc. ............................................................. 12, 13 Custom Machine and Tool Co. Inc. .......................... 29 DIEQUA Corporation ............................................... 59 Dunkermotoren, part of AMETEK ............................ 71 GAM Gear ................................................................ 47 Groschopp. Inc ......................................................... 67 Harmonic Drive ......................................................... 61 Haydon/Kerk .............................................................. 3 igus, inc. ............................................................. 24, 25 Intech ........................................................................ 63 ITT Enidine ............................................................... 89 KHK USA Inc. ............................................................ 55 Kuebler Inc. .............................................................. 45 Martin Sprocket ........................................................ 36 Master Bond ............................................................. 87 Neugart USA Corp. .................................................. 57 NSK Precision ........................................................... 17 PBC Linear ................................................................ 73 PITTMAN .................................................................... 7 Primatics, Inc. ........................................................... 85 Promess Inc. ............................................................... 2 Power Transmission Distributors Association ........... 49 R+W America ........................................................... 48 Rotor Clip Company, Inc. ......................................... 39 Ruland Manufacturing .............................................. 77 SAB North America .................................................. 33 Serapid Inc. .............................................................. 19 Servometer ............................................................... 43 SEW Eurodrive .......................................................... 51 Teledyne LeCroy ......................................................... 5 THK America, Inc. ....................................................IFC Whittet-Higgins Co. .................................................. 76 Zero-Max, Inc. ........................................................... 23 LEADERSHIP TEAM Publisher Mike Emich memich@wtwhmedia.com 508.446.1823 @wtwh_memich Managing Director Scott McCafferty smccafferty@wtwhmedia.com 310.279.3844 @SMMcCafferty EVP Marshall Matheson mmatheson@wtwhmedia.com 805.895.3609 @mmatheson Followthewholeteamontwitter@DesignWorld CONNECT WITHUS! Michelle Flando mflando@wtwhmedia.com 440.670.4772 @mflando Mike Francesconi mfrancesconi@wtwhmedia.com 630.488.9029 David Geltman dgeltman@wtwhmedia.com 516.510.6514 @wtwh_david Neel Gleason ngleason@wtwhmedia.com 312.882.9867 @wtwh_ngleason Tom Lazar tlazar@wtwhmedia.com 408.701.7944 @wtwh_Tom Jim Powers jpowers@wtwhmedia.com 312.925.7793 @jpowers_media Courtney Seel cseel@wtwhmedia.com 440.523.1685 @wtwh_CSeel SALES Mike Caruso mcaruso@wtwhmedia.com 469.855.7344 Todd Christenson tchristenson@wtwhmedia.com 440.381.9048 @wtwh_todd Jessica East jeast@wtwhmedia.com 330-319-1253 @wtwh_MsMedia Michael Ference mference@wtwhmedia.com 408.769.1188 @mrference Ad Index DESIGN WORLD does not pass judgment on subjects of controversy nor enter into dispute with or between any individuals or organizations. DESIGN WORLD is also an independent forum for the expression of opinions relevant to industry issues. Letters to the editor and by-lined articles express the views of the author and not necessarily of the publisher or the publication. Every effort is made to provide accurate information; however, publisher assumes no responsibility for accuracy of submitted advertising and editorial information. Non-commissioned articles and news releases cannot be acknowledged. Unsolicited materials cannot be returned nor will this organization assume responsibility for their care. DESIGN WORLD does not endorse any products, programs or services of advertisers or editorial contributors. Copyright© 2016 by WTWH Media, LLC. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, or by recording, or by any information storage or retrieval system, without written permission from the publisher. Subscription Rates: Free and controlled circulation to qualified subscribers. Non-qualified persons may subscribe at the following rates: U.S. and possessions: 1 year: $125; 2 years: $200; 3 years: $275; Canadian and foreign, 1 year: $195; only US funds are accepted. Single copies $15 each. Subscriptions are prepaid, and check or money orders only. Subscriber Services: To order a subscription or change your address, please email: designworld@halldata.com, or visit our web site at www.designworldonline.com POSTMASTER: Send address changes to: Design World, 6555 Carnegie Ave., Suite 300, Cleveland, OH 44103 WTWH Media, LLC 6555 Carnegie Ave., Suite 300 Cleveland, OH 44103 Ph: 888.543.2447 FAX: 888.543.2447 Index_PTGuide_V1.indd 92 5/2/16 9:34 AM
  • 95.
    We make yourproducts go.™ THE BEST JUST GOT BETTER... To learn more about PowerSTAR® right-angle gearmotors, please visit Bison’s NEW WEBSITE at www.bisongear.com or call 1-800-AT-BISON. ©2014 Bison Gear and Engineering Corp. AC and DC options available now 1/15 - 1/2 HP; 35-1780 in-lbs • AC MOTOR OPTIONS: 115V 1PH, 115/230V 1PH 230V 3PH Inverter Duty, 230/400-460 50/60HZ 3PH • DC MOTOR OPTIONS 720 frame size: 12V, 24V, 90V, 130V and 180V 725 frame size: 12V, 24V, 90V, 130V and 180V 730 frame size: 24V, 90V and 130V • Maximum power density means a compact profile without compromising performance • Ground gearing provides whisper quiet operation, low backlash precision • Latest hypoid gear technology ensures less friction/heat and extends product life • Versatile mounting interchangeability to easily upgrade your installed drives • Exclusive PowerSTAR® EP lubricant for extended life Runs Cooler & Longer Lasting than Traditional Right Angle Gearmotors DC AC Bison Gear 7-15.indd 1 4/29/16 1:45 PM
  • 96.
    The Only Coupling ToEarn Its Wings ©2016 Baldor Electric Company The NEW patented Baldor•Dodge® Raptor takes coupling innovation to greater heights. Utilizing a patented winged element design for higher bond strength and improved fatigue resistance, the Raptor delivers: • Longer driven equipment life and increased reliability • Easier installation and reduced maintenance • Drop-in interchangeability The Raptor is backed by over 50 years of natural rubber expertise and an industry leading 5-year warranty. Expect a higher level of reliability with the new Baldor•Dodge Raptor coupling. baldor.com 479-646-4711 Raptor’s slotted clamp rings offer more clearance at the bolt holes for an easier installation than competitive designs. Download a QR reader app and scan this code for more information. www.baldor.com/dodgeraptor Baldor_PTGuide4-16.indd 83 4/29/16 1:46 PM